This page was created by the IDL library routine
mk_html_help. For more information on
this routine, refer to the IDL Online Help Navigator
or type:
? mk_html_help
Last modified: Sun Jun 28 08:25:20 2009.
NAME:
AdjustPosition
PURPOSE:
This is a program for interactively adjusting the plot position
coordinates. The result of the function is a four-element floating
point array of normalized coordinates, suitable for passing to the
POSITION keyword of most IDL graphics commands.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
position = AdjustPosition(startingPosition)
OPTIONAL INPUTS:
startingPosition - A four-element array of normalized coordinates
of the form [x0, y0, x1, y1].
OUTPUTS:
position - The adjusted plot position. A four-element array of normalized coordinates.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
GROUP_LEADER - The group leader of this program. This keyword
is required to ensure modal operation when calling from
another widget program.
TITLE - The title of the window. "Adjust Plot Position in Window..." by default.
XOFFSET - The X offset of the program on the display. Calculated from the
upper left-hand corner of the display.
YOFFSET - The Y offset of the program on the display. Calculated from the
upper left-hand corner of the display.
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
CANCEL - Returns a 1 if the user selects the Cancel button. Returns 0 otherwise.
Note that if the use cancels, the "position" parameter is set to the value of
the "startingPosition" parameter.
DEPENDENCIES:
Reqires FSC_FIELD and FSC_PLOTWINDOW from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_field.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_plotwindow.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David Fanning, March 2001.
(See adjustposition.pro)
NAME:
ARCSAMPLE
PURPOSE:
Given X and Y points that describe a closed curve in 2D space,
this function returns an output curve that is sampled a specified
number of times at approximately equal arc distances.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
ArcSample, x_in, y_in, x_out, y_out
INPUT_PARAMETERS:
x_in: The input X vector of points.
y_in: The input Y vector of points.
OUTPUT_PARAMETERS:
x_out: The output X vector of points.
y_out: The output Y vector of points.
KEYWORDS:
POINTS: The number of points in the output vectors. Default: 50.
PHASE: A scalar between 0.0 and 1.0, for fine control of where interpolates
are sampled. Default: 0.0.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 1 December 2003, based on code supplied
to me by Craig Markwardt.
(See arcsample.pro)
NAME:
ASINHSCL
PURPOSE:
This is a utility routine to perform an inverse hyperbolic sine
function intensity transformation on an image. I think of this
as a sort of "tuned" gamma or power-law function. The algorithm,
and notion of "asinh magnitudes", comes from a paper by Lupton,
et. al, in The Astronomical Journal, 118:1406-1410, 1999 September.
I've relied on the implementation of Erin Sheldon, found here:
http://cheops1.uchicago.edu/idlhelp/sdssidl/plotting/tvasinh.html
I'm also grateful of discussions with Marshall Perrin on the IDL
newsgroup with respect to the meaning of the "softening parameter", beta,
and for finding (and fixing!) small problems with the code.
Essentially this transformation allow linear scaling of noise values,
and logarithmic scaling of signal values, since there is a small
linear portion of the curve and a much large logarithmic portion of
the curve. (See the EXAMPLE section for some tips on how to view this
transformation curve.)
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
outputImage = ASINHSCL(image)
ARGUMENTS:
image: The image or signal to be scaled. Written for 2D images, but arrays
of any size are treated alike.
KEYWORDS:
BETA: This keyword corresponds to the "softening parameter" in the Lupon et. al paper.
This factor determines the input level at which linear behavior sets in. Beta
should be set approximately equal to the amount of "noise" in the input signal.
IF BETA=0 there is a very small linear portion of the curve; if BETA=200 the
curve is essentially all linear. The default value of BETA is set to 3, which
is appropriate for a small amount of noise in your signal. The value is always
positive.
NEGATIVE: If set, the "negative" of the result is returned.
MAX: Any value in the input image greater than this value is
set to this value before scaling.
MIN: Any value in the input image less than this value is
set to this value before scaling.
OMAX: The output image is scaled between OMIN and OMAX. The
default value is 255.
OMIN: The output image is scaled between OMIN and OMAX. The
default value is 0.
RETURN VALUE:
outputImage: The output, scaled into the range OMIN to OMAX. A byte array.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
EXAMPLES:
Plot, ASinhScl(Indgen(256), Beta=0.0), LineStyle=0
OPlot, ASinhScl(Indgen(256), Beta=0.1), LineStyle=1
OPlot, ASinhScl(Indgen(256), Beta=1.0), LineStyle=2
OPlot, ASinhScl(Indgen(256), Beta=10.), LineStyle=3
OPlot, ASinhScl(Indgen(256), Beta=100), LineStyle=4
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires SCALE_VECTOR from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/scale_vector.pro
Incorporates ASINH from the NASA Astronomy Library and renamed ASINHSCL_ASINH.
http://idlastro.gsfc.nasa.gov/homepage.html
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 24 February 2006.
Removed ALPHA keyword and redefined the BETA keyword to correspond
to the "softening parameter" of Lupton et. al., following the
suggestions of Marshall Perrin. 25 April 2006. DWF.
(See asinhscl.pro)
NAME:
ASPECT
PURPOSE:
This function calculates and returns the normalized position
coordinates necessary to put a plot with a specified aspect ratio
into the currently active graphics window. It works on the display
output window as well as in a PostScript output window.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
position = ASPECT(aspectRatio)
INPUTS:
aspectRatio: A floating point value that is the desired aspect
ratio (ratio of heigth to width) of the plot in the current
graphics output window. If this parameter is missing, an aspect
ratio of 1.0 (a square plot) is assumed.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
MARGIN: The margin around the edges of the plot. The value must be
a floating point value between 0.0 and 0.5. It is expressed in
normalized coordinate units. The default margin is 0.15.
WINDOWASPECT: The aspect ratio of the target window. If not provided,
the value is obtained from the current graphics window.
OUTPUTS:
position: A four-element floating array of normalized coordinates.
The order of the elements is [x0, y0, x1, y1], similar to the
!P.POSITION system variable or the POSITION keyword on any IDL
graphic command.
EXAMPLE:
To create a plot with an aspect ratio of 1:2 and a margin of
0.10 around the edge of the output window, do this:
plotPosition = ASPECT(0.5, Margin=0.10)
PLOT, Findgen(11), POSITION=plotPosition
Notice this can be done in a single IDL command, like this:
PLOT, Findgen(11), POSITION=ASPECT(0.5, Margin=0.10)
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David Fanning, November 1996.
Added better error checking, 18 Feb 1997, DWF.
Added WindowAspect keyword. 10 Feb 2000. DWF
Added double precision tolerance for aspectRatio. 9 NOV 2001 BT
(See aspect.pro)
NAME:
BINARY
PURPOSE:
This function is used to display a binary representation of byte,
integer, and long integer values.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
output = Binary(theNumber)
RETURN VALUE:
output: A string array of 0s and 1s to be printed (normally), in a
binary representation of the number. The number is represented with
the highest bits on the left and the lowest bits on the right,
when printed with the PRINT command.
ARGUMENTS:
theNumber: The number for which the user wants a binary representation.
It must be BYTE, INT, or LONG.
KEYWORDRS:
COLOR: If this keyword is set, the binary representation always
contains 24 bits of output.
SEPARATE: If this keyword is set, the output is separated with space
between each group of eight bits.
EXAMPLE:
IDL> Print, Binary(24B)
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
IDL> Print, Binary(24L)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
IDL> Print, Binary(24L, /COLOR)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
IDL> Print, Binary(24L, /COLOR, /SEPARATE)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, November 10, 2007.
Fixed a problem with error handling. 13 March 2008. DWF.
(See binary.pro)
NAME:
BITGET
PURPOSE:
Returns the bit value (0 or 1) of a specified bit in a supplied number.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
bitValue = BitGet(number, bit)
INPUT_PARAMETERS:
number: The input number. Should be a scalar integer. If not, it is converted to
one by rounding.
bit: The number of the bit you are interested in. A value between 0 and 63.
If not supplied, all 64 bit values of the number are returned. May be
an array of bit numbers.
OUTPUT_PARAMETERS:
bitValue: The value, 0 or 1, of the specified bit in the number.
KEYWORDS:
SILENT: If set, suppresses informational messages regarding rounding operations.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 14 June 2006.
(See bitget.pro)
NAME:
BLENDIMAGE
PURPOSE:
This alpha blends two 24-bit images and displays them with the TVIMAGE command.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
BlendImage, foregroundImage, backgroundImage
INPUTS:
foregroundImage: A 24-bit foreground image with the same dimensions as the background image.
backgroundImage: A 24-bit background image with the same dimensions as the foreground image.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
ALPHA: A number between 0 and 1 that indicates the percentage of the background image
to alpha-blend into the background image. For example, ALPHA=0.8 will give
a weigth of 80% to the background image pixels and 20% to the foreground image
pixels.
Note: Any keywords appropriate to the TVIMAGE command are also accepted.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 26 May 2009.
(See blendimage.pro)
NAME:
Blob_Analyzer::FitEllipse
PURPOSE:
This function fits an ellipse to a particular blob and returns information
about the fit to the user.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
ellipsePts = theBlobs -> FitEllipse(indexNumber)
RETURN VALUE:
ellipsePts: A [2,n] array containing the XY points of the fitted ellipse. The values
are in scaled units unless the NOSCALE keyword is set, in which case the
values are in DEVICE units.
ARGUMENTS:
indexNumber: The index number of the blob. Indices start at 0 and go to n-1.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
NOSCALE: Set this keyword if you would prefer that lengths and positions NOT be
scaled in the output of this function. If not scaled, results are in pixel
or device coordinates. The default is to scale all output.
NPOINTS: The number of points in the ellipse. By default, 120.
OUTPUT KEYWORDRS:
AXES: A two-element array containing the lengths of the major and minor axes,
respectively. Lenghts are scaled unless the NOSCALE keyword is set.
CENTER: A two-element array containing the [x,y] values of the center of the ellipse.
Values are scaled unless the NOSCALE keyword is set.
ORIENTATION: The orientation of the ellipse. The value is in degrees counter-clockwise of
the postive X direction. Note that a value of 60 is the same as a value of 240.
In other words, there is no direction associated with this value.
SEMIAXES: A two-element array containing the lengths of the semi-major and semi-minor axes,
respectively. Lenghts are scaled unless the NOSCALE keyword is set. (Half the length
of AXES.
(See blob_analyzer__define.pro)
NAME:
Blob_Analyzer::GetIndices
PURPOSE:
This function returns the indices of a blob to the caller.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
indices = theBlobs -> GetIndices(indexNumber)
RETURN VALUE:
indices: A vector of blob indices that describes the blob in the original image.
ARGUMENTS:
indexNumber: The index number of the blob. Indices start at 0 and go to n-1.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
None.
OUTPUT KEYWORDRS:
COUNT: The number of indices in the indices vector.
XSIZE: The X size of the image from which the blob is taken.
YSIZE: The Y size of the image from which the blob is taken.
(See blob_analyzer__define.pro)
NAME:
Blob_Analyzer::GetStats
PURPOSE:
This function returns statistics of the blob in question.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
statistics = theBlobs -> GetStats(indexNumber)
RETURN VALUE:
statistics: A structure of statistics that is defined like this.
stats = {INDEX: indexNumber, $ ; The index number of this blob.
COUNT: N_Elements(indices), $ ; The number of indices in this blob.
PERIMETER_PTS: boundaryPts, $ ; A [2,n] array of points that describe the blob perimeter.
PIXEL_AREA: pixelArea, $ ; The area as calculated by pixels in the blob.
PERIMETER_AREA: perimeterArea, $ ; The area as calculated by the blob perimeter. (Smaller than pixel area.)
CENTER: centroid[0:1], $ ; The [x,y] array that identifies the centroid of the blob.
PERIMETER_LENGTH: perimeter_length, $ ; The perimenter length (scaled unless the NOSCALE keyword is set).
SCALE: scale, $ ; The [xscale, yscale] array used in scaling.
MINCOL: Min(xyindices[0,*]), $ ; The minimum column index in the blob.
MAXCOL: Max(xyindices[0,*]), $ ; The maximum column index in the blob.
MINROW: Min(xyindices[1,*]), $ ; The minimum row index in the blob.
MAXROW: Max(xyindices[1,*])} ; The maximum row index in the blob.
ARGUMENTS:
indexNumber: The index number of the blob. Indices start at 0 and go to n-1.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
NOSCALE: Set this keyword if you would prefer that lengths and positions NOT be
scaled in the output of this function. If not scaled, results are in pixel
or device coordinates. The default is to scale all output.
OUTPUT KEYWORDRS:
INDICES: A vector of blob indices that describes the blob in the original image.
XYINDICES: A 2xN array of column/row indices that describes teh blob in the original image.
NOTES:
The statistics are calculated by calling FIND_BOUNDARY from the Coyote Library. This program
uses a chain-code algorithm to calculate the perimeter and report the blob area using either of
two methods: a strict pixel area (counts the number of pixels in the blob times the scale factor
and takes the total), or it uses the perimeter to calculate an area using the method described in
Russ, The Image Processing Handbook, 2nd Edition, pp490+. The perimeter area is almost always less
than the pixel area.
(See blob_analyzer__define.pro)
NAME:
Blob_Analyzer::INIT
PURPOSE:
This function initializes the Blob_Analyzer object.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
theBlobs = Obj_New('Blob_Analyzer', image)
ARGUMENTS:
image: A two-dimensional image array. To make this program memory efficient,
a copy of the image is *not* stored in the object. You will be responsible
for image operations outside this program.
KEYWORDS:
ALL_NEIGHBORS: Set this keyword to look at all eight neighbors when searching
for connectivity. The default is to look for four neighbors on
each side of the starting pixel. Passed directly to LABEL_REGION.
MASK: A two-dimensional array, the same size as image, that identifies the
foreground and background pixels in the image. Applying the mask
should result in a bi-level image of 0s and 1s, where 1 identifies the
blobs you wish to analyze. If a mask is not provided, the mask is created
like this:
mask = image > 0
SCALE: A one- or two-dimensional given the pixel scaling parameters. By default [1.0, 1.0].
If passed a scalar, the scale parameter is applied to both the X and Y directions of
each pixel. Statistical output is reported with scaling unless the NOSCALE keyword
is set. Scaling also effects the data that is output from the various methods.
(See blob_analyzer__define.pro)
NAME:
Blob_Analyzer::NumberOfBlobs
PURPOSE:
This function returns the number of blobs in the input image.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
numBlobs = theBlobs -> NumberOfBlobs()
RETURN VALUE:
numBlobs: The number of blobs in the input image.
ARGUMENTS:
None.
KEYWORDS:
None.
(See blob_analyzer__define.pro)
NAME:
Blob_Analyzer::ReportStats
PURPOSE:
This function reports statistics on blobs in the image.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
theBlobs -> ReportStats
ARGUMENTS:
None.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
FILENAME: The name of a file to contain the statistical output.
NOSCALE: Set this keyword if you would prefer that lengths and positions NOT be
scaled in the output of this function. If not scaled, results are in pixel
or device coordinates. The default is to scale all output.
TOFILE: Normally the report is sent to standard ouput. If this keyword is set,
the output is sent to a file.
OUTPUT KEYWORDRS:
None.
EXAMPLE:
Here is an example of statistical output from the example program below.
INDEX NUM_PIXELS CENTER_X CENTER_Y PIXEL_AREA PERIMETER_AREA PERIMETER_LENGTH MAJOR_AXIS MINOR_AXIS ANGLE
0 426 107.89 9.78 106.50 98.00 37.56 12.15 11.29 -8.05
1 580 151.97 10.22 145.00 134.25 49.21 17.49 11.77 -0.99
2 812 266.29 15.36 203.00 190.75 52.56 17.88 14.65 -107.48
3 1438 204.53 43.29 359.50 344.13 70.23 21.68 21.12 -76.47
(See blob_analyzer__define.pro)
NAME:
BLOB_ANALYZER__DEFINE
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this routine is to create a system for analyzing
regions of interest (ROIs) or (more commonly) "blobs" inside images.
In particular, given a suitable image (this will require judgement on
your part), the program will automatically select "blobs" or connected
regions in the image and make it possible for you to analyze these
blobs. An example program is provided to show you one way the program
can be used.
The code is a wrapper, essentially, for LABEL_REGION and HISTOGRAM, with
a couple of my other image processing routines (FIND_BOUNDARY and FIT_ELLIPSE)
used in a supporting role.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Analysis, Image Processing
CALLING SEQUENCE:
analyzer = Obj_New("BLOB_ANALYZER", image)
INPUTS:
image: A two-dimensional image array. To make this program memory efficient,
a copy of the image is *not* stored in the object. You will be responsible
for image operations outside this program.
KEYWORDS:
ALL_NEIGHBORS: Set this keyword to look at all eight neighbors when searching
for connectivity. The default is to look for four neighbors on
each side of the starting pixel. Passed directly to LABEL_REGION.
MASK: A two-dimensional array, the same size as image, that identifies the
foreground and background pixels in the image. Applying the mask
should result in a bi-level image of 0s and 1s, where 1 identifies the
blobs you wish to analyze. If a mask is not provided, the mask is created
like this:
mask = image > 0
SCALE: A one- or two-dimensional given the pixel scaling parameters. By default [1.0, 1.0].
If passed a scalar, the scale parameter is applied to both the X and Y directions of
each pixel. Statistical output is reported with scaling unless the NOSCALE keyword
is set. Scaling also effects the data that is output from the various methods.
OBJECT METHODS:
The following methods are provided. Please see the documentation header for each method for
information on arguments and keywords that can be used with the method.
FitEllipse: This method fits an ellipse to the blob. It returns information about the fitted
ellipse, including the points that all the ellipse to be drawn.
GetIndices: This method returns the indices for a particular blob in the image.
GetStats: This method returns a structure containing statistics for a particular blob in the image.
The structure is defined as follows:
stats = {INDEX: indexNumber, $ ; The index number of this blob.
COUNT: N_Elements(indices), $ ; The number of indices in this blob.
PERIMETER_PTS: boundaryPts, $ ; A [2,n] array of points that describe the blob perimeter.
PIXEL_AREA: pixelArea, $ ; The area as calculated by pixels in the blob.
PERIMETER_AREA: perimeterArea, $ ; The area as calculated by the blob perimeter. (Smaller than pixel area.)
CENTER: centroid[0:1], $ ; The [x,y] array that identifies the centroid of the blob.
PERIMETER_LENGTH: perimeter_length, $ ; The perimenter length (scaled unless the NOSCALE keyword is set).
SCALE: scale, $ ; The [xscale, yscale] array used in scaling.
MINCOL: Min(xyindices[0,*]), $ ; The minimum column index in the blob.
MAXCOL: Max(xyindices[0,*]), $ ; The maximum column index in the blob.
MINROW: Min(xyindices[1,*]), $ ; The minimum row index in the blob.
MAXROW: Max(xyindices[1,*])} ; The maximum row index in the blob.
NumberOfBlobs: The number of blobs identified in the image.
ReportStats: This methods reports statistics on every identified blob in the image. The
report can be sent to the display (the default) or to a file. The format for
the report works for most images, but you may have to change the format or override
this method for your particular image. The reported statistics are basically the
output of the GetStats and FitEllipse methods.
Here is an example of statistical output from the example program below.
INDEX NUM_PIXELS CENTER_X CENTER_Y PIXEL_AREA PERIMETER_AREA PERIMETER_LENGTH MAJOR_AXIS MINOR_AXIS ANGLE
0 426 107.89 9.78 106.50 98.00 37.56 12.15 11.29 -8.05
1 580 151.97 10.22 145.00 134.25 49.21 17.49 11.77 -0.99
2 812 266.29 15.36 203.00 190.75 52.56 17.88 14.65 -107.48
3 1438 204.53 43.29 359.50 344.13 70.23 21.68 21.12 -76.47
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires programs from the Coyote Library. At the very least, those below are required.
It is *highly* recommended that you install the entire library. FIT_ELLIPSE has been
changed specifically for this release, so by sure you get a copy of that with this
source code.
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/coyoteprograms.zip
ERROR_MESSAGE http://www.dfanning.com/programs/error_message.pro
FIND_BOUNDARY http://www.dfanning.com/programs/find_boundary.pro
FIT_ELLIPSE http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fit_ellipse.pro
The program currently works only with 2D bi-level images.
EXAMPLE:
To run an example program. Compile the file and type "example" at the IDL command line.
IDL> .compile blob_analyzer__define
IDL> example
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, Fanning Software Consulting, 17 August 2008.
Ideas taken from discussion with Ben Tupper and Ben's program HBB_ANALYZER.
(See blob_analyzer__define.pro)
NAME:
BOXPLOT
PURPOSE:
This is graphics routine to display a box plot, also known as a box and
whisker plot, in IDL direct graphics. The box encloses the interquartile
range (IQR), defined at IQR75-IQR25. The whiskers extend out to the maximum
or minimum value of the data, or to the 1.5 times either the IQR75 or IQR25,
if there is data beyond this range. Outliers are identified with small circles.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
Boxplot, data
REQUIRED INPUTS:
data: A two-dimensional array. The data for each box plot will be in
the columns of the data array. There will be one box plot drawn
for each column in the data array. The maximum column size is 28.
As an alternative, data can be a pointer array, in which case
there will be one box plot drawn for each valid pointer in the array.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
AXES_COLOR: A string color name, as appropriate for the FSC_COLOR program.
By default, the same as the COLOR keyword. Used only if OVERPLOT
keyword is not set.
BACKGROUND_COLOR: A string color name, as appropriate for the FSC_COLOR program.
By default, 'white'. Used only if OVERPLOT keyword is not set.
BOXCOLOR: If FILLBOXES is set, the IQR box is filled with this color. By default, "ROSE".
COLOR: A string color name, as appropriate for the FSC_COLOR program.
By default, 'charcoal'. The boxplot will be drawn in this color.
FILLBOXES: Set this keyword to fill the IQR box with a color, specified by BOXCOLOR.
LABELS: A string array of the same length as the number of columns of data.
The boxplots will be labeled with these labels along the X axis.
Used only if OVERPLOT keyword is not set.
MISSING_DATA_VALUE: Set this keyword to a value that will be used to identify missing data.
Missing data is not used in the calculations of the box plot.
OVERPLOT: If this keyword is set, the boxplots will be overdrawn on the current
set of axes. The X axis will be presumed to be scaled from 0 to 1 more
than the number of columns in data.
ROTATE: Set to a value between -90 and 90 degree. The labels will be rotated this
amount. Positive values rotate in CCW fashion, negative values in CW fashion.
Any other keywords (e.g., POSITION, XTITLE, YTITLE, etc.) that are appropriate for
the PLOT command can be used with this procedure.
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
STATS: Set this to a named variable that will return an array of structures
for each of the columns of data. The structure will be defined as
this:
struct = { Median:0.0D, Mean: 0.0D, Min:0.0D, Max:0.0D, $
Q25:0.0D, Q75:0.0D, IQR:0.0D, SDEV:0.0D, N:0L }
Where "mean" is the median value of the data, "Q25" and "Q75" are the 25th percent
quartile and 75th percent quartile of the data, repectively, "IRG" is the
Interquartile Range, SDEV is the standard deviation, and N is the number of points
used to construct the box plot.
REQUIRES:
Several program from the Coyote Library (http://www.dfanning.com/documents/programs.html)
are required. Among them are these:
ERROR_MESSAGE (http://www.dfanning.com/programs/error_message.pro)
FSC_COLOR (http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_color.pro)
SYMCAT (http://www.dfanning.com/programs/symcat.pro)
EXAMPLE:
Here is an example, using data from the Michaelson-Morley speed of light experiment,
in which they made five experiments of 20 measurements of the speed of light each.
The data can be downloaded from here:
http://www.dfanning.com/misc/mm_data.dat
Here are the IDL commands to read the data and produce a box plot of it.
OpenR, 1, 'mm_data.dat'
header = Strarr(2)
Readf, 1, header
data = Intarr(5, 20)
Readf, 1, data
Close, 1
Boxplot, data, XTITLE='Experiment Number', YTITLE='Speed of Light'
An article about his program can be found here:
http://www.dfanning.com/graphics_tips/box_whisker.html
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 4 March 2009.
Added STATS keyword to return data statistics. 5 March 2009. DWF.
Added MISSING_DATA_VALUE keyword to identify missing values. 14 March 2009. DWF.
Removed limitation of LABELS array having no more than 28 elements. 14 March 2009. DWF.
Made it possible to pass a pointer array containing the data, if desired. 14 March 2009. DWF.
Added ROTATE keyword to rotate labels. 16 March 2009. DWF.
Added several modifications to guard against ill-formed data in the BoxPlot_Draw
procedure. 23 March 2009. DWF.
Added keywords FILLBOXES and BOXCOLOR. 24 March 2009. DWF.
Redefined the STATS structure to include MEAN and to store values as doubles. 25 March 2009. DWF.
Fixed in a bug that resulted in incorrect behavior when the MISSING_DATA_VALUE keyword
was used. 8 April 2009. DWF.
Fixed a typo that didn't allow a single column vector to be displayed as a box plot. 17 May 2009. DWF.
Now allow a single row vector to be passed into program and displayed. 20 May 2009. DWF.
(See boxplot.pro)
NAME:
CAPFIRSTLETTER
PURPOSE:
Given a string, separates the parts by white space, commas,
semi-colons, or colons. Each part has the first letter capitalized.
The returned string has the capitalized parts separated by a space.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
capitalizedString = CatFirstLetter(theString)
AUGUMENTS:
theString: The input string.
RETURN_VALUE:
capitalizedString: The capitalized output string. There is a space between parts
(words) of the input string.
KEYWORDS:
None.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 29 July 2005.
(See capfirstletter.pro)
NAME:
CENTERTLB
PURPOSE:
This is a utility routine to position a widget program
on the display at an arbitrary location. By default the
widget is centered on the display.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
CenterTLB, tlb, [x, y, /NOCENTER, /DEVICE]
REQUIRED INPUTS:
tlb: The top-level base identifier of the widget program. This must
be a valid widget ID.
OPTIONAL INPUTS:
x: Set this equal to a normalized position for the center
of the widget as measured from the left-hand side of the screen.
The default value is 0.5 (the center) Setting this equal to 1.0
places the widget at the far right-hand side of the screen.
y: Set this equal to a normalized position for the center
of the widget as measured from the bottom of the screen.
The default value is 0.5 (the center) Setting this equal to 1.0
places the widget at the top of the screen.
KEYWORDS:
DEVICE: Normally, the x and y parameters are specified in normalized
coordinates. If this keyword is set, they are taken to be in DEVICE
coordinates.
NOCENTER: By default, the center of the widget is positioned at the
location specified by the x and y parameters. If NOCENTER is set
to a non-zero value, then the upper left corner of the widget
is postioned at the specifed location.
PROCEDURE:
The program should be called after all the widgets have
been created, but just before the widget hierarchy is realized.
It uses the top-level base geometry along with the display size
to calculate offsets for the top-level base that will center the
top-level base on the display.
COMMENT:
Regardless of the values set for x, y and NOCENTER, the widget
is not permitted to run off the display.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: Dick Jackson, 12 Dec 98.
Modified to use device-independent Get_Screen_Size
function. 31 Jan 2000. DWF.
Added x, y, NOCENTER and run-off protection. 26 Jan 2001. BT.
Added a maximum value of 1280 for X screen size. This helps
center the widget on a single monitor when using dual
monitor settings with some graphics cards. 3 Feb 2003. DWF.
Added DEVICE keyword. 4 January 2006. DWF.
(See centertlb.pro)
NAME:
Checkerboard
PURPOSE:
This function returns a 2D image, with boxes of alternating colors.
Checkerboard images are useful in certain types of image processing
procedures and for making blended image masks.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Image Processing
CALLING SEQUENCE:
board = Checkerboard()
RETURN VALUE:
board: A 2D long array of alternating colored boxes.
ARGUMENTS:
boxes: The number of boxes of alternating colors on each side
of the resulting image. Must be an even integer greater
than or equal to two. Optional. Default is 8 (normal
checkerboard).
INPUT KEYWORDS:
BLACK: The value of the "black" boxes. By default, 0.
WHITE: The value of the "white" boxes. By default, 255.
XSIZE: The X size of the returned image. By default, 400.
YSIZE: The Y size of the returned image. By default, 400.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires FSC_COLOR from the Coyote Library.
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_color.pro
EXAMPLE:
IDL> TVImage, Checkerboard()
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 26 September 2007, based on suggestions
of JD Smith on IDL newsgroup 25-26 Septermber 2007.
(See checkerboard.pro)
NAME:
CIndex
PURPOSE:
This is a program for viewing the current colors in the
colortable with their index numbers overlayed on each color.
On 24-bit systems you must click the cursor in the graphics window
to see the colors in the current color table.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY: Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE: CIndex
INPUTS: None.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
BREWER: If this keyword is set, the BREWER colors will be loaded with the
Change Colors button. (Assuming the brewer color table file, fsc_brewer.tbl,
has been installed.
OUTPUTS: None
OPTIONAL OUTPUTS: None
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
NOTIFYID: A two-element array containing the Change Colors button widget
identifier and the identifier of the top-level base widget. This
array is meant to be sent to an XCOLORS routine via its NOTIFYID
keyword. This will allow instant updating of the CINDEX interface.
COMMON BLOCKS: None
SIDE EFFECTS: None
RESTRICTIONS: Reqires XCOLORS and TVIMAGE from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/xcolors.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/tvimage.pro
PROCEDURE:
Draws a 31x25 set of small rectangles in 256 different colors.
Writes the color index number on top of each rectangle.
MODIFICATION HISTORY: Written by David Fanning, May 1995
Widgetized and made it work in 24-bit color. Colors are
updated by clicking in window. 22 Oct 98. DWF
Replace POLYFILL with TV command to avoid underflow error in
Z-buffer. 8 March 99. DWF
Fixed a problem with 24-bit devices with color decomposition ON. 15 Feb 2000. DWF.
Added the NOTIFYID keyword, 15 Dec 2005. DWF.
Added BREWER keyword, 19 May 2008. DWF.
(See cindex.pro)
NAME:
CLIPBOARD
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to copy the contents of a
graphics window to the clipboard for subsequent pasting into
applications such as Photoshop or Powerpoint.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
CLIPBOARD, window_index
OPTIONAL INPUTS:
window_index: The window index number of the graphics window to
copy. If absent, the current graphics window is used
by default.
KEYWORDS:
All COLOR_QUAN keywords are allowed. In particular, if you are
taking snapshots of line plots with few colors in them, you may
get better results by calling the program with the CUBE=6 keyword
set. Otherwise, white colors can sometimes be a bit gray.
OUTPUTS:
None.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
DEPENDENCIES:
Uses the IDLgrClipboard object introduced in IDL 5.2(?).
PROCEDURE:
Copies the window contents to a clipboard object.
EXAMPLE:
IDL> Window
IDL> Plot, Findgen(11)
IDL> CLIPBOARD
RESTRICTIONS:
May not work for all applications. Applications tested successfully
include: Framemaker, Powerpoint, Photoshop, Excel, Microsoft Word.
Converts 24-bit images to 2D images with color tables.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 24 October 2001.
Added _EXTRA keyword to pass COLOR_QUAN keywords along. 28 Oct 2002. DWF.
(See clipboard.pro)
NAME:
CLIPSCL
PURPOSE:
This is a utility routine to perform linear scaling (similar to BYTSCL)
on image arrays. If differs from BYTSCL only in that a user-specified
percentage of pixels can be clipped from the image histogram, prior to
scaling. By default, two percent of the pixels are clipped. Clipping
occurs at both ends of the image histogram.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
scaledImage = CLIPSCL(image, clipPercent)
ARGUMENTS:
image: The image to be scaled. Written for 2D images, but arrays
of any size are treated alike.
clipPercent: The percent of image clipping. Optional argument is set
to 2 by default. Must be value between 0 and 49. Clipping
occurs from both ends of image histogram, so a clip of 2
linearly scales approximately 96% of the image histogram.
Clipping percents are approximations only, and depend
entirely on the distribution of pixels in the image. For
interactive scaling, see XSTRETCH.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
NEGATIVE: If set, the "negative" of the result is returned.
OMAX: The output image is scaled between OMIN and OMAX. The
default value is 255.
OMIN: The output image is scaled between OMIN and OMAX. The
default value is 0.
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
THRESHOLD: A two-element array containing the image thresholds for clipping.
RETURN VALUE:
scaledImage: The output, scaled into the range OMIN to OMAX. A byte array.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
EXAMPLES:
LoadCT, 0 ; Gray-scale colors.
image = LoadData(22) ; Load image.
TV, ClipScl(image, 4)
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires SCALE_VECTOR from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/scale_vector.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 6 September 2007.
(See clipscl.pro)
NAME:
COLOR24
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to convert a RGB color triple
into the equivalent 24-bit long integer. The 24-bit integer
can be decomposed into the appropriate color by interpreting
the lowest 8 bits as red, the middle 8 bits as green, and the
highest 8 bits as blue.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics, Color Specification.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
color = COLOR24(rgb_triple)
INPUTS:
RGB_TRIPLE: A three-element column or row array representing
a color triple. Or an N-by-three element array of color triples.
The values of the elements must be between 0 and 255.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
None.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
None.
EXAMPLE:
To convert the color triple for the color YELLOW,
(255, 255, 0), to the hexadecimal value '00FFFF'x
or the decimal number 65535, type:
color = COLOR24([255, 255, 0])
This routine was written to be used with device-independent
color programs like GETCOLOR.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David Fanning, 3 February 96.
Completely revised the algorithm to accept color arrays. 19 October 2000. DWF.
(See color24.pro)
NAME:
COLORBAR
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this routine is to add a color bar to the current
graphics window.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics, Widgets.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
COLORBAR
INPUTS:
None.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
ANNOTATECOLOR: The name of the "annotation color" to use. The names are those for
FSC_COLOR, and using the keyword implies that FSC_COLOR is also in
your !PATH. If this keyword is used, the annotation color is loaded
*after* the color bar is displayed. The color will be represented
as theColor = FSC_COLOR(ANNOTATECOLOR, COLOR). This keyword is provide
to maintain backward compatibility, but also to solve the problem of
and extra line in the color bar when this kind of syntax is used in
conjunction with the indexed (DEVICE, DECOMPOSED=0) model is used:
LoadCT, 33
TVImage, image
Colorbar, Color=FSC_Color('firebrick')
The proper syntax for device-independent color is like this:
LoadCT, 33
TVImage, image
Colorbar, AnnotateColor='firebrick', Color=255
BOTTOM: The lowest color index of the colors to be loaded in
the bar.
CHARSIZE: The character size of the color bar annotations. Default is !P.Charsize.
COLOR: The color index of the bar outline and characters. Default
is !P.Color..
DIVISIONS: The number of divisions to divide the bar into. There will
be (divisions + 1) annotations. The default is 6.
FONT: Sets the font of the annotation. Hershey: -1, Hardware:0, True-Type: 1.
FORMAT: The format of the bar annotations. Default is '(I0)'.
INVERTCOLORS: Setting this keyword inverts the colors in the color bar.
MAXRANGE: The maximum data value for the bar annotation. Default is
NCOLORS.
MINRANGE: The minimum data value for the bar annotation. Default is 0.
MINOR: The number of minor tick divisions. Default is 2.
NCOLORS: This is the number of colors in the color bar.
NODISPLAY: COLORBAR uses FSC_COLOR to specify some of it colors. Normally,
FSC_COLOR loads "system" colors as part of its palette of colors.
In order to do so, it has to create an IDL widget, which in turn
has to make a connection to the windowing system. If your program
is being run without a window connection, then this program will
fail. If you can live without the system colors (and most people
don't even know they are there, to tell you the truth), then setting
this keyword will keep them from being loaded, and you can run
COLORBAR without a display.
POSITION: A four-element array of normalized coordinates in the same
form as the POSITION keyword on a plot. Default is
[0.88, 0.10, 0.95, 0.90] for a vertical bar and
[0.10, 0.88, 0.90, 0.95] for a horizontal bar.
RANGE: A two-element vector of the form [min, max]. Provides an
alternative way of setting the MINRANGE and MAXRANGE keywords.
REVERSE: Setting this keyword reverses the colors in the colorbar.
RIGHT: This puts the labels on the right-hand side of a vertical
color bar. It applies only to vertical color bars.
TICKNAMES: A string array of names or values for the tick marks.
TITLE: This is title for the color bar. The default is to have
no title.
TOP: This puts the labels on top of the bar rather than under it.
The keyword only applies if a horizontal color bar is rendered.
VERTICAL: Setting this keyword give a vertical color bar. The default
is a horizontal color bar.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
Color bar is drawn in the current graphics window.
RESTRICTIONS:
The number of colors available on the graphics display device (not the
PostScript device) is used unless the NCOLORS keyword is used.
Requires the FSC_COLOR program from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_color.pro
EXAMPLE:
To display a horizontal color bar above a contour plot, type:
LOADCT, 5, NCOLORS=100
CONTOUR, DIST(31,41), POSITION=[0.15, 0.15, 0.95, 0.75], $
C_COLORS=INDGEN(25)*4, NLEVELS=25
COLORBAR, NCOLORS=100, POSITION=[0.15, 0.85, 0.95, 0.90]
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 10 JUNE 96.
10/27/96: Added the ability to send output to PostScript. DWF
11/4/96: Substantially rewritten to go to screen or PostScript
file without having to know much about the PostScript device
or even what the current graphics device is. DWF
1/27/97: Added the RIGHT and TOP keywords. Also modified the
way the TITLE keyword works. DWF
7/15/97: Fixed a problem some machines have with plots that have
no valid data range in them. DWF
12/5/98: Fixed a problem in how the colorbar image is created that
seemed to tickle a bug in some versions of IDL. DWF.
1/12/99: Fixed a problem caused by RSI fixing a bug in IDL 5.2. Sigh... DWF.
3/30/99: Modified a few of the defaults. DWF.
3/30/99: Used NORMAL rather than DEVICE coords for positioning bar. DWF.
3/30/99: Added the RANGE keyword. DWF.
3/30/99: Added FONT keyword. DWF
5/6/99: Many modifications to defaults. DWF.
5/6/99: Removed PSCOLOR keyword. DWF.
5/6/99: Improved error handling on position coordinates. DWF.
5/6/99. Added MINOR keyword. DWF.
5/6/99: Set Device, Decomposed=0 if necessary. DWF.
2/9/99: Fixed a problem caused by setting BOTTOM keyword, but not NCOLORS. DWF.
8/17/99. Fixed a problem with ambiguous MIN and MINOR keywords. DWF
8/25/99. I think I *finally* got the BOTTOM/NCOLORS thing sorted out. :-( DWF.
10/10/99. Modified the program so that current plot and map coordinates are
saved and restored after the colorbar is drawn. DWF.
3/18/00. Moved a block of code to prevent a problem with color decomposition. DWF.
4/28/00. Made !P.Font default value for FONT keyword. DWF.
9/26/00. Made the code more general for scalable pixel devices. DWF.
1/16/01. Added INVERTCOLORS keyword. DWF.
5/11/04. Added TICKNAME keyword. DWF.
9/29/05. Added REVERSE keywords, which does the *exact* same thing as
INVERTCOLORS, but I can never remember the latter keyword name. DWF.
1/2/07. Added ANNOTATECOLOR keyword. DWF.
4/14/07. Changed the default FORMAT to I0. DWF.
5/1/07. Unexpected consequence of default format change is colorbar annotations
no longer match contour plot levels. Changed to explicit formating of
colorbar axis labels before PLOT command. DWF.
5/25/07. Previous change has unanticipated effect on color bars using
logarithmic scaling, which is not really supported, but I have an
article on my web page describing how to do it: http://www.dfanning.com/graphics_tips/logcb.html.
Thus, I've fixed the program to accommodate log scaling, while still not OFFICIALLY
supporting it. DWF.
10/3/07. Method used to calculate TICKNAMES produces incorrect values in certain cases when
the min and max range values are integers. Now force range values to be floats. DWF.
10/17/07. Accidentaly use of INTERP keyword in CONGRID results in wrong bar values for
low NCOLORS numbers when INVERTCOLORS or REVERSE keyword is used. Removed INTERP keyword. DWF.
11/10/07. Finished fixing program to accommodate log scaling in ALL possible permutations. DWF.
8 Feb 2008. Added CRONJOB keyword and decided to use month names when I write the date. DWF.
8 Feb 2008. Renamed CRONJOB to NODISPLAY to better reflect its purpose. DWF.
21 May 2008. Changed the default CHARSIZE to !P.CHARSIZE from 1.0. DWF.
30 Oct 2008. Fixed a problem with the FONT keyword not being recognized in certain
configurations.
(See colorbar.pro)
NAME:
COLORBAR__DEFINE
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this routine is to implement a COLORBAR object
class. The ColorBar is rendered in the direct graphics system.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
colorbar = Obj_New("COLORBAR")
INPUTS:
All inputs to the program are via keyword parameters.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
Background: Background color. This is the color with which the colorbar is
erased. The default color is !P.Background.
Bottom: Bottom color index of colors allocated to colorbar.
Charsize: Character size of annotation. Default is 1.0.
Color: Color of annotation and outline. Default is !P.Color.
Font: Font to use for annotation. Default is -1, Hershey fonts.
Format: Format of annotation. Default is "(F8.2)".
Major: The number of major tick intervals. Default is 5.
Minor: The number of minor tick intervals. Default is 2.
MinusOne: Set this keyword to choose MinusOne keyword on the Congrid command
that resizes the colorbar into the window.
NColors: The number of colors allocated to colorbar. Default is (256 <
!D.N_Colors).
Neighbor: Set to indicate Nearest Neighbor sampling for Congrid. Default is
0 (Bilinear).
Position: The position of colorbar in normalized coordinates. Default for a
horizontal colorbar is [0.15, 0.88, 0.85, 0.95]. Default for a
vertical colorbar is [0.88, 0.15, 0.95, 0.85]. These defaults are
designed for a 400 by 400 window.
Range: The data range on colorbar. Default is [0, 255].
TickLen: The length of tick marks. Default is -0.1
TickV: Locations for the tick marks in data units. This is the same as
the [XY]TickV keyword. Default is to do what IDL would do
normally.
Vertical: Set this keyword if you want a vertical colorbar. Default is
horizontal.
XEraseBox: A five-element vector of X points (normalized) for erasing the
colorbar plot. Normally this keyword will not have to be used.
The program uses the plot REGION for erasing. But larger
character sizes can result in annotation going outside the
region enclosed by the plot. If that is the case, then use this
keyword along with YEraseBox to specify a larger-than-normal
erasure area. The points are sent to the POLYFILL command for
erasing.
POLYFILL, xEraseBox, yEraseBox, /Normal, Color=background
YEraseBox: A five-element vector of Y points (normalized) for erasing the
colorbar plot.
OBJECT METHODS:
Clamp: This procedure method allows the color bar range to be "clamped"
to a particular data range.
Draw: This procedure method draws the colorbar in the display window. The
ERASE keyword to this method will erase the current colorbar (by
calling the ERASE method) before drawing the colorbar in the display
window.
colorbar->Draw
Erase: This procedure method erases the colorbar object in the window. It
accomplishes this by performing a POLYFILL in the background color.
This method is primarily useful for interactive graphics display
devices.
colorbar->Erase
GetProperty: This procedure method allows one to obtain the current state
of the object via the keyword parameters listed above.
colorbar->GetProperty, Range=currentRange, Title=currentTitle
Print, currentRange, currentTitle
SetProperty: This procedure method allows one to set the properties of the
colorbar object via the keywords described above. In addition,
a DRAW and ERASE keyword are provided so that the colorbar can
be immediately drawn when the new property is set.
colorbar->SetProperty, Range=[500, 15000], /Erase, /Draw
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
The display window is not erased first.
RESTRICTIONS:
None.
EXAMPLE:
To create a colorbar, use it, then destroy it, type:
colorbar = Obj_New("COLORBAR", Title='Colorbar Values', Range=[0,1000],$
Format='(I4)')
Window
LoadCT, 5
colorbar->Draw
colorbar->SetProperty, Range=[0,500], /Erase, /Draw
Obj_Destroy, colorbar
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David Fanning, Fanning Software Consulting,
26 November 1998.
Added Horizontal keyword to SetProperty method and fixed problem in
going from Vertical to Horizontal color bars. 29 Nov 1998. DWF.
Added LoadCT method and current color table index to object.
6 December 1998.
Fixed a bug dealing with nearest neighbor resampling. 30 Mar 1999. DWF.
Fixed a bug with how NCOLORS and BOTTOM keywords interacted.
29 Aug 1999. DWF.
10 Oct 99. Modified the program so that current plot and map coordinates
are saved and restored after the colorbar is drawn. DWF.
26 May 2000 Added {XY}TICKV capability to the draw method. This
required adding TickV to the object data structure, and to the
INIT, GetProperty and SetProperty methods.
Changed default tick length to -0.1. DWF (and Jack Saba)
18 Nov 2001. Added Clamp method. DWF.
(See colorbar__define.pro)
NAME:
ColorButtonBitmap
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to create a 24-bit bitmap that can be used to
create a colored widget button.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Widget Programming
CALLING SEQUENCE:
bitmap = ColorButtonBitmap(theText)
button = Widget_Button(tlb, Value=bitmap)
REQUIRED INPUTS:
theText - The text you wish to have on the button.
OUTPUTS:
bitmap - A 3xMxN byte array, representing a 24-bit image that is used
as a button value.
OPTIONAL KEYWORDS:
BGCOLOR - The name of the background color. For example, 'Yellow', 'Tan', etc.
The name must be compatible with names appropriate for FSC_COLOR.
FGCOLOR - The name of the foreground color. For example, 'Navy', 'Black', etc.
The name must be compatible with names appropriate for FSC_COLOR.
DEPENDENCIES:
Reqires FSC_COLOR from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_color.pro
EXAMPLE:
tlb = Widget_Base(/Row, /Exclusive)
button1 = Widget_Button(tlb, Value=ColorButtonBitmap('Button 1')) ; Normal button.
button2 = Widget_Button(tlb, Value=ColorButtonBitmap('Button 2', FGCOLOR='YELLOW', BGCOLOR='NAVY'))
button3 = Widget_Button(tlb, Value=ColorButtonBitmap('Button 3', BGCOLOR='YELLOW', FGCOLOR='NAVY'))
Widget_Control, tlb, /Realize
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David Fanning, May 25, 2007 based on code named BitmapForButtonText supplied to the IDL
newsgroup by Dick Jackson: http://www.dfanning.com/tip_examples/bitmapforbuttontext.pro.
Fixed a problem with foreground and background colors that caused them to work correctly only
when color decomposition is on--as it should be :-). 6 May 2009.
(See colorbuttonbitmap.pro)
NAME:
CONTRASTZOOM
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to demonstrate how to
zoom an image "in place" and how to window and level
(set "contrast and brightness") an image using object
graphics functionality. The exercise involves using
multiple views in an object graphics scene, and being
able to interact with different views in different ways.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Widgets, Object Graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
ContrastZoom, image
REQUIRED INPUTS:
None. The image "mr_knee.dcm" from the examples/data directory
is used if no data is supplied in call.
OPTIONAL INPUTS
image: A 2D image array of any data type.
OPTIONAL KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
COLORTABLE: The number of a color table to use as the image palette.
Color table 0 (grayscale) is used as a default.
GROUP_LEADER: The group leader for this program. When the group leader
is destroyed, this program will be destroyed.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
None. The Coyote Library program VCOLORBAR is included.
EXAMPLE:
To use this program with your 8-bit image data and a red-temperature
color scale, type:
IDL> ContrastZoom, image, Colortable=3
NOTES:
The left image is used to "zoom" into a portion of the image.
The aspect ratio of the sub-image is always preserved. To see
the entire image, click and release the mouse button in this
window.
The center image is used to adjust the contrast and brightness
(sometimes called the "window" and "level" of the image. Click and
drag the mouse vertically to set contrast. Click and drag the mouse
horizontally to set brightness. To return to original values (25%
contrast and 75% brightness), click and release in the center image.
The color bars shows the image values of the image.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David Fanning, 18 November 2001.
Added second colorbar to show the relationship of the clamped
colors to the overall image values. 19 November 2001. DWF.
(See contrastzoom.pro)
NAME:
CONVERT_TO_TYPE
PURPOSE:
Converts its input argument to a specified data type.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
result = Convert_To_Type(input, type)
INPUT_PARAMETERS:
input: The input data to be converted.
type: The data type. Accepts values as given by Size(var, /TNAME) or Size(var, /TYPE).
If converting to integer types, values are truncated (similar to FLOOR keyword below),
unless keywords are set.
OUTPUT_PARAMETERS:
result: The input data is converted to specified data type.
KEYWORDS:
CEILING: If set and converting to an integer type, the CEIL function is applied before conversion.
FLOOR: If set and converting to an integer type, the FLOOR function is applied before conversion.
ROUND: If set and converting to an integer type, the ROUND function is applied before conversion.
RESTRICTIONS:
Data types STRUCT, POINTER, and OBJREF are not allowed.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 19 February 2006.
Typo had "UNIT" instead of "UINT". 23 February 2009. DWF.
Added CEILING, FLOOR, and ROUND keywords. 1 April 2009. DWF.
(See convert_to_type.pro)
NAME:
CTLOAD
PURPOSE:
This is a drop-in replacement for the ITTVIS-supplied program LOADCT.
The same keywords used with LOADCT apply. In addition, a REVERSE keyword
is supplied to reverse the color table vectors, and a CLIP keyword is
supplied to be able to clip the normal LOADCT color table. This is
extremely useful if you wish to use a reduced number of colors. Also,
all color table loading is handled silently. (To fix a major pet-peeve
of mine.)
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
CTLOAD, table
AUGUMENTS:
table: Optional table number to load. Integer from 0 to the number of
tables in the file, minus 1. Default value is 0.
KEYWORDS:
BOTTOM: The first color table index. Set to 0 by default.
BREWER: Set this keyword if you wish to use the Brewer Colors, as
implemented by Mike Galloy in the file brewer.tbl, and implemented
here as fsc_brewer.tbl. See these references:
Brewer Colors: http://www.personal.psu.edu/cab38/ColorBrewer/ColorBrewer_intro.html
Mike Galloy Implementation: http://michaelgalloy.com/2007/10/30/colorbrewer.html
This program will look first in the $IDL_DIR/resource/colors directory for
the color table file, and failing to find it there will look in the same
directory that the source code of this program is located, then in the IDL path.
Finally, if it still can't find the file, it will ask you to locate it.
If you can't find it, the program will simply return without loading a color table.
NOTE: YOU WILL HAVE TO DOWNLOAD THE FSC_BREWER.TBL FILE FROM THE COYOTE LIBRARY AND
PLACE IT IN ONE OF THE THREE PLACES OUTLINED ABOVE:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_brewer.tbl
CLIP: A one- or two-element integer array that indicates how to clip
the original color table vectors. This is useful if you are
restricting the number of colors, and do not which to have
black or white (the usual color table end members) in the
loaded color table. CLIP[0] is the lower bound. (A scalar
value of CLIP is treated as CLIP[0].) CLIP[1] is the upper
bound. For example, to load a blue-temperature color bar
with only blue colors, you might type this:
IDL> CTLOAD, 1, CLIP=[110,240]
IDL> CINDEX
Or, alternatively, if you wanted to include white at the upper
end of the color table:
IDL> CTLOAD, 1, CLIP=110
IDL> CINDEX
RGB_TABLE: If this keyword is set to a named variable, the color table
is returned as an [NCOLORS,3] array and no colors are loaded
in the display.
FILE: The name of a color table file to open. By default colors1.tbl in
the IDL directory.
GET_NAMES: If set to a named variable, the names of the color tables are returned
and no colors are loaded in the display. Note that RGB_TABLE cannot be
used concurrently with GET_NAMES. Use two separate calls if you want both.
NCOLORS: The number of colors loaded. By default, !D.TABLE_SIZE.
REVERSE: If this keyword is set, the color table vectors are reversed.
SILENT: This keyword is provided ONLY for compatibility with LOADCT. *All*
color table manipulations are handled silently.
EXAMPLES:
Suppose you wanted to create a color table that displayed negative values with
red-temperature values and positive values with blue-temperature values, and you
would like the red-temperature values to be reversed in the color table (so dark
colors adjoin in the color table and indicate values near zero). You could do this:
CTLoad, 0
CTLoad, 3, /REVERSE, CLIP=[32,240], BOTTOM=1, NCOLORS=10
CTLoad, 1, CLIP=[64, 245], BOTTOM=11, NCOLORS=10
Colorbar, NCOLORS=20, BOTTOM=1, DIV=10, RANGE=[-10,10]
Here is an example that shows the difference between LOADCT and CTLOAD:
ERASE, COLOR=FSC_COLOR('Charcoal)
LoadCT, 5, NCOLORS=8
Colorbar, NCOLORS=8, DIVISIONS=8, POSITION=[0.1, 0.65, 0.9, 0.75], XMINOR=0, XTICKLEN=1
CTLoad, 5, NCOLORS=8, CLIP=[16, 240]
Colorbar, NCOLORS=8, DIVISIONS=8, POSITION=[0.1, 0.35, 0.9, 0.45], XMINOR=0, XTICKLEN=1
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 30 October 2007.
Added ability to read Brewer Color Table file, if available, with BREWER keyword. 14 May 2008. DWF.
Small change in the way the program looks for the Brewer file. 8 July 2008. DWF.
(See ctload.pro)
NAME:
CW_DRAWCOLOR
PURPOSE:
This compound widget is used to place a label or color name next
to a color patch. Clicking on the color patch allows the user
to select another color
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
colorpatchID = CW_DrawColor(parent)
REQUIRED INPUTS:
parent - The identifier of a parent base widget.
OUTPUTS:
colorpatchID - The widget identifier of the top-level base of this compound widget
INPUT KEYWORDS:
COLOR - The name of the color to be displayed. Color names come from PickColorName.
COLUMN - Set this keyword to stack widgets in a column. Default is in a row.
EVENT_FUNC - The name of an event handler function for this compound widget.
EVENT_PRO -The name of an event handler procedure for this compound widget.
INDEX - An index number where the color should be loaded. !D.Table_Size-2, by default.
FILENAME - An optional input to pickcolorname specifying different
colors. See pickcolorname description for the file format.
LABEL_LEFT - Set this keyword to have the label text aligned on the left of the label. Default is to center.
LABEL_RIGHT - Set this keyword to have the label text aligned on the right of the label. Default is to center.
LABELSIZE - This is the X size of the label widget (containing the label) in device coordinates. Default is natural size.
LABELTEXT - This is the text on the label. Example, "Background Color", etc.
TITLE - This is the title on the PickColorName program that allows the user to select another color.
UVALUE - A user value for the widget.
XSIZE - The xsize (in pixel units) of the color patch. By default, 20.
YSIZE - The xsize (in pixel units) of the color patch. By default, 20.
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
OBJECT - The object reference. Use this to call methods, etc.
OBJECT PROCEDURE METHODS:
Set_Value -- this method takes one argument, the new color name.
It will change the color of the widget if it has
already been realized.
Get_Value -- this method returns the color name the widget is displaying
DEPENDENCIES:
Reqires FSC_COLOR and PICKCOLORNAME from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_color.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/pickcolorname.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, March 2001.
Fixed a problem with self object cleanup. 7 March 2006. DWF.
Allow addition to already realized widget hierarchies, October 2007. L. Anderson.
Added set_value and get_value methods to the widget can be
updated after being realized. October 2007. L. Anderson.
Added option to pass filename on to pickcolorname. October
2007. L. Anderson
(See cw_drawcolor.pro)
NAME:
DBLTOSTR
PURPOSE:
This is a program for converting a double precision numerical value
to a string. It was originally offered by BioPhys on the IDL newsgroup.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utility
CALLING SEQUENCE:
stringValue = DblToStr(value)
INPUTS:
value - A double-precision or floating point value to be converted to a string.
OUTPUTS:
stringValue - The converted string value.
KEYWORDS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
Assumes 14 significant digits of precision.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by BioPhys and offered to the IDL newsgroup, 7 November 2005.
Slightly modified and renamed by David Fanning, 30 November, 2005.
(See dbltostr.pro)
NAME:
DCBAR
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this routine is to add a discrete color bar to
a graphics plot. A "discrete" color bar is one with a handful
of colors. Labels are centered beneath or beside the color fields.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics, Widgets.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
DCBAR
INPUTS:
colors: A vector of "colors" to be represented in the color bar. The
vector can be a vector of color "names" that are known to FSC_COLOR.
Or, it can be a vector of 24-bit color values that can be decomposed
into color triples. Or, it can be a vector of byte or integer values
that can be used as indices into the current color table. If both colors
and NCOLORS (see below) are undefined, a 10-element color table will be
loaded and used.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
BARCOLOR: This is the name of a color known to FSC_COLOR that can be
used to draw the color bar outlines. By default, the same as
specified with the COLOR keyword.
BOTTOM: The lowest color index of the colors to be loaded in
the color bar. Used in conjunction with NCOLORS when the colors
argument is not used.
CHARSIZE: The size of the color bar annotations. By default, !P.Charsize.
COLOR: This is the name of a color known to FSC_COLOR that can be
used to draw the color bar annotations (labels and title).
By default, "Black" for the PostScript device, and "White"
for all other devices.
FILE: The name of a color table file that can be read by FSC_COLOR.
This allows you to specify your own color names for your own colors.
FONT: Set this keyword to the type of font desired for labels. Similar to !P.FONT.
The default is to use the !P.FONT value.
LABELS: The labels that should annotate each color. Must be the same length
as the colors vector. Colors are labelled consecutively by default.
NCOLORS: An alternative way to specify the colors in the color bar is by
using the NCOLORS and BOTTOM keywords to locate the colors in the
current color table. The NCOLORS and BOTTOM keywords have the same
meaning as in the LOADCT, XLOADCT, XCOLORS, or COLORBAR programs.
POSITION: A four-element array of normalized coordinates in the same
form as the POSITION keyword on a plot. Default is
[0.85, 0.1, 0.90, 0.9] for a vertical color bar and
[0.1, 0.88, 0.9, 0.93] for a horizontal color bar.
ROTATE: Set this keyword to a value that will rotate the label text.
Positive values between 0 and 180 degrees rotate in a counter-clockwise
sense. Negative values between 0 and 180 degress rotate in a
clockwise sense.
TITLE: This is title for the color bar. The default is to have no title.
TCHARSIZE: The size of the title. By default, same as CHARSIZE.
VERTICAL: Setting this keyword give a vertical color bar. The default
is a horizontal color bar.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
Color bar is drawn in the current graphics window.
REQUIRED PROGRAMS:
The number of programs are required from the Coyote Library.
http://www.dfanning.com/documents/programs.html
Known to be among these are the following.
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/color24.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/ctload.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/error_message.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_color.pro
EXAMPLE:
To display a 10 color horizontal color bar, labels with a three-letter
month abbreviation.
IDL> Window
IDL> LoadCT, 5, NCOLORS=12, BOTTOM=1
IDL> DCBar, NCOLORS=12, BOTTOM=1, LABELS=theMonths(/Abbreviation)
To load a 5 color vertical color bar, with the labels rotated 45 degrees.
IDL> Window
IDL> labels = StrArr(5)
IDL> FOR j=0,4 DO labels[j] = 'City ' + StrTrim(j+1,2)
IDL> colors = ['dodger blue', 'yellow', 'forest green', 'purple', 'tan']
IDL> DCBar, colors, LABELS=labels, ROTATE=45, /VERTICAL
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 15 March 2009.
Modification to code to avoid changing the colors vectors. 15 March 2009.
Added FONT keyword. 1 April 2009. DWF.
(See dcbar.pro)
NAME:
DECOMPOSEDCOLOR
PURPOSE:
This function is used to determine, in a device independent way, if the
current graphics device is using color decomposition. The function returns
a 1 if color decomposition is turned on, and a 0 if it is turned off. When
color decomposition is turned on, we say the device is using a true-color
display. If color decomposition is turned off, we say the device is using
an indexed color display.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
result = DecomposedColor()
RETURN VALUE:
result: A 1 if color decomposition is turned on. A 0 if color decomposition is turned off.
ARGUMENTS:
device: The IDL graphics device whose color decomposition state you wish to know the
current value of. If undefined, the current graphics device is used.
KEYWORDRS:
DEPTH: An output keyword that returns the depth of the graphics device. Normally,
either 8 for index color devices, with color decomposition turned off, or 24
for true-color devices with color decomposition turned on.
EXAMPLE:
IDL> Print, DecomposedColor() ; Color decomposition state of current graphics device.
1
IDL> Print, DecomposedColor('PS') ; Color decomposition state of PostScript graphics device.
0
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, May 24, 2009.
(See decomposedcolor.pro)
NAME:
DIRPATH
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to return a device-independent
name of a directory. It is similar to the IDL-supplied FILEPATH
routine, except that a file name is not required.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Utility.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
IDL> theDirectory = DIRPATH('examples')
IDL> Print, theDirectory
C:\IDL\IDL56\examples
INPUTS:
subDirectory: This is a string argument containing the name of the
sub-directory you wish to use. It can be a string
array of sub-directory names. By default, the subDirectory
is set to ['examples', 'data']. To only return the Root_Directory,
set the subDirectory to a null string ("").
KEYWORDS:
ROOT_DIRECTORY: The name of the root directory to use. By default,
the root directory is set to !DIR.
OUTPUTS:
The machine-independent directory path.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 28 April 2003.
(See dirpath.pro)
NAME:
DRAWCOLORS
FILENAME:
drawcolors__define.pro
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this object program is provide a flexible way
to handle and select drawing colors. The program combines
features of two previous programs: GetColor and PickColor,
as well as adding features of its own. Sixteen original
colors are supplied, but users can create any color they
wish using the tools provided.
By default, these 16 colors are defined: Black, Magenta, Cyan, Yellow,
Green, Red, Blue, Navy, Aqua, Pink, Orchid, Sky, Beige, Charcoal, Gray, White.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
2642 Bradbury Court
Fort Collins, CO 80521 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
General programming.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
colors = Obj_New('DRAWCOLORS')
OPTIONAL INPUT PARAMETERS:
IDL> colors = Obj_New('DRAWCOLORS', red, green, blue, names)
RED -- A 16-element byte vector of red values for the drawing colors.
GREEN -- A 16-element byte vector of green values for the drawing colors.
BLUE -- A 16-element byte vector of blue values for the drawing colors.
NAMES -- A 16-element string vector of names for the drawing colors.
By default, these colors are defined: Black, Magenta, Cyan, Yellow,
Green, Red, Blue, Navy, Aqua, Pink, Orchid, Sky, Beige, Charcoal, Gray, White.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
If you are going to use the XCOLORS method, you will need
the XColors program from the Coyote library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/xcolors.pro
The program is set up to handle 16 drawing colors. You may
modify the program to have a different number, but you will
have to modify the code in two places: (1) in the drawcolors__define
module and (2) in the INIT method.
FUNCTION METHODS:
COLOR24 ***************************************************************************
Purpose:
Turns a color triple into the equivalent 24-bit color integer value that
can be decomposed into the color.
Definition:
FUNCTION DrawColors::Color24, theColor
Parameters:
theColor -- A 3-element vector, representing a color triple.
Example:
yellow = colors->GetColor("yellow")
yellow24 = colors->Color24(yellow)
GETCOLOR ***************************************************************************
Purpose:
Returns the color triple, color index number, or the
24-bit integer representation, of the asked for color. In
normal operation, the colors are: Black, Magenta, Cyan, Yellow,
Green, Red, Blue, Navy, Aqua, Pink, Orchid, Sky, Beige, Charcoal,
Gray, and White.
Definition:
FUNCTION DrawColors::GetColor, theColor, startIndex, INDEXNUMBER=indexnumber, $
TRUECOLOR=truecolor, AutoDetermine=autodetermine
Parameters:
theColor -- A string representing the "name" of the color. If the name
can't be resolved or found, the first color is returned.
startIndex -- If present, and INDEXNUMBER is set, the colors are loaded at
this index number. Otherwise, the self.startIndex is used.
Keywords:
AUTODETERMINE -- If this keyword is set. the state of DECOMPOSITION is
determined (IDL 5.2 and higher) and either the INDEXNUMBER or
TRUECOLOR keyword is set appropriately. If the decomposition state
cannot be determined, the INDEXNUMBER keyword is set.
INDEXNUMBER -- If this keyword is set the colors are loaded and the
index number of the color is returned.
TRUECOLOR -- If this keyword is set, the color triple is converted into
a 24-bit integer before being returned. This keyword is ignored
if the INDEXNUMBER keyword is set.
Examples:
drawColor = colors->GetColor("yellow")
drawColor = colors->GetColor("blue", /Indexnumber)
drawColor = colors->GetColor("sky", /Truecolor)
GETCOLORS **************************************************************************
Purpose:
Returns the color triples, the color index numbers of, or the
24-bit integer representations of, all the colors.
Definition:
FUNCTION DrawColors::GetColors, startindex, INDEXNUMBER=indexnumber, $
TRUECOLOR=truecolor, Structure=structure
Parameters:
startIndex -- If present, and INDEXNUMBER is set, the colors are loaded at
this index number. If absent, startIndex = self.startIndex.
Keywords:
INDEXNUMBER -- If this keyword is set the colors are loaded and the
index numbers of all the colors are returned.
STRUCTURE -- If this keyword is set, the return value is a structure,
where each field of the structure is a color name and the value
of each field is either a color triple, an index number, or a
24-bit color value, depending upon the state of other keywords.
TRUECOLOR -- If this keyword is set, the color triples are converted to
24-bit integers before being returned. This keyword is ignored
if the INDEXNUMBER keyword is set.
Examples:
drawColors = colors->GetColors() ; drawColors is a 16-by-3 byte array.
drawColors = colors->GetColors(/IndexNumber) ; drawColors is a 16-element array of color indices.
drawColors = colors->GetColors(/TrueColor) ; drawColors is a 16-element array of 24-bit integers.
drawColors = colors->GetColors(/IndexNumber, /Structure) ; drawColors is a structure of index numbers.
Plot, data, Color=drawColors.yellow, Background=drawColors.charcoal
SELECT **************************************************************************
Purpose:
Puts up a blocking or modal widget dialog, allowing the user to select
from one of the 16 predefined colors available, or to mix their own color.
The user-defined color triple is returned as a result of the function.
Definition:
FUNCTION DrawColors::Select, Color=currentColor, StartIndex=startIndex, $
Title=title, Group_Leader=groupLeader, Cancel=cancelled, TrueColor=truecolor
Keywords:
CANCEL -- An output keyword that will return a value of 1 if the CANCEL
button is selected or if program operation is interrupted in any way.
COLOR -- The index number in the color table, where the current color
will be mixed. In other words, this color index will change when
the program is on the display. It will be restored to its previous
or entry color when the program exits.
GROUP_LEADER -- The group leader for the program. This keyword *must*
be set if calling this method from within a widget program if you
expect MODAL program operation.
NAME -- If this keyword is set, the return value of the function is
the "name" of the color.
STARTINDEX -- This is the starting index in the color table where the
16 predetermined colors will be loaded. The original colors will
be restored when the program exits. By default, this is set to
!D.Table-Size - (NCOLORS + 1).
TITLE -- The title of the program. By default: "Pick a Color"
TRUECOLOR -- If this keyword is set, the return value of the function
is a 24-bit eqivalent integer rather than the color triple.
Examples:
newColor = colors->Select() ; A blocking widget.
newColor = color->Select(Group_Leader=event.top, Cancel=cancelled)
IF NOT cancelled THEN TVLCT, newColor, info.dataColor
PROCEDURE METHODS:
GETPROPERTY ***********************************************************************
Purpose:
Allows the user to obtain the current properties of the object.
Definition:
PRO DrawColors::GetProperty, NAMES=names, RED=red, GREEN=green, BLUE=blue, $
STARTINDEX=startindex, NCOLORS=ncolors
Keywords:
NAMES -- Returns the current names of the colors as a string array.
RED -- Returns the current red values of the colors.
GREEN -- Returns the current green values of the colors.
BLUE -- Returns the current blue values of the colors.
STARTINDEX -- Returns the current starting index in the color table.
NCOLORS -- Returns the number of colors.
Example:
colors->GetProperty, Names=colorNames
Print, colorNames
LOADCOLORS ************************************************************************
Purpose:
Loads the predefined colors at a starting index.
Definition:
PRO DrawColors::LoadColors, startindex
Parameters:
STARTINDEX -- The starting color index in the color table. If not provided,
is set to !D.Table_Size - (self.ncolors + 1).
Example:
colors->LoadColors, 16
ORIGINALCOLORS *********************************************************************
Purpose:
Reloads the original 16 colors and their names
Definition:
PRO DrawColors::OriginalColors
Parameters:
None
Example:
colors->OriginalColors
REFRESH ***************************************************************************
Purpose:
Refreshes the modal GUI with the current drawing colors.
Definition:
PRO DrawColors::Refresh
Parameters:
None
Example:
colors->Refresh
SETPROPERTY ***********************************************************************
Purpose:
Allows the user to set the current properties of the object.
Definition:
PRO DrawColors::SetProperty, NAMES=names, RED=red, GREEN=green, BLUE=blue, $
STARTINDEX=startindex, NCOLORS=ncolors
Keywords:
NAMES -- The current names of the colors as a string array.
RED -- The current red values of the colors.
GREEN -- The current green values of the colors.
BLUE -- The current blue values of the colors.
STARTINDEX -- The current starting index in the color table.
NCOLORS -- The number of colors.
Example:
colorNames = 'Color ' + StrTrim(SIndGen(16),2)
colors->SetProperty, Names=colorNames
XCOLORS ***************************************************************************
Purpose:
Allows the user to select 16 new colors for the program by
using the XCOLORS program. The XColors program must be
somewhere in your !PATH.
Definition:
PRO DrawColors::XColors
Parameters:
None
Example:
colors->XColors
TUTORIAL:
Here is a short tutorial in how this object can be used. Note
that this doesn't exhaust all the possibilities.
1. Create the object.
IDL> colors = Obj_New("DrawColors")
2. Find out what colors it knows about.
IDL> colors->GetProperty, Names=colorNames
IDL> Print, colorNames
3. Ask for a color by name and load it at a color
index. Draw a plot in that color.
IDL> yellow = colors->GetColor("yellow")
IDL> TVLCT, yellow, 200
IDL> Device, Decomposed=0
IDL> Plot, Findgen(11), Color=200
4. Do the same thing, but in DECOMPOSED color.
IDL> Device, Decomposed=1
IDL> green = colors->GetColor("green", /TrueColor)
IDL> Plot, Findgen(11), Color=green
5. Find the color index number of the sky blue color.
IDL> Device, Decomposed=0
IDL> skyIndex = colors->GetColor("sky", /IndexNumber)
IDL> Plot, Findgen(11), Color=skyIndex
6. Load all 16 drawing colors at color index 32.
IDL> colors->LoadColors, 32
IDL> CIndex ; If them, if you have CINDEX from my library.
7. Get a structure of colors, with each field set to
the appropriate index number of its associated color.
IDL> Device, Decomposed=0
IDL> col = colors->GetColors(/IndexNumber, /Structure)
IDL> Plot, Findgen(11), Color=col.yellow, Background=col.charcoal
8. Allow the user to select a color from a GUI, then
load it and use it.
IDL> Device, Decomposed=0
IDL> theColor = colors->Select(Cancel=cancelled)
IDL> IF NOT cancelled THEN TVLCT, theColor, 10
IDL> Plot, Findgen(11), Color=10
9. Allow the user to choose 16 new drawing colors.
(Requires my XCOLORS program.)
IDL> colors->XColors
IDL> theseColors = colors->Select()
10. Let the object decide according to the device decomposition
state whether to return an index number or 24-bit value
for the color.
IDL> Plot, Findgen(11), Color=colors->GetColor('beige', /Autodetermine)
11. Call the GUI from within a widget program and load the
new color.
newcolor = info.colors->Select(Group_Leader=event.top, $
Cancel=cancelled)
IF NOT cancelled THEN TVLCT, newcolor, info.drawColor
12. Destroy the object.
IDL> Obj_Destroy, colors
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David Fanning, 9 NOV 1999.
Added AUTODETERMINE keyword to the GetColor method. 10 NOV 1999. DWF.
Added NAME keyword to SELECT method. 18 MAR 2000. DWF.
Fixed a small bug in choosing the current color. 20 April 2000. DWF.
(See drawcolors__define.pro)
NAME:
DRAWCOUNTIES
PURPOSE:
Draws state counties in the USA from county shape files.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
DrawCounties, countyFile
ARGUMENTS:
countyFile: The name of the input shapefile containing county boundaries.
Must be defined, for example, 'co1990p020.shp'.
KEYWORDS:
ATTRIBUTE_NAME: The name of the attribute in the file that you wish to draw.
By default, this is set to the attribute name "STATE".
(In some shapefiles, the attribute might be named "STATE_ABBR".)
If you are unsure of the attribute names in your shapefile,
use the Coyote Library program SHAPEINFO to browse the file
ahead of time.
COLORS: The name of a color to draw the state outline or polygon in. This
may be a string array of the same size as STATENAMES. Color names
correspond to the colors available in FSC_COLOR. By default, "Sky Blue".
LINESTYLE: The normal LINESTYLE keyword index to choose plotting linestyles.
By default, set to 0 and solid lines. May be a vector of the same
size as STATENAMES.
STATENAMES: The names of the states you wish to draw counties for. Normally, these
are two-element state abbreviations, but this will depend upon the entity
attributes in your shape file. If this keyword is undefined, then the counties
in all the states will be drawn. If you are unsure of the entity names, use the
Coyote Library program SHAPEINFO to browse the file ahead of time.
THICK: The line thickness. By default, 1.0.
RESTRICTIONS:
It is assumed a map projection command has been issued and is in effect at
the time this program is called.
If STATENAMES is undefined, all states are drawn, but only a single value
for COLORS, LINESTYLE, and THICK is allowed.
Required Coyote Library programs:
Error_Message
FSC_Color
EXAMPLE:
Create a map with Nevada in yellow and other state's counties in blue.
Window, XSize=500, YSize=500, Title='County Boundaries'
Map_Set, 37.5, -120, /Albers, /IsoTropic, Limit=[30, -125, 45, -108], $
Position=[0.05, 0.05, 0.95, 0.95]
Erase, COLOR=FSC_Color('ivory')
Map_Grid, LatDel = 2.0, LonDel = 2.0, /Box_Axes, Color=FSC_Color('charcoal')
colors = [Replicate('dodger blue', 6), 'indian red']
DrawCounties, , 'co1990p020.shp', Statenames=['CA', 'OR', 'WA', 'AZ', 'UT', 'ID', 'NV'], $
Colors=colors
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 24 June 2004.
(See drawcounties.pro)
NAME:
DRAWSTATES
PURPOSE:
Draws states in the USA in outline or as solid-color polygons
from a state shapefile.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
DrawStates, stateFile
ARGUMENTS:
stateFile: The name of the input shapefile containing state boundaries.
If undefined, the "states.shp" file in the IDL distribution is used.
KEYWORDS:
ATTRIBUTE_NAME: The name of the attribute in the file that you wish to draw.
By default, this is set to the attribute name "STATE_ABBR".
(In some shapefiles, the attribute might be named "STATE".)
If you are unsure of the attribute names in your shapefile,
use the Coyote Library program SHAPEINFO to browse the file
ahead of time.
COLORS: The name of a color to draw the state outline or polygon in. This
may be a string array of the same size as STATENAMES. Color names
correspond to the colors available in FSC_COLOR. By default, "Sky Blue".
FILL: Normally, the state outline is drawn. If this keyword is set,
the polygon representing the state is filled with a solid color.
May be a vector of the same size as STATENAMES.
LINESTYLE: The normal LINESTYLE keyword index to choose plotting linestyles.
By default, set to 0 and solid lines. May be a vector of the same
size as STATENAMES.
STATENAMES: The names of the states you wish to draw. Normally, these are two-element
state abbreviations, but this will depend upon the entity attributes in your
shapefile. If this keyword is undefined, then all the states in the
file will be drawn. If you are unsure of the entity names, use the
Coyote Library program SHAPEINFO to browse the file ahead of time.
THICK: The line thickness. By default, 1.0.
RESTRICTIONS:
It is assumed a map projection command has been issued and is in effect at
the time this program is called.
If STATENAMES is undefined, all states are drawn, but only a single value
for COLORS, FILL, LINESTYLE, and THICK is allowed.
Required Coyote Library programs:
Error_Message
FSC_Color
EXAMPLE:
Window, XSize=700, YSize=800
Map_Set, 37.5, -117.5, /Albers, /IsoTropic, Limit=[30, -125, 45, -108], Position=[0.05, 0.05, 0.95, 0.95]
Erase, Color=FSC_Color('ivory')
DrawStates, Statenames=['CA', 'OR', 'WA', 'AZ', 'UT', 'ID'], Thick=1, $
Colors=['firebrick', 'indian red', 'indian red', 'indian red', 'steel blue', 'indian red'], $
Fill = [1,0,0,0,1,0]
Map_Grid, LatDel = 2.0, LonDel = 2.0, /Box_Axes, Color=FSC_Color('charcoal')
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 2 April 2005.
(See drawstates.pro)
NAME:
ERROR_MESSAGE
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to have a device-independent
error messaging function. The error message is reported
to the user by using DIALOG_MESSAGE if widgets are
supported and MESSAGE otherwise.
In general, the ERROR_MESSAGE function is not called directly.
Rather, it is used in a CATCH error handler. Errors are thrown
to ERROR_MESSAGE with the MESSAGE command. A typical CATCH error
handler is shown below.
Catch, theError
IF theError NE 0 THEN BEGIN
Catch, /Cancel
void = Error_Message()
RETURN
ENDIF
Error messages would get into the ERROR_MESSAGE function by
throwing an error with the MESSAGE command, like this:
IF test NE 1 THEN Message, 'The test failed.'
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Utility.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
ok = Error_Message(the_Error_Message)
INPUTS:
the_Error_Message: This is a string argument containing the error
message you want reported. If undefined, this variable is set
to the string in the !Error_State.Msg system variable.
KEYWORDS:
ERROR: Set this keyword to cause Dialog_Message to use the ERROR
reporting dialog. Note that a bug in IDL causes the ERROR dialog
to be used whether this keyword is set to 0 or 1!
INFORMATIONAL: Set this keyword to cause Dialog_Message to use the
INFORMATION dialog instead of the WARNING dialog. Note that a bug
in IDL causes the ERROR dialog to be used if this keyword is set to 0!
NONAME: Normally, the name of the routine in which the error occurs is
added to the error message. Setting this keyword will suppress this
behavior.
TITLE: Set this keyword to the title of the DIALOG_MESSAGE window. By
default the keyword is set to 'System Error' unless !ERROR_STATE.NAME
equals "IDL_M_USER_ERR", in which case it is set to "Trapped Error'.
TRACEBACK: Setting this keyword results in an error traceback
being printed to standard output with the PRINT command. Set to
1 (ON) by default. Use TRACEBACK=0 to turn this functionality off.
QUIET: Set this keyword to suppress the DIALOG_MESSAGE pop-up dialog.
OUTPUTS:
Currently the only output from the function is the string "OK".
RESTRICTIONS:
The WARNING Dialog_Message dialog is used by default.
EXAMPLE:
To handle an undefined variable error:
IF N_Elements(variable) EQ 0 THEN $
ok = Error_Message('Variable is undefined')
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 27 April 1999.
Added the calling routine's name in the message and NoName keyword. 31 Jan 2000. DWF.
Added _Extra keyword. 10 February 2000. DWF.
Forgot to add _Extra everywhere. Fixed for MAIN errors. 8 AUG 2000. DWF.
Adding call routine's name to Traceback Report. 8 AUG 2000. DWF.
Added ERROR, INFORMATIONAL, and TITLE keywords. 19 SEP 2002. DWF.
Removed the requirement that you use the NONAME keyword with the MESSAGE
command when generating user-trapped errors. 19 SEP 2002. DWF.
Added distinctions between trapped errors (errors generated with the
MESSAGE command) and IDL system errors. Note that if you call ERROR_MESSAGE
directly, then the state of the !ERROR_STATE.NAME variable is set
to the *last* error generated. It is better to access ERROR_MESSAGE
indirectly in a Catch error handler from the MESSAGE command. 19 SEP 2002. DWF.
Change on 19 SEP 2002 to eliminate NONAME requirement did not apply to object methods.
Fixed program to also handle messages from object methods. 30 JULY 2003. DWF.
Removed obsolete STR_SEP and replaced with STRSPLIT. 27 Oct 2004. DWF.
Made a traceback the default case without setting TRACEBACK keyword. 19 Nov 2004. DWF.
Added check for window connection specifically for CRON jobs. 6 May 2008. DWF.
Added QUIET keyword. 18 October 2008. DWF.
(See error_message.pro)
NAME:
FIND_BOUNDARY
PURPOSE:
This program finds the boundary points about a region of interest (ROI)
represented by pixel indices. It uses a "chain-code" algorithm for finding
the boundary pixels.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics, math.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
boundaryPts = Find_Boundary(indices, XSize=xsize, YSize=ysize)
OPTIONAL INPUTS:
indices - A 1D vector of pixel indices that describe the ROI. For example,
the indices may be returned as a result of the WHERE function.
OUTPUTS:
boundaryPts - A 2-by-n points array of the X and Y points that describe the
boundary. The points are scaled if the SCALE keyword is used.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
SCALE - A one-element or two-element array of the pixel scale factors, [xscale, yscale],
used to calculate the perimeter length or area of the ROI. The SCALE keyword is
NOT applied to the boundary points. By default, SCALE=[1,1].
XSIZE - The X size of the window or array from which the ROI indices are taken.
Set to !D.X_Size by default.
YSIZE - The Y size of the window or array from which the ROI indices are taken.
Set to !D.Y_Size by default.
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
AREA - A named variable that contains the pixel area represented by the input pixel indices,
scaled by the SCALE factors.
CENTER - A named variable that contains a two-element array containing the center point or
centroid of the ROI. The centroid is the position in the ROI that the ROI would
balance on if all the index pixels were equally weighted. The output is a two-element
floating-point array in device coordinate system, unless the SCALE keyword is used,
in which case the values will be in the scaled coordinate system.
PERIM_AREA - A named variable that contains the (scaled) area represented by the perimeter
points, as indicated by John Russ in _The Image Processing Handbook, 2nd Edition_ on
page 490. This is the same "perimeter" that is returned by IDLanROI in its
ComputeGeometry method, for example. In general, the perimeter area will be
smaller than the pixel area.
PERIMETER - A named variable that will contain the perimeter length of the boundary
upon returning from the function, scaled by the SCALE factors.
EXAMPLE:
LoadCT, 0, /Silent
image = BytArr(400, 300)+125
image[125:175, 180:245] = 255B
indices = Where(image EQ 255)
Window, XSize=400, YSize=300
TV, image
PLOTS, Find_Boundary(indices, XSize=400, YSize=300, Perimeter=length), $
/Device, Color=FSC_Color('red')
Print, length
230.0
DEPENDENCIES:
Requires ERROR_MESSAGE from the Coyote Library.
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/error_message.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, April 2002. Based on an algorithm written by Guy
Blanchard and provided by Richard Adams.
Fixed a problem with distinction between solitary points and
isolated points (a single point connected on a diagonal to
the rest of the mask) in which the program can't get back to
the starting pixel. 2 Nov 2002. DWF
Added the ability to return the perimeter length with PERIMETER and
SCALE keywords. 2 Nov 2002. DWF.
Added AREA keyword to return area enclosed by boundary. 2 Nov 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem with POLYFILLV under-reporting the area by removing
POLYFILLV and using a pixel counting method. 10 Dec 2002. DWF.
Added the PERIM_AREA and CENTER keywords. 15 December 2002. DWF.
Replaced the ERROR_MESSAGE routine with the latest version. 15 December 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem in which XSIZE and YSIZE have to be specified as integers to work. 6 March 2006. DWF.
Fixed a small problem with very small ROIs that caused the program to crash. 1 October 2008. DWF.
(See find_boundary.pro)
NAME:
FIND_RESOURCE_FILE
PURPOSE:
This function is designed to search for and return the fully qualified
path to a resource file. The order of search is as follows:
1. In the directories rooted at the IDL resource directory (IDL_DIR/resource).
2. In the same directory as this file is found in.
3. In the directories rooted at a resource directory found in the same directory this file is in.
4. In the directories rooted at a resource directory found in the a directory one above the directory this file is in.
5. Anywhere in the IDL PATH. Note that a *.pro file *must* be in a directory for the directory to be on
the IDL PATH.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
fullPath = Find_Resource_File(resourceFilename)
INPUTS:
resourceFilename: The root name of a resource file. For example, 'arc.bmp'.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
SUCCESS: An output keyword whose value is set to 1 if the program
successfully finds the resource file. Otherwise, set to 0.
RETURN_VALUE:
fullpath: A fully-qualified file path to the resource file.
EXAMPLE:
IDL> print, find_resource_file('gshhs_i.b', success=s) & print, 'success: ', s
/home/fanning/IDL/incubator/gshhs_i.b
success: 1
IDL> print, find_resource_file('dataviewer_splash.jpg', success=s) & print, 'success: ', s
/home/fanning/IDL/dataviewer/resources/dataviewer_splash.jpg
success: 1
IDL> print, find_resource_file('arc.bmp', success=s) & print, 'success: ', s
/usr/local/rsi/idl70/resource/bitmaps/arc.bmp
success: 1
IDL> print, find_resource_file('toast_and_jam.txt', success=s) & print, 'success: ', s
success: 0
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W Fanning, December 12, 2008.
It seems all my resource files are in "resources" directories, not "resource" directories.
So now the program looks in both places. 6 January 2009.
(See find_resource_file.pro)
NAME:
Fit_Ellipse
PURPOSE:
This program fits an ellipse to an ROI given by a vector of ROI indices.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics, math.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
ellipsePts = Fit_Ellipse(indices)
OPTIONAL INPUTS:
indices - A 1D vector of pixel indices that describe the ROI. For example,
the indices may be returned as a result of the WHERE function.
OUTPUTS:
ellipsePts - A 2-by-npoints array of the X and Y points that describe the
fitted ellipse. The points are in the device coodinate system.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
NPOINTS - The number of points in the fitted ellipse. Set to 120 by default.
SCALE - A two-element array that gives the scaling parameters for each X and Y pixel, respectively.
Set to [1.0,1.0] by default.
XSIZE - The X size of the window or array from which the ROI indices are taken.
Set to !D.X_Size by default.
YSIZE - The Y size of the window or array from which the ROI indices are taken.
Set to !D.Y_Size by default.
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
CENTER -- Set to a named variable that contains the X and Y location of the center
of the fitted ellipse in device coordinates.
ORIENTATION - Set to a named variable that contains the orientation of the major
axis of the fitted ellipse. The direction is calculated in degrees
counter-clockwise from the X axis.
AXES - A two element array that contains the length of the major and minor
axes of the fitted ellipse, respectively.
SEMIAXES - A two element array that contains the length of the semi-major and semi-minor
axes of the fitted ellipse, respectively. (This is simple AXES/2.)
EXAMPLE:
LoadCT, 0, /Silent
image = BytArr(400, 300)+125
image[180:245, 125:175] = 255B
indices = Where(image EQ 255)
Window, XSize=400, YSize=300
TV, image
PLOTS, Fit_Ellipse(indices, XSize=400, YSize=300), /Device, Color=FSC_Color('red')
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, April 2002. Based on algorithms provided by Craig Markwardt
and Wayne Landsman in his TVEllipse program.
Added SCALE keyword and modified the algorithm to use memory more efficiently.
I no longer have to make huge arrays. The arrays are only as big as the blob
being fitted. 17 AUG 2008. DWF.
Fixed small typo that caused blobs of indices with a longer X axis than Y axis
to misrepresent the center of the ellipse. 23 February 2009.
(See fit_ellipse.pro)
NAME:
FLOATS_EQUAL
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to compare two floating-point values or
arrays to determine if the values or arrays are equal. Arrays are equal
if they have the same number of elements, and each element is equal.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
result = FLOATS_EQUAL(array_1, array_2)
ARGUMENTS:
array_1 Any single or double precision value or array. Required parameter.
array_2 Any single or double precision value or array. Required parameter.
KEYWORDS:
ULP UNIT in the LAST PLACE. It is the gap or difference between two
floating point numbers in the last digit that can distinguish the
two numbers. Must be a positive integer. Set to 1 by default. Set
to a larger value if you suspect accumulative round-off errors
in your arrays.
RETURN VALUE:
result Set to 1 if the arrays are equal, which means that the arrays have
the same number of elements and each element is equal to the same
element in the other array. Set to 0 if the arrays are not equal.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
EXAMPLE:
IDL> a = Findgen(11)
IDL> b = Findgen(11)
IDL> Print, Floats_Equal(a,b)
1
IDL> b[4] = b[4] + 0.0001
IDL> Print, Floats_Equal(a,b)
0
RESTRICTIONS:
None.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 29 August 2007.
(See floats_equal.pro)
NAME:
FPUFIX
PURPOSE:
This is a utility routine to examine a variable and fix problems
that will create floating point underflow errors.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
fixedData = FPUFIX(data)
ARGUMENTS:
data : A numerical variable to be checked for values that will cause
floating point underflow errors. Suspect values are set to 0.
KEYWORDS:
None.
RETURN VALUE:
fixedData: The output is the same as the input, except that any values that
will cause subsequent floating point underflow errors are set to 0.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
EXAMPLES:
data = FPTFIX(data)
RESTRICTIONS:
None.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, from Mati Meron's example FPU_FIX. Mati's
program is more robust that this (ftp://cars3.uchicago.edu/midl/),
but this serves my needs and doesn't require other programs from
Mati's library. 24 February 2006.
(See fpufix.pro)
NAME:
FSC_BASE_FILENAME
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this is to extract from a long file path, the
base file name. That is, the name of the actual file without
the preceeding directory information or the final file extension.
The directory information and file extension can be obtained via
keywords. The file is named so as not to interfere with FILE_BASENAME,
which was introduced in IDL 6.0 and performs a similar function.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Utility.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
baseFilename = FSC_Base_Filename(thePath)
INPUTS:
thePath: This is the file path you wish to extract a base file name from.
It is a string variable of the sort returned from Dialog_Pickfile.
KEYWORDS:
DIRECTORY: The directory information obtained from the input file path.
The directory always ends in a directory separator character.
EXTENSION: The file extension associated with the input file path.
PATH_SEPARATOR: The string to use as a path separator. If undefined, the output
of PATH_SEP() will be used.
RETURN_VALUE:
baseFilename: The base filename, stripped of directory and file extension information.
RESTRICTIONS:
This is a quick and dirty program. It has been tested on Windows machines and *lightly*
tested on UNIX machines. Please contact me at the e-mail address above if you discover
problems.
EXAMPLE:
IDL> thePath = "C:\rsi\idl7.8\lib\jester.pro"
IDL> Print, FSC_Base_Filename(thePath, Directory=theDirectory, Extension=theExtension)
jester
IDL> Print, theDirectory
C:\rsi\idl7.8\lib\
IDL> Print, theExtension
pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 31 July 2003.
Modified by KaRo, 13 Feb. 2005 to allow dots in the filename.
Added PATH_SEPARATOR keyword. 25 July 2005. DWF.
Added ability to recongnize directory by path separator in last character. 19 Sept 2005. DWF.
(See fsc_base_filename.pro)
NAME:
FSC_COLOR
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to obtain drawing colors
by name and in a device/decomposition independent way.
The color names and values may be read in as a file, or 104 color
names and values are supplied with the program. These colors were
obtained from the file rgb.txt, found on most X-Window distributions.
Representative colors were chosen from across the color spectrum. To
see a list of colors available, type:
Print, FSC_Color(/Names), Format='(6A18)'
If the color names '0', '1', '2', ..., '255' are used, they will
correspond to the colors in the current color table in effect at
the time the FSC_Color program is called.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING:
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics, Color Specification.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
color = FSC_Color(theColor, theColorIndex)
NORMAL CALLING SEQUENCE FOR DEVICE-INDEPENDENT COLOR:
If you write your graphics code *exactly* as it is written below, then
the same code will work in all graphics devices I have tested.
These include the PRINTER, PS, and Z devices, as well as X, WIN, and MAC.
In practice, graphics code is seldom written like this. (For a variety of
reasons, but laziness is high on the list.) So I have made the
program reasonably tolerant of poor programming practices. I just
point this out as a place you might return to before you write me
a nice note saying my program "doesn't work". :-)
axisColor = FSC_Color("Green", !D.Table_Size-2)
backColor = FSC_Color("Charcoal", !D.Table_Size-3)
dataColor = FSC_Color("Yellow", !D.Table_Size-4)
thisDevice = !D.Name
Set_Plot, 'toWhateverYourDeviceIsGoingToBe', /Copy
Device, .... ; Whatever you need here to set things up properly.
IF (!D.Flags AND 256) EQ 0 THEN $
POLYFILL, [0,1,1,0,0], [0,0,1,1,0], /Normal, Color=backColor
Plot, Findgen(11), Color=axisColor, Background=backColor, /NoData, $
NoErase= ((!D.Flags AND 256) EQ 0)
OPlot, Findgen(11), Color=dataColor
Device, .... ; Whatever you need here to wrap things up properly.
Set_Plot, thisDevice
OPTIONAL INPUT PARAMETERS:
theColor: A string with the "name" of the color. To see a list
of the color names available set the NAMES keyword. This may
also be a vector of color names. Colors available are these:
Active Almond Antique White Aquamarine Beige Bisque
Black Blue Blue Violet Brown Burlywood Cadet Blue
Charcoal Chartreuse Chocolate Coral Cornflower Blue Cornsilk
Crimson Cyan Dark Goldenrod Dark Gray Dark Green Dark Khaki
Dark Orchid Dark Red Dark Salmon Dark Slate Blue Deep Pink Dodger Blue
Edge Face Firebrick Forest Green Frame Gold
Goldenrod Gray Green Green Yellow Highlight Honeydew
Hot Pink Indian Red Ivory Khaki Lavender Lawn Green
Light Coral Light Cyan Light Gray Light Salmon Light Sea Green Light Yellow
Lime Green Linen Magenta Maroon Medium Gray Medium Orchid
Moccasin Navy Olive Olive Drab Orange Orange Red
Orchid Pale Goldenrod Pale Green Papaya Peru Pink
Plum Powder Blue Purple Red Rose Rosy Brown
Royal Blue Saddle Brown Salmon Sandy Brown Sea Green Seashell
Selected Shadow Sienna Sky Blue Slate Blue Slate Gray
Snow Spring Green Steel Blue Tan Teal Text
Thistle Tomato Turquoise Violet Violet Red Wheat
White Yellow
In addition, these system colors are available if a connection to the window system is available.
Frame Text Active Shadow Highlight Edge Selected Face
The color WHITE is used if this parameter is absent or a color name is mis-spelled. To see a list
of the color names available in the program, type this:
IDL> Print, FSC_Color(/Names), Format='(6A18)'
theColorIndex: The color table index (or vector of indices the same length
as the color name vector) where the specified color is loaded. The color table
index parameter should always be used if you wish to obtain a color value in a
color-decomposition-independent way in your code. See the NORMAL CALLING
SEQUENCE for details. If theColor is a vector, and theColorIndex is a scalar,
then the colors will be loaded starting at theColorIndex.
When the BREWER keyword is set, you must use more arbitrary and less descriptive color
names. To see a list of those names, use the command above with the BREWER keyword set,
or call PICKCOLORNAME with the BREWER keyword set:
IDL> Print, FSC_Color(/Names, /BREWER), Format='(8A10)'
IDL> color = PickColorName(/BREWER)
Here are the Brewer names:
WT1 WT2 WT3 WT4 WT5 WT6 WT7 WT8
TAN1 TAN2 TAN3 TAN4 TAN5 TAN6 TAN7 TAN8
BLK1 BLK2 BLK3 BLK4 BLK5 BLK6 BLK7 BLK8
GRN1 GRN2 GRN3 GRN4 GRN5 GRN6 GRN7 GRN8
BLU1 BLU2 BLU3 BLU4 BLU5 BLU6 BLU7 BLU8
ORG1 ORG2 ORG3 ORG4 ORG5 ORG6 ORG7 ORG8
RED1 RED2 RED3 RED4 RED5 RED6 RED7 RED8
PUR1 PUR2 PUR3 PUR4 PUR5 PUR6 PUR7 PUR8
PBG1 PBG2 PBG3 PBG4 PBG5 PBG6 PBG7 PBG8
YGB1 YGB2 YGB3 YGB4 YGB5 YGB6 YGB7 YGB8
RYB1 RYB2 RYB3 RYB4 RYB5 RYB6 RYB7 RYB8
TG1 TG2 TG3 TG4 TG5 TG6 TG7 TG8
As of 3 July 2008, the Brewer names are also now available to the user without using
the BREWER keyword. If the BREWER keyword is used, *only* Brewer names are available.
RETURN VALUE:
The value that is returned by FSC_Color depends upon the keywords
used to call it, on the version of IDL you are using,and on the depth
of the display device when the program is invoked. In general,
the return value will be either a color index number where the specified
color is loaded by the program, or a 24-bit color value that can be
decomposed into the specified color on true-color systems. (Or a vector
of such numbers.)
If you are running IDL 5.2 or higher, the program will determine which
return value to use, based on the color decomposition state at the time
the program is called. If you are running a version of IDL before IDL 5.2,
then the program will return the color index number. This behavior can
be overruled in all versions of IDL by setting the DECOMPOSED keyword.
If this keyword is 0, the program always returns a color index number. If
the keyword is 1, the program always returns a 24-bit color value.
If the TRIPLE keyword is set, the program always returns the color triple,
no matter what the current decomposition state or the value of the DECOMPOSED
keyword. Normally, the color triple is returned as a 1 by 3 column vector.
This is appropriate for loading into a color index with TVLCT:
IDL> TVLCT, FSC_Color('Yellow', /Triple), !P.Color
But sometimes (e.g, in object graphics applications) you want the color
returned as a row vector. In this case, you should set the ROW keyword
as well as the TRIPLE keyword:
viewobj= Obj_New('IDLgrView', Color=FSC_Color('charcoal', /Triple, /Row))
If the ALLCOLORS keyword is used, then instead of a single value, modified
as described above, then all the color values are returned in an array. In
other words, the return value will be either an NCOLORS-element vector of color
table index numbers, an NCOLORS-element vector of 24-bit color values, or
an NCOLORS-by-3 array of color triples.
If the NAMES keyword is set, the program returns a vector of
color names known to the program.
If the color index parameter is not used, and a 24-bit value is not being
returned, then colorIndex is typically set to !D.Table_Size-1. However,
this behavior is changed on 8-bit devices (e.g., the PostScript device,
or the Z-graphics buffer) and on 24-bit devices that are *not* using
decomposed color. On these devices, the colors are loaded at an
offset of !D.Table_Size - ncolors - 2, and the color index parameter reflects
the actual index of the color where it will be loaded. This makes it possible
to use a formulation as below:
Plot, data, Color=FSC_Color('Dodger Blue')
on 24-bit displays *and* in PostScript output! Note that if you specify a color
index (the safest thing to do), then it will always be honored.
INPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
ALLCOLORS: Set this keyword to return indices, or 24-bit values, or color
triples, for all the known colors, instead of for a single color.
BREWER: Set this keyword if you wish to use the Brewer Colors, as defined
in this reference:
http://www.personal.psu.edu/cab38/ColorBrewer/ColorBrewer_intro.html
As of 3 July 2008, the BREWER names are always available to the user, with or
without this keyword. If the keyword is used, only BREWER names are available.
DECOMPOSED: Set this keyword to 0 or 1 to force the return value to be
a color table index or a 24-bit color value, respectively.
CHECK_CONNECTION: If this keyword is set, the program will check to see if it can obtain
a window connection before it tries to load system colors (which require one). If you
think you might be using FSC_COLOR in a cron job, for example, you would want to set this
keyword. If there is no window connection, the system colors are not available from the program.
FILENAME: The string name of an ASCII file that can be opened to read in
color values and color names. There should be one color per row
in the file. Please be sure there are no blank lines in the file.
The format of each row should be:
redValue greenValue blueValue colorName
Color values should be between 0 and 255. Any kind of white-space
separation (blank characters, commas, or tabs) are allowed. The color
name should be a string, but it should NOT be in quotes. A typical
entry into the file would look like this:
255 255 0 Yellow
NAMES: If this keyword is set, the return value of the function is
a ncolors-element string array containing the names of the colors.
These names would be appropriate, for example, in building
a list widget with the names of the colors. If the NAMES
keyword is set, the COLOR and INDEX parameters are ignored.
listID = Widget_List(baseID, Value=GetColor(/Names), YSize=16)
NODISPLAY: Normally, FSC_COLOR loads "system" colors as part of its palette of colors.
In order to do so, it has to create an IDL widget, which in turn has to make
a connection to the windowing system. If your program is being run without a
window connection, then this program will fail. If you can live without the system
colors (and most people don't even know they are there, to tell you the truth),
then setting this keyword will keep them from being loaded, and you can run
FSC_COLOR without a display. THIS KEYWORD NOW DEPRECIATED IN FAVOR OF CHECK_CONNECTION.
ROW: If this keyword is set, the return value of the function when the TRIPLE
keyword is set is returned as a row vector, rather than as the default
column vector. This is required, for example, when you are trying to
use the return value to set the color for object graphics objects. This
keyword is completely ignored, except when used in combination with the
TRIPLE keyword.
SELECTCOLOR: Set this keyword if you would like to select the color name with
the PICKCOLORNAME program. Selecting this keyword automaticallys sets
the INDEX positional parameter. If this keyword is used, any keywords
appropriate for PICKCOLORNAME can also be used. If this keyword is used,
the first positional parameter can be either a color name or the color
table index number. The program will figure out what you want.
TRIPLE: Setting this keyword will force the return value of the function to
*always* be a color triple, regardless of color decomposition state or
visual depth of the machine. The value will be a three-element column
vector unless the ROW keyword is also set.
In addition, any keyword parameter appropriate for PICKCOLORNAME can be used.
These include BOTTOM, COLUMNS, GROUP_LEADER, INDEX, and TITLE.
OUTPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
CANCEL: This keyword is always set to 0, unless that SELECTCOLOR keyword is used.
Then it will correspond to the value of the CANCEL output keyword in PICKCOLORNAME.
COLORSTRUCTURE: This output keyword (if set to a named variable) will return a
structure in which the fields will be the known color names (without spaces)
and the values of the fields will be either color table index numbers or
24-bit color values. If you have specified a vector of color names, then
this will be a structure containing just those color names as fields.
NCOLORS: The number of colors recognized by the program. It will be 104 by default.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
Required programs from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/error_message.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/pickcolorname.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/decomposedcolor.pro
EXAMPLE:
To get drawing colors in a device-decomposed independent way:
axisColor = FSC_Color("Green", !D.Table_Size-2)
backColor = FSC_Color("Charcoal", !D.Table_Size-3)
dataColor = FSC_Color("Yellow", !D.Table_Size-4)
Plot, Findgen(11), Color=axisColor, Background=backColor, /NoData
OPlot, Findgen(11), Color=dataColor
To set the viewport color in object graphics:
theView = Obj_New('IDLgrView', Color=FSC_Color('Charcoal', /Triple))
To change the viewport color later:
theView->SetProperty, Color=FSC_Color('Antique White', /Triple)
To load the drawing colors "red", "green", and "yellow" at indices 100-102, type this:
IDL> TVLCT, FSC_Color(["red", "green", and "yellow"], /Triple), 100
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 19 October 2000. Based on previous
GetColor program.
Fixed a problem with loading colors with TVLCT on a PRINTER device. 13 Mar 2001. DWF.
Added the ROW keyword. 30 March 2001. DWF.
Added the PICKCOLORNAME code to the file, since I keep forgetting to
give it to people. 15 August 2001. DWF.
Added ability to specify color names and indices as vectors. 5 Nov 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem with the TRIPLE keyword when specifying a vector of color names. 14 Feb 2003. DWF.
Fixed a small problem with the starting index when specifying ALLCOLORS. 24 March 2003. DWF.
Added system color names. 23 Jan 2004. DWF
Added work-around for WHERE function "feature" when theColor is a one-element array. 22 July 2004. DWF.
Added support for 8-bit graphics devices when color index is not specified. 25 August 2004. DWF.
Fixed a small problem with creating color structure when ALLCOLORS keyword is set. 26 August 2004. DWF.
Extended the color index fix for 8-bit graphics devices on 25 August 2004 to
24-bit devices running with color decomposition OFF. I've concluded most of
the people using IDL don't have any idea how color works, so I am trying to
make it VERY simple, and yet still maintain the power of this program. So now,
in general, for most simple plots, you don't have to use the colorindex parameter
and you still have a very good chance of getting what you expect in a device-independent
manner. Of course, it would be *nice* if you could use that 24-bit display you paid
all that money for, but I understand your reluctance. :-) 11 October 2004. DWF.
Have renamed the first positional parameter so that this variable doesn't change
while the program is running. 7 December 2004. DWF.
Fixed an error I introduced on 7 December 2004. Sigh... 7 January 2005. DWF.
Added eight new colors. Total now of 104 colors. 11 August 2005. DWF.
Modified GUI to display system colors and removed PickColorName code. 13 Dec 2005. DWF.
Fixed a problem with colorIndex when SELECTCOLOR keyword was used. 13 Dec 2005. DWF.
Fixed a problem with color name synonyms. 19 May 2006. DWF.
The previous fix broke the ability to specify several colors at once. Fixed. 24 July 2006. DWF.
Updated program to work with 24-bit Z-buffer in IDL 6.4. 11 June 2007. DWF
Added the CRONJOB keyword. 07 Feb 2008. DWF.
Changed the CRONJOB keyword to NODISPLAY to better reflect its purpose. 7 FEB 2008. DWF.
Added the BREWER keyword to allow selection of Brewer Colors. 15 MAY 2008. DWF.
Added the CHECK_CONNECTION keyword and depreciated the NODISPLAY keyword for cron jobs. 15 MAY 2008. DWF.
Added the BREWER names to the program with or without the BREWER keyword set. 3 JULY 2008. DWF.
If color names '0', '1', '2', ..., '255', are used, the colors are taken from the current
color table in effect when the program is called. 23 March 2009. DWF.
Added the ability to use 24-bit PostScript color, if available. 24 May 2009. DWF.
Program relies on DecomposedColor() to determine decomposed state of PostScript device. 24 May 2009. DWF.
(See fsc_color.pro)
NAME:
FSC_DROPLIST
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this compound widget is to provide an alternative
to the DROPLIST widget offered in the IDL distribution. What has
always annoyed me about a droplist is that you can't get the current
"value" of a droplist easily. This compound widget makes this and
other tasks much easier.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
General programming.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
droplistObj = FSC_Droplist(parent, Title='Animals: ", Value=['Dog'. 'Cat', 'Coyote'], Index=2)
The return value of the FSC_Droplist (droplistObj in this example) is
an object reference. Interaction with the droplist will occur through
object methods.
INPUT PARAMETERS:
parent -- The parent widget ID of the compound widget. Required.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
Any keyword that is appropriate for the Widget_Droplist function can be used.
In addition, these keywords are explicitly defined.
EVENT_FUNC -- Set this keyword to the name of an Event Handler Function.
EVENT_PRO -- Set this keyword to the name of an Event Handler Procedure.
FORMAT -- A format specifier for the "format" of the values in the droplist.
INDEX -- The index number of the current selection.
SPACES -- A two-element array that indicates the number of blank spaces to be added
to the the beginning and end of the formatted values. If a single number
is provided, this number of blank spaces is added to both the beginning
and the end of the value.
TITLE -- The title of the droplist widget.
UNAME -- The user name of the droplist widget. (Only available in IDL 5.2 and higher.)
UVALUE -- The normal "user value" of the droplist.
VALUE -- An array of the droplist "selections". May be any data type.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
DEPENDENCIES:
Requires ERROR_MESSAGE from the Coyote Library..
EVENT STRUCTURE:
An event is returned each time the droplist value is changed. The event structure
is defined like this:
event = { FSC_DROPLIST_EVENT, $ ; The name of the event structure.
ID: 0L, $ ; The ID of the compound widget's top-level base.
TOP: 0L, $ ; The widget ID of the top-level base of the hierarchy.
HANDLER: 0L, $ ; The event handler ID. Filled out by IDL.
INDEX: 0L, $ ; The index number of the current selection.
SELECTION:Ptr_New() $ ; A pointer to the current selection "value".
SELF:Obj_New() } ; The object reference of the compound widget.
PUBLIC OBJECT METHODS:
GetID -- A function with no arguments that returns the widget identifier
of the droplist widget.
droplistID = droplistObj->GetID()
GetIndex -- A function with no arguments that returns the index
number of the current droplist selection.
currentIndex = droplistObj->GetIndex()
GetSelection -- A function with no arguments that returns the current
droplist selection.
currentSelection = droplistObj->GetSelection()
GetUValue -- A function with no arguments that returns the "user value"
of the compound widget i.e., the value set with the UVALUE keyword).
myUValue = droplistObj->GetUValue()
GetValues -- A function with no arguments that returns the "values" or
"selections" for the droplist.
possibleSelections = droplistObj->GetValues()
Resize -- A procedure that sets the X screen size of the droplist. It is
defined like this:
PRO Resize, newSize, ParentSize=parentSize
The "newSize" keyword is the new X screen size. If this argument is
missing, the screen X size of the compound widget's parent is used.
The parentSize keyword is an output keyword that returns the X screen
size of the compound widget's parent.
droplistObj->Resize, 400
Note that not all devices (e.g., X Windows devices) support droplist resizing.
SetIndex -- A procedure that sets the current droplist selection based on
the given index. This is equivalent to Widget_Control, droplistID, Set_Droplist_Select=newIndex
droplistObj->SetIndex, newIndex
SetSelection -- Whereas a regular droplist widget can only be set by index
number, this compound widget can also be set by a "selection". The new selection
can be any data type and corresponds to one of the "values" of the droplist.
droplistObj->SetSelection, newSelection
SetValues -- Sets the possible selections of the droplist widget. The CurrentIndex keyword
will allow the current index of the selection to be changed to:
newChoices = ['dog', 'cat', 'coyote']
droplistObj->SetValues, newChoices, CurrentIndex=2
EXAMPLE:
An example program is provided at the end of the FSC_DROPLIST code. To run it,
type these commands:
IDL> .Compile FSC_DROPLIST
IDL> Example
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W Fanning, 17 Jan 2000. DWF.
Added FORMAT and SPACES keywords 28 April 2000. DWF.
Fixed a small problem with event processing when the EVENT_FUNC keyword
was used. 29 Dec 2000. DWF.
Attached the UNAME value to the TLB of the compound widget instead
of to the droplist widget itself. 11 Jan 2001. DWF.
Fixed a problem when the droplist was part of a modal widget and used the
EVENT_PRO keyword. 27 Oct 2003. DWF.
Added a SetValue method for setting all the values in the droplist at once. 12 Nov 2004. DWF.
Fixed type on line 346/ 6 Feb 2008. DWF.
(See fsc_droplist.pro)
NAME:
FSC_FIELD
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this compound widget is to provide an alternative
to the CW_FIELD widget offered in the IDL distribution. One weakness
of the CW_FIELD compound widget is that the text widgets do not
look editable to the users on Windows platforms. This program
corrects that deficiency and adds some features that I think
will be helpful. For example, you can now assign an event handler
to the compound widget, ask for positive numbers only, and limit
the number of digits in a number, or the number of digits to the
right of a decimal point. The program is written as a widget object,
which allows the user to call object methods directly, affording
even more flexibility in use. This program replaces the earlier
programs FSC_INPUTFIELD and COYOTE_FIELD.
The program consists of a label widget next to a one-line text widget.
The "value" of the compound widget is shown in the text widget. If the
value is a number, it will not be possible (generally) to type
alphanumeric values in the text widget. String values behave like
strings in any one-line text widget.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
General programming.
TYPICAL CALLING SEQUENCE:
fieldID = FSC_FIELD(parent, Title="X Size:", Value=256, Object=fieldObject, Digits=3)
INPUT PARAMETERS:
parent -- The parent widget ID of the compound widget. Required.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
COLUMN Set this keyword to have the Label widget above the Text widget.
The default is to have the Label widget in a row with the Text widget.
CR_ONLY Set this keyword if you only want Carriage Return events returned to
your event handler. If this keyword is not set, all events are returned.
Setting this keyword has no effect unless either the EVENT_PRO or
EVENT_FUNC keyword is used.
DECIMAL Set this keyword to the number of digits to the right of the decimal
point in floating point or double precision numbers. Ignored for STRING values.
DIGITS Set this keyword to the number of digits permitted in integer numbers.
EVENT_FUNC Set this keyword to the name of an event handler function. If this
keyword is undefined and the Event_Pro keyword is undefined,
all compound widget events are handled internally and not
passed on to the parent widget.
EVENT_PRO Set this keyword to the name of an event handler procedure. If this
keyword is undefined and the Event_Func keyword is undefined,
all compound widget events are handled internally and not
passed on to the parent widget.
FIELDFONT The font name for the text in the text widget.
FRAME Set this keyword to put a frame around the compound widget.
FOCUS_EVENTS Set this keyword to enable event generation for keyboard focus
events. Ignored unless EVENT_FUNC or EVENT_PRO keywords are specified.
HIGHLIGHT Set this keyword to highlight the existing text if the widget gain
the keyboard focus. This keyword MUST be set for tabbing to work naturally
in IDL 6.2 and higher.
LABEL_LEFT Set this keyword to align the text on the label to the left.
LABEL_RIGHT Set this keyword to align the text on the label to the right.
LABELFONT The font name for the text in the label widget.
LABELSIZE The X screen size of the label widget.
NAME A string containing the name of the object. The default is ''.
NOEDIT Set this keyword to allow no user editing of the input text widget.
NONSENSITIVE Set this keyword to make the input text widget non-sensitive.
POSITIVE Set this keyword if you want only positive numbers allowed.
SCR_XSIZE The X screen size of the compound widget.
SCR_YSIZE The Y screen size of the compound widget.
TITLE The string text placed on the label widget.
UNDEFINED Set this keyword to the value to use for "undefined" values. If
not set, then !Value.F_NAN is used for numerical fields and a
NULL string is used for string fields. This applies to values
obtained with the GET_VALUE method or the GET_VALUE function.
UVALUE A user value for any purpose.
VALUE The "value" of the compound widget. Any type of integer, floating, or string
variable is allowed. The data "type" is determined automatically from the
value supplied with this keyword. Be sure you set the type appropriately for
your intended use of the value.
XSIZE The X size of the text widget in the usual character units.
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
OBJECT Set this keyword to a named variable to receive the compound widget's
object reference. This is required if you wish to call methods on the object.
Note that the object reference is also available in the event structure
generated by the widget object. Note that the object reference will be
necessary if you want to get or set values in the compound widget.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires DBLTOSTR from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/dbltostr.pro
EVENT STRUCTURE:
All events are handled internally unless either the Event_Pro or Event_Func
keywords are used to assign an event handler to the compound widget. By
default all events generated by the text widget are passed to the assigned
event handler. If you wish to receive only Carriage Return events, set the
CR_Only keyword.
event = { FSC_FIELD_EVENT, $ ; The name of the event structure.
ID: 0L, $ ; The ID of the compound widget's top-level base.
TOP: 0L, $ ; The widget ID of the top-level base of the hierarchy.
HANDLER: 0L, $ ; The event handler ID. Filled out by IDL.
OBJECT: Obj_New(), $ ; The "self" object reference. Provided so you can call methods.
VALUE: Ptr_New(), $ ; A pointer to the widget value.
TYPE:"" ; A string indicating the type of data in the VALUE field.
}
Note that if the field is "empty", the VALUE will be a pointer
to an undefined variable. You should check this value before you
use it. You code will look something like this:
IF N_Elements(*event.value) EQ 0 THEN $
Print, 'Current Value UNDEFINED.' ELSE $
Print, 'Current Value: ', *event.value
GETTING and SETTING VALUES:
Almost all the properties of the widget can be obtained or set via
the object's GetProperty and SetProperty methods (described below).
Traditional compound widgets have the ability to get and set the "value"
of the compound widget identifier (e.g., fieldID in the calling
sequence above). Unfortunately, it is impossible to retreive a variable
in this way when the variable is undefined. In practical terms, this
means that the undefined variable must be set to *something*. You can
determine what that something is with the UNDEFINED keyword, or I will set
it to !VALUES.F_NAN for numerical fields and to the null string for string
fields. In any case, you will have to check for undefined variables before
you try to do something with the value. For a numerical field, the code
might look something like this:
fieldID = FSC_FIELD(parent, Title="X Size:", Value=256, Object=fieldObject, Digits=3)
currentValue = fieldObject->Get_Value()
IF Finite(currentValue) EQ 0 THEN Print, 'Value is Undefined' ELSE Print, currentValue
Additional examples are provided in the numerical example fields in Example Program below.
Setting the value of the compound widget is the same as calling the Set_Value
method on the object reference. In other words, these two statements are equivalent.
fieldObject->Set_Value, 45.4
Widget_Control, fieldID, Set_Value=45.4
The data type of the value is determined from the value itself. Be sure you set it appropriately.
OBJECT PROCEDURE METHODS:
GetProperty -- This method allows various properties of the widget to be
returned via output keywords. The keywords that are available are:
CR_Only -- A flag, if set, means only report carriage return events.
DataType -- The data type of the field variable.
Decimal -- Set this keyword to the number of digits to the right of the decimal
point in FLOATVALUE and DOUBLEVALUE numbers.
Digits -- Set this keyword to the number of digits permitted in INTERGERVALUE and LONGVALUE numbers.
Event_Func -- The name of the event handler function.
Event_Pro -- The name of the event handler function.
Has_Focus -- Set to 1 if the text widget currently has the keyboard focus.
Highlight -- The highlight flag.
NoEdit -- The NoEdit flag.
NonSensitive -- The NonSensitive flag.
Undefined -- The "value" of any undefined value.
UValue -- The user value assigned to the compound widget.
Value -- The "value" of the compound widget.
Name -- A scalar string name of the object.
Resize -- This method allows you to resize the compound widget's text field.
The value parameter is an X screen size for the entire widget. The text
widget is sized by using the value obtained from this value minus the
X screen size of the label widget.
objectRef->Resize, screen_xsize_value
Set_Value -- This method allows you to set the "value" of the field. It takes
one positional parameter, which is the value.
objectRef->Set_Value, 5
SetProperty -- This method allows various properties of the widget to be
set via input keywords. The keywords that are available are:
CR_Only -- Set this keyword if you only want Carriage Return events.
Decimal -- Set this keyword to the number of digits to the right of the decimal
point in FLOAT and DOUBLE numbers.
Digits -- Set this keyword to the number of digits permitted in INTERGER and LONG numbers.
Event_Func -- Set this keyword to the name of an Event Function.
Event_Pro -- Set this keyword to the name of an Event Procedure.
Highlight -- Set this keyword to highlight the existing text
when the widget gets the keyboard focus
LabelSize -- The X screen size of the Label Widget.
Name -- A scalar string name of the object. (default = '')
NoEdit -- Set this keyword to make the text widget uneditable
NonSensitive -- Set this keyword to make the widget nonsensitive
Scr_XSize -- The X screen size of the text widget.
Scr_YSize -- The Y screen size of the text widget.
Title -- The text to go on the Label Widget.
UValue -- A user value for any purpose.
Value -- The "value" of the compound widget.
XSize -- The X size of the Text Widget.
SetTabNext -- This method allows you to specify which field to go to when a TAB character
is typed in the text widget. See the Example program below for an example of how to
use this method.
OBJECT FUNCTIONS METHODS:
Get_Value -- Returns the "value" of the field. No parameters. Will be undefined
if a "number" field is blank. Should be checked before using:
IF N_Elements(objectRef->Get_Value()) NE 0 THEN Print, Value is: ', objectRef->Get_Value()
GetID -- Returns the widget identifier of the compound widget's top-level base.
(The first child of the parent widget.) No parameters.
GetLabelSize -- Returns the X screen size of the label widget. No parameters.
GetTextID -- Returns the widget identifier of the compound widget's text widget.
No parameters.
GetTextSize -- Returns the X screen size of the text widget. No parameters.
PRIVATE OBJECT METHODS:
Although there is really no such thing as a "private" method in IDL's
object implementation, some methods are used internally and not meant to
be acessed publicly. Here are a few of those methods. I list them because
it may be these private methods are ones you wish to override in subclassed
objects.
MoveTab -- This method moves the focus to the widget identified in the "next" field,
which must be set with the SetTabNext method. No parameters. Called automatically
when a TAB character is typed in the text widget.
Text_Events -- The main event handler method for the compound widget. All
text widget events are processed here.
ReturnValue -- This function method accepts a string input value and converts
it to the type of data requested by the user.
Validate -- This function method examines all text input and removes unwanted
characters, depending upon the requested data type for the field. It makes it
impossible, for example, to type alphanumeric characters in an INTEGER field.
EXAMPLE:
An example program is provided at the end of the FSC_FIELD code. To run it,
type these commands:
IDL> .Compile FSC_Field
IDL> Example
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 18 October 2000. Based heavily on an earlier
FSC_INPUTFIELD program and new ideas about the best way to write
widget objects.
Added LABEL_LEFT, LABEL_RIGHT, and UNDEFINED keywords. 29 Dec 2000. DWF.
Modified the way the value is returned in the GET_VALUE method and the
GET_VALUE function. Modified Example program to demonstrate. 30 Dec 2000. DWF.
Added NOEDIT and NONSENSITIVE keywords, with corresponding SETEDIT and SETSENNSITIVE
methods. 19 Jan 2001. DWF.
Actually followed through with the changes I _said_" I made 29 Dec 2000. (Don't ask....) 13 June 2001. DWF.
Added GetTextSize and GetLabelSize methods for obtaining the X screen
size of the text and label widgets, respectively. 21 July 2001. DWF.
Fixed a problem in SetProperty method where I was setting self.xsize, which doesn't exist. 24 April 2002. DWF.
Small modification to the SetEdit method. 6 August 2003. DWF.
Added Highlight keyword. Ported Focus_Events keyword from
fsc_inputfield.pro. Updated documentation. 17 November
2004. DWF and Benjamin Hornberger
Added Has_Focus keyword to the GetProperty method. 18 November
2004. Benjamin Hornberger
Fixed bug in GetProperty method (set value to *self.undefined if
*self.value is undefined. 24 Feb 2004. Benjamin Hornberger
Modified FOCUS_EVENTS keyword handling so that *all* focus events are now
passed to specified event handlers. Check event.select to see if the
widget is gaining or losing focus. 10 August 2005. DWF.
Added new tabbing functionality, introduced in IDL 6.2. To use tabbing
functionality natually, the HIGHTLIGHT keywords must be set.
See included EXAMPLE program for details. 10 August 2005. DWF.
Added functionality to covert double precision values to strings properly. 30 Nov 2005. DWF.
Set the default fonts to be the current widget font, rather than the default widget font. 4 Oct 2008. DWF.
(See fsc_field.pro)
NAME:
FSC_FILESELECT
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this compound widget is to provide a means
by which the user can type or select a file name. The
program is written as an "object widget", meaning that
the guts of the program is an object of class FSC_FILESELECT.
This is meant to be an example of the obvious advantages of
writing compound widget programs as objects.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
General programming.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
filenameID = FSC_FileSelect(parent)
INPUT PARAMETERS:
parent -- The parent widget ID of the compound widget. Required.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
Event_Pro -- The event handler procedure for this compound widget.By default: "".
Event_Func -- The event handler function for this compound widget. By default: "".
If neither EVENT_PRO or EVENT_FUNC is defined, program events are handled internally by the compound widget.
DirectoryName -- The initial name of the directory. By defaut: current directory.
Filename -- The initial file name in the filename text widget.
Filter -- The file filter. By default: "*".
Frame -- Set this keyword for a frame around the compound widget.
LabelFont -- The font for the label widget. By default: "".
LabelName -- The text on the label widgt. By default: "Filename: ".
LabelSize -- The X screen size of the label widget. By default: 0.
MustExist -- A flag that indicates selected files must exist. By default: 0.
NoMaxSize -- A flag to prohibit automatic text widget sizing. By default: 0.
If this keyword is not set, the compound widget will automatically resize itself to
the largest widget in its parent base widget. It will do this by changing the size of
the text widgets holding the file and directory names.
Read -- Set this keyword to have file selection for reading a file. By default: 1.
SelectDirectory -- The default directory for file selection. In other words, this is the
default directory for DIALOG_PICKFILE, which is accessed via the BROWSE buttons.
SelectFont -- The font for the "Browse" button. By default: "".
SelectTitle -- The title bar text on the file selection dialog. By default: "Select a File...".
TextFont -- The font for the filename text widget. By default: "".
UValue -- User value for any purpose.
Write -- Set this keyword to open a file for writing. By default: 0.
XSize -- The X size of the text widget holding the filename. By default: StrLen(filename) * 1.5 > 40.
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
ObjectRef -- Assign this keyword to an output variable that will hold the internal object reference.
With the object reference you can call object methods to easily change many properties of
the compound widget.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires the folling files from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/error_message.pro
EVENT STRUCTURE:
All events are handled internally unless either the Event_Pro or Event_Func
keywords are used to assign an event handler to the compound widget. All events
generated by the text widgets are passed to the assigned event handler.
event = { CW_FILESELECT, $ ; The name of the event structure.
ID: 0L, $ ; The ID of the compound widget's top-level base.
TOP: 0L, $ ; The widget ID of the top-level base of the hierarchy.
HANDLER: 0L, $ ; The event handler ID. Filled out by IDL.
Basename: "", $ ; The base filename without directory specifiers.
Filename: "", $ ; The fully qualified filename.
Directory: "", $ ; The name of the current file directory.
}
EXAMPLE:
An example program is provided at the end of the FSC_FILESELECT code. To run it,
type these commands:
IDL> .Compile fsc_fileselect
IDL> Example
Or, if you want to obtain the object reference, type this:
IDL> Example, theObject
Now you can call the object's methods. For example:
IDL theObject->SetProperty, XSize=150
GETTING and SETTING VALUES:
So as not to disrupt the accepted paradigm in using compound widgets, you
can use the return value of the FSC_FILESELECT function with WIDGET_CONTROL to
get and set the "value" of the widget.
Widget_Control, filenameID, Set_Value='C:\RSI\IDL52\DATA\cyclone.dat'
The program will automatically separate the file name portion of the value
from the directory portion and put things in the correct text widgets.
Similarly, you can get the "value" of the widget:
Widget_Control, filenameID, Get_Value=theValue
Print, theValue
C:\RSI\IDL52\DATA\cyclone.dat
The return value is the fully qualified file path to the file.
USING OBJECT METHODS to CHANGE PROGRAM PROPERTIES:
If you obtain the object reference, you have a great deal more control
over the properties of the compound widget. You obtain the object reference
by calling the function like this:
filenameID = FSC_FILESELECT(parent, ObjectRef=theObject)
OBJECT PROCEDURE METHODS:
GetProperty -- This method allows various properties of the widget to be
returned via output keywords. The keywords that are available are:
DirectoryName -- The current directory.
Event_Func -- The name of the event handler function for this compound widget.
Event_Pro -- The name of the event handler procedure for this compound widget.
Filename -- The current base filename.
Filter -- The current file filter.
LabelName -- The text on the label widget.
LabelSize -- The X screen size of the label widget.
MustExist -- A flag that indicates selected files must exist to be selected.
Parent -- The parent widget of the compound widget.
Read=read -- The file selection for reading flag.
SelectTitle -- The title bar text on the file selection dialog.
TLB -- The top-level base of the compound widget.
UValue -- The user value of the compound widget.
Write -- The file selection for writing flag.
XSize -- The X size of the text widget holding the filename.
LabelSize -- This method makes sure that the directory name and file name labels
are the same size. Normally, this procedure is called internally. No parameters.
MatchSize -- This method resizes the compound widget so that it is as long as the
the longest widget in the parent base widget. This is done automatically upon
realization unless the NOMAXSIZE keyword is set. The method aids in writing
resizeable widget programs.
SetProperty -- This method allows various properties of the widget to be
set via input keywords. The keywords that are available are:
DirectoryName -- The current directory.
Event_Func -- The name of the event handler function for this compound widget.
Event_Pro -- The name of the event handler procedure for this compound widget.
Filename -- The current base filename.
Filter -- The current file filter.
LabelName -- The text on the label widget.
LabelSize -- The X screen size of the label widget.
MustExist -- A flag that indicates selected files must exist to be selected.
Read -- The file selection for reading flag.
SelectTitle -- The title bar text on the file selection dialog.
UValue -- The user value of the compound widget.
Write -- The file selection for writing flag.
XSize -- The X size of the text widget holding the filename.
TextSelect - Allows you to create a selection in filename text widget. See the
documentation for the SET_TEXT_SELECT keyword to Widget_Control.
selection -- A two-element array containing the starting position and selection length.
OBJECT FUNCTION METHODS:
GetFileName -- Returns the fully qualified filename. No parameters.
GetTLB -- Returns the top-level base ID of the compound widget. No Parameters.
Inspect_DirectoryName -- Inspects the directory name for correctness. Requires one positional parameter.
directoryName -- The name of the directory from the directory text widget.
textSelection -- The current text selection position.
At the moment all this does is remove any blank characters from either
end of the directory name and makes sure the last character of the directory
name does not end in a subdirectory specifier (except for VMS).
Inspect_Filename -- Inspects the file name for correctness. Requires one positional parameter.
filename -- The name of the file from the filename text widget.
textSelection -- The current text selection position.
At the moment all this does is remove any blank characters from either
end of the file name
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 21 NOV 1999.
Fixed bug in File Name selection button. 18 MAR 2000. DWF.
Fixed an error in which directory the Browse buttons should start
searching. 29 SEP 2000. DWF.
Previously returned events only for typing in text widgets. Now
Browse button events are also returned. 29 SEP 2000. DWF.
Fixed a bug in setting the file filter. 29 SEP 2000. DWF.
Removed the Directory Browse button 10 AUG 2002. DWF.
Added ERROR_MESSAGE to error handling. 10 AUG 2002. DWF.
Changed the ability to specify a file filter as a string array, instead
of just as a scalar string. This required the use of a pointer, which
meant that I had to remove the FILTER field from the CW_FILESELECT
event structure to avoid likely memory leakage. This is a dangerous
change because it means programs that relied on this (I expect there
are very, very few) will break and it goes against my philosopy of
keeping my programs backward compatible. Let me know if you have
problems. In testing, I discoved no problems in my own code. 31 OCT 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem with DIALOG_PICKFILE that sometimes allowed users to change
directories without selecting a file. 3 Nov 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem with widget resizing with the help of Bob Portman that had plagued
me from the beginning. Thanks, Bob! 5 August 2003. DWF
Added TEXTSELECT method. 5 Aug 2003. DWF.
Had to add FORWARD_FUNCTION statement to get error handler compiled when using
DIRECTORY keyword. 24 Nov 2003. DWF.
Fixed a problem with too many events going to an event handler specified with
the EVENT_PRO or EVENT_FUNC keyword from the text widget. Now only Carriage
Return events are passed on to the user-specified event handler. 8 July 2004. DWF.
Replace all "\" characters with "/" characters in directory names. 8 Januay 2006. DWF.
Set the default fonts to be the current widget font, rather than the default widget font. 4 Oct 2008. DWF.
(See fsc_fileselect.pro)
NAME:
FSC_INPUTFIELD
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this compound widget is to provide an alternative
to the CW_FIELD widget offered in the IDL distribution. What has
always bothered me about CW_FIELD is that the text widgets do not
look editable to the users on Windows platforms. This program
corrects that deficiency and adds some features that I think
would be helpful. For example, you can now assign an event handler
to the compound widget. The program is written entirely as an object.
A companion program, COYOTE_FIELD, has much the same functionality,
but is written as a traditional compound widget. The point of writing
the same program in two different ways is to give you the opportunity
to compare and contrast the two methods. I personally think there
is no substitute for the power of object programs. :-)
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
General programming.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
objectRef = FSC_INPUTFIELD(parent, Title='X Size: ", Value=256, /IntegerValue)
INPUT PARAMETERS:
parent -- The parent widget ID of the compound widget. Required.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
Column -- Set this keyword to have the Label Widget above the Text Widget.
CR_Only -- Set this keyword if you only want Carriage Return events. Note that no
events are returned unless the EVENT_PRO or EVENT_FUNC keywords are also used.
Decimal -- Set this keyword to the number of digits to the right of the decimal
point in FLOATVALUE and DOUBLEVALUE numbers.
Digits -- Set this keyword to the number of digits permitted in INTERGERVALUE and LONGVALUE numbers.
DoubleValue -- Set this keyword if you want DOUBLE values returned.
Event_Func -- Set this keyword to the name of an Event Function. If this
keyword is undefined and the Event_Pro keyword is undefined,
all compound widget events are handled internally and not
passed on to the parent widget.
Event_Pro -- Set this keyword to the name of an Event Procedure. If this
keyword is undefined and the Event_Func keyword is undefined,
all compound widget events are handled internally and not
passed on to the parent widget.
FieldFont -- The font name for the text in the Text Widget.
FloatValue -- Set this keyword for FLOAT values.
Focus_Events -- Set this keyword if you only want text events when the keyboard focus is
moved out of the text widget. Note that no events are returned unless the
EVENT_PRO or EVENT_FUNC keywords are also used.
Frame -- Set this keyword to put a frame around the compound widget.
IntegerValue -- Set this keyword for INTEGER values.
LabelAlign -- Set this keyword to align label text. [0-center (default), 1-left, 2-right].
LabelFont -- The font name for the text in the Label Widget.
LabelSize -- The X screen size of the Label Widget.
LongValue -- Set this keyword for LONG values.
Name -- A scalar string name of the object. (default = '')
Positive -- Set this keyword if you want only positive numbers allowed.
Row=row -- Set this keyword to have the Label beside the Text Widget. (The default.)
Scr_XSize -- The X screen size of the compound widget.
Scr_YSize -- The Y screen size of the compound widget.
StringValue -- Set this keyword for STRING values. (The default.)
Title -- The text to go on the Label Widget.
UValue -- A user value for any purpose.
Value -- The "value" of the compound widget.
XSize -- The X size of the Text Widget.
In addition, any keyword defined for WIDGET_TEXT, but not defined here (e.g., SENSITIVE), is
passed along without inspection to the text widget. Use of "extra" keywords is discouraged.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
None.
EVENT STRUCTURE:
All events are handled internally unless either the Event_Pro or Event_Func
keywords are used to assign an event handler to the compound widget. By
default all events generated by the text widget are passed to the assigned
event handler. If you wish to receive only Carriage Return events, set the
CR_Only keyword.
event = { FSC_INPUTFIELD_EVENTS, $ ; The name of the event structure.
ID: 0L, $ ; The ID of the compound widget's top-level base.
TOP: 0L, $ ; The widget ID of the top-level base of the hierarchy.
HANDLER: 0L, $ ; The event handler ID. Filled out by IDL.
ObjRef: Obj_New(), $ ; The "self" object reference. Provided so you can call methods.
Value: Ptr_New(), $ ; A pointer to the widget value.
Type:"" ; A string indicating the type of data in the VALUE field.
} ; Values are "INT", "LONG", "FLOAT", "DOUBLE", or "STRING".
GETTING and SETTING VALUES:
Almost all the properties of the widget can be obtained or set via
the object's GetProperty and SetProperty methods (described below).
But since traditional compound widgets have the ability to get and
set the value of the compound widget, this capability is implemented
as special methods.
To get the value of the field, do this: value = objectRef->Get_Value()
To set the value of the field, so this: objectRef->Set_Value, value, /IntegerValue
The proper keyword should be used to set the data type of the value. If a keyword
is not used, the data type is determined from the value itself.
OBJECT PROCEDURE METHODS:
GetProperty -- This method allows various properties of the widget to be
returned via output keywords. The keywords that are available are:
CR_Only -- A flag, if set, means only report carriage return events.
DataType -- The data type of the field variable.
Decimal -- Set this keyword to the number of digits to the right of the decimal
point in FLOATVALUE and DOUBLEVALUE numbers.
Digits -- Set this keyword to the number of digits permitted in INTERGERVALUE and LONGVALUE numbers.
Event_Func -- The name of the event handler function.
Event_Pro -- The name of the event handler function.
Positive -- Indicates if the Positive number flag is set (1) or not (0).
UValue -- The user value assigned to the compound widget.
Value -- The "value" of the compound widget.
Name -- A scalar string name of the object.
Resize -- This method allows you to resize the compound widget's text field.
The value parameter is an X screen size for the entire widget. The text
widget is sized by using the value obtained from this value minus the
X screen size of the label widget.
objectRef->Resize, screen_xsize_value
Set_Value -- This method allows you to set the "value" of the field. It takes
one positional parameter, which is the value.
objectRef->Set_Value, 5
Keywords available are these to set the type of the data. If keywords
are not used, the data type is determined from the value.
DoubleValue -- Set this keyword if you want DOUBLE values returned.
FloatValue -- Set this keyword for FLOAT values.
IntegerValue -- Set this keyword for INTEGER values.
LongValue -- Set this keyword for LONG values.
StringValue -- Set this keyword for STRING values. (The default.)
SetProperty -- This method allows various properties of the widget to be
set via input keywords. The keywords that are available are:
CR_Only -- Set this keyword if you only want Carriage Return events.
Decimal -- Set this keyword to the number of digits to the right of the decimal
point in FLOATVALUE and DOUBLEVALUE numbers.
Digits -- Set this keyword to the number of digits permitted in INTERGERVALUE and LONGVALUE numbers.
DoubleValue -- Set this keyword if you want DOUBLE values returned.
Event_Func -- Set this keyword to the name of an Event Function.
Event_Pro -- Set this keyword to the name of an Event Procedure.
FloatValue -- Set this keyword for FLOAT values.
IntegerValue -- Set this keyword for INTEGER values.
LabelSize -- The X screen size of the Label Widget.
LongValue -- Set this keyword for LONG values.
Name -- A scalar string name of the object. (default = '')
Positive -- Set this keyword to indicate only positive numbers are allowed.
Scr_XSize -- The X screen size of the text widget.
Scr_YSize -- The Y screen size of the text widget.
Sensitive -- Set to 1 to make the widget sensitive, and to 0 to make it insensitive.
StringValue -- Set this keyword for STRING values. (The default.)
Title -- The text to go on the Label Widget.
UValue -- A user value for any purpose.
Value -- The "value" of the compound widget.
XSize -- The X size of the Text Widget.
SetTabNext -- This method allows you to specify which field to go to when a TAB character
is typed in the text widget. See the Example program below for an example of how to
use this method.
OBJECT FUNCTIONS METHODS:
Get_Value -- Returns the "value" of the field. No parameters. Will be undefined
if a "number" field is blank. Should be checked before using:
IF N_Elements(objectRef->Get_Value()) NE 0 THEN Print, Value is: ', objectRef->Get_Value()
GetID -- Returns the widget identifier of the compound widget's top-level base.
(The first child of the parent widget.) No parameters.
GetLabelSize -- Returns the X screen size of the label widget. No parameters.
GetTextID -- Returns the widget identifier of the compound widget's text widget.
No parameters.
GetTextSize -- Returns the X screen size of the text widget. No parameters.
PRIVATE OBJECT METHODS:
Although there is really no such thing as a "private" method in IDL's
object implementation, some methods are used internally and not meant to
be acessed publicly. Here are a few of those methods. I list them because
it may be these private methods are ones you wish to override in subclassed
objects.
MoveTab -- This method moves the focus to the widget identified in the "next" field,
which must be set with the SetTabNext method. No parameters. Called automatically
when a TAB character is typed in the text widget.
Text_Events -- The main event handler method for the compound widget. All
text widget events are processed here.
ReturnValue -- This function method accepts a string input value and converts
it to the type of data requested by the user.
Validate -- This function method examines all text input and removes unwanted
characters, depending upon the requested data type for the field. It makes it
impossible, for example, to type alphanumeric characters in an INTEGER field.
EXAMPLE:
An example program is provided at the end of the FSC_INPUTFIELD code. To run it,
type these commands:
IDL> .Compile FSC_InputField
IDL> Example
NOTES:
IDL 6.2 introduced new TAB behavior, which broke the previous TAB behavior. New TAB behavior
is now supported, but FOCUS_EVENTS *must* be set on the widget for the new TAB events to
behave properly. See the EXAMPLE program for examples.
DEPENDENCIES:
Requires DBLTOSTR from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/dbltostr.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 23 NOV 1999.
Added DECIMAL and DIGITS keywords, 2 Jan 2000, DWF.
Changed the calling sequence to that of a function rather than an object
creation call. This is more familiar to users of compound widgets. 4 Jan 00. DWF.
Added GetID and Resize methods. 7 Jan 00. DWF.
Added the Positive keyword and functionality. 12 Jan 00. DWF
Modified (slightly) the behavior on deleting characters. 12 Jan 00. DWF.
If a number field is blank, the Get_Value method will now return an undefined variable.
Be sure you check this value before you use it for something! 17 Jan 00. DWF.
Fixed a small typo: "aveDecimal" to "haveDecimal". 10 March 2000. DWF.
Added the ability to tab between FSC_INPUTFIELD widgets with the SetTabNext,
MoveTab, and GetTextID methods. 31 July 2000. DWF.
Added NAME field property, a scalar string name for the object 2 AUG 2000 BT
Added ObjRef field to the FSC_FIELD event structure and added field selection
for the TAB events added 31 July. 7 AUG 2000. DWF
Added GetTextSize and GetLabelSize methods for obtaining the X screen
size of the text and label widgets, respectively. 30 Jan 2001. DWF.
Added FOCUS_EVENTS keyword and fixed a problem with the event structure.
Also added better error handling. 5 January 2003. DWF.
Fixed a small problem in which input values were cast to strings inadvertently. 9 January 2004. DWF.
Fixed a small problem with error messages and using EVENT_FUNC. 14 January 2004. DWF.
Fixed a problem when setting ROW keyword. 23 February 2004. DWF.
IDL 6.2 introduced new TAB behavior, which broke the previous TAB behavior. New TAB behavior
is now supported, but FOCUS_EVENTS *must* be set for the new TAB events to behave properly.
10 August 2005. DWF.
Modified to covert double precision values to strings properly. 30 November 2005. DWF.
Added POSITIVE keyword to SETPROPERTY and GETPROPERTY methods. 25 February 2006. DWF.
Set the DYNAMIC_RESIZE keyword on the label widget. 25 February 2006. DWF.
Added SENSITIVE keyword to SetProperty documentation. 10 November 2006. DWF.
Fixed a small problem in which doubles were not being initialized correctly due
to an inadvertant extra line of code. 3 July 2007. DWF.
Fixed a small problem with input validation when the input is of BYTE type. 1 Oct 2008. DWF.
Set the default fonts to be the current widget font, rather than the default widget font. 4 Oct 2008. DWF.
(See fsc_inputfield.pro)
NAME:
FSC_NORMALIZE
PURPOSE:
This is a utility routine to calculate the scaling vector
required to position a graphics primitive of specified range
at a specific position in an arbitray coordinate system. The
scaling vector is given as a two-element array like this:
scalingVector = [translationFactor, scalingFactor]
The scaling vector should be used with the [XYZ]COORD_CONV
keywords of a graphics object or model. For example, if you
wanted to scale an X axis into the coordinate range of -0.5 to 0.5,
you might type something like this:
xAxis->GetProperty, Range=xRange
xScale = FSC_Normalize(xRange, Position=[-0.5, 0.5])
xAxis, XCoord_Conv=xScale
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Object Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
xscaling = FSC_NORMALIZE(xrange, POSITION=position)
INPUTS:
XRANGE: A two-element vector specifying the data range.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
POSITION: A two-element vector specifying the location
in the coordinate system you are scaling into. The vector [0,1]
is used by default if POSITION is not specified.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
EXAMPLE:
See above.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, OCT 1997.
Fixed a problem with illegal divide by zero. 21 April 2005. DWF.
Fixed a problem when range[0] is greater than range[1]. 11 July 2006. DWF.
Renamed to FSC_Normalize to avoid conflicts with 10,000 other programs named NORMALIZE. 17 October 2008. DWF.
(See fsc_normalize.pro)
NAME:
FSC_PLOTWINDOW
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this compound widget is to create a resizeable
"plot window" inside a larger "page window". I'm not sure it
has any value except as a utility routine for the PostScript
configuration object FSC_PSCONFIG__DEFINE, but it's a neat
program anyway. :-)
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Utility routine for FSC_PSCONFIG__DEFINE.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
plotwindowObject = CW_PlotWindow(parent)
REQUIRED INPUT PARAMETERS:
parent - The parent base widget of this compound widget.
RETURN VALUE:
plotwindowObject - The object reference of the compound widget.
KEYWORDS:
COLOR - If set, display the window in "color". This is the default on 24-bit devices.
DEBUG - Set this keyword to turn traceback error handling on in the error handling code.
EVENT_PRO - The event procedure for the widget. Required for events to be generated. Otherwise, all events are handled internally.
LANDSCAPE - If set, display the page in landscape mode. Otherwise the page is display in portrait mode.
PAGESIZE - The "pagesize" of the widget. Possible values are: "LETTER", "LEDGER", "LEGAL", "A4", and "DISPLAY".
UNITS - A string indicating INCHES or CENTIMETER units. DEVICE units represented by a null string, "".
UVALUE - A user value for the caller of this program.
WINDOWCOLOR - A three-element array specifying the background window color (RGB).
WINDOWSIZE - The size of the "window" on the page. A four-element array of normalized coordinates in the form [x0, y0, x1, y1].
EVENT STRUCTURE:
The event structure that is returned from this compound widget is defined like this,
where the sizes and offsets locate the target "window" on the page in normalized units:
event = {ID:0L, TOP:0L, HANDLER:0L, XSize:0.0, YSize:0.0, XOffset:0.0, YOffset:0.0}
MODIFICATIONS:
Written by David Fanning, 31 January 2000.
Fixed a small bug that prevented it working on Macintosh computers. 26 Sept 2000. DWF.
Added a "DISPLAY" page size, so the program can be used to position
plots and other graphics in a display window. The "page area" will
have the same aspect ratio is the current graphics window. 17 March 2001. DWF.
Changed some of the tolerances for "closeness" from 0.1 to 0.025 to allow smaller
sizing for colorbars and other small objects. 6 July 2005. DWF.
(See fsc_plotwindow.pro)
NAME:
FSC_PSCONFIG__DEFINE
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to implement an object that
can keep track of--and allow the user to change--the current
configuration of the PostScript device.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
General programming.
DOCUMENTATION:
Complete documentation for the FSC_PSCONFIG object, including
keyword and method descriptions, and example programs using the object
can be found on the Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming web page:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/docs/fsc_psconfig.html
Or, if you would prefer, you can download a self-contained PDF file:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/docs/fsc_psconfig.pdf
KEYWORDS:
Any keyword accepted by the FSC_PSCONFIG object can be used with
this program. Here are a few of the most popular keywords.
Bits_per_Pixel - The number of image bits saved for each image pixel: 2, 4, or 8. The default is 8.
Color - Set this keyword to select Color PostScript output. Turned on by default.
DefaultSetup - Set this keyword to the "name" of a default style. Current styles (you can easily
create and add your own to the source code) are the following:
"System (Portrait)" - The normal "default" system set-up. Also, "System".
"System (Landscape)" - The normal "default" landscape system set-up.
"Centered (Portrait)" - The window centered on the page. Also, "Center" or "Centered".
"Centered (Landscape)" - The window centered on the landscape page. Also, "Landscape".
"Square (Portrait)" - A square plot, centered on the page.
"Square (Landscape)" - A square plot, centered on the landscape page.
"Figure (Small)" - A small encapsulated figure size, centered on page. Also, "Encapsulated" or "Encapsulate".
"Figure (Large)" - A larger encapsulated figure size, centered on page. Also, "Figure".
"Color (Portrait)" - A "centered" plot, with color turned on. Also, "Color".
"Color (Landscape)" - A "centered" landscape plot, with color turned on.
Directory - Set this keyword to the name of the starting directory. The current directory is used by default.
Encapsulate - Set this keyword to select Encapsulated PostScript output. Turned off by default.
European - Set this keyword to indicate "european" mode (i.e., A4 page and centimeter units). Turned off by default.
Filename - Set thie keyword to the name of the PostScript file. The default is "idl.ps".
Inches - Set this keyword to indicate sizes and offsets are in inches as opposed to centimeters. Set by European keyword by default.
Landscape - Set this keyword to select Landscape page output. Portrait page output is the default.
PageType - Set this keyword to the "type" of page. Possible values are:
"Letter" - 8.5 by 11 inches. (Default, unless the European keyword is set.)
"Legal" - 8.5 by 14 inches.
"Ledger" - 11 by 17 inches.
"A4" - 21.0 by 29.7 centimeters. (Default, if the European keyword is set.)
XOffset - Set this keyword to the X Offset. Uses "System (Portrait)" defaults. (Note: offset calculated from lower-left corner of page.)
XSize - Set this keyword to the X size of the PostScript "window". Uses "System (Portrait)" defaults.
YOffset - Set this keyword to the Y Offset. Uses "System (Portrait)" defaults. (Note: offset calculated from lower-left corner of page.)
YSize - Set this keyword to the Y size of the PostScript "window". Uses "System (Portrait)" defaults.
In addition, the following keywords can be used:
CANCEL -- An output keyword that will be set to 1 if the user
chooses the Cancel button on the form. It will be 0 otherwise.
FONTINFO -- Set this keyword is you wish to have font information
appear on the form. The default is to not include font information.
FONTTYPE -- Set this keyword to a named variable that will indicate
the user's preference for font type. Values will be -1 (Hershey fonts),
0 (hardware fonts), and 1 (true-type fonts). This keyword will always
return -1 unless the FONTINFO keyword has also been set.
GROUP_LEADER -- Set this keyword to a widget identifier of the widget
you wish to be a group leader for this program.
EXAMPLE:
A simple sequence of using the object would look something like this:
psObject = Obj_New("FSC_PSCONFIG")
psObject->GUI
psKeywords = psObject->GetKeywords()
thisDevice = !D.Name
Set_Plot, 'PS'
Device, _Extra=psKeywords
TVImage, image
Device, /Close_File
Set_Plot, thisDevice
Obj_Destroy, psObject
Note that the object can also be called from the PS_CONFIG interface:
psKeywords = PSConfig()
OTHER PROGRAMS NEEDED:
The following programs are required to run this one:
fsc_droplist.pro
fsc_fileselect.pro
fsc_field.pro
fsc_plotwindow
MODIFICATIONS:
Written by David W. Fanning, 31 January 2000.
Added capability to call GUI methods when the current graphics device
doesn't support windows. Device is restored when the GUI exits. 11 May 2000. DWF.
Changed the default value for the Color keyword to 1. 16 May 2000. DWF.
Fixed a bug where filename changed when switching Setups. 8 AUG 2000. DWF.
Fixed a bug when saving setup in Landscape mode. 8 AUG 2000. DWF.
Added the ability to Get and Set the object's name via the SetProperty
and a very abbreviated GetProperty method. Also added a GetName method. 26 SEP 2000. DWF.
Fixed a problem in which the proper configuration was not restored if in Landscape mode. 20 Nov 2000. DWF.
Made a number of modifications at the request of Martin Schultz. 4 Dec 2000. DWF.
Fixed a bug when setting file and directory names with the SetProperty method. 18 Dec 2000. DWF.
Fixed a small problem in initializing the page size properly. 3 Jan 2001. DWF.
Corrected a problem that resulted from a change to FSC_DROPLIST. 6 Jan 2001. DWF.
Added the ability to restore the font type instead of always reverting to !P.Font. 7 Jan 2001. DWF.
Increased the length of the file/directory name fields. 7 Jan 2001. DWF.
Fixed another problem with Landscape mode interacting with A4 paper size. 7 Jan 2001. DWF.
Seems I only half fixed the previous problem. :-( 26 April 2001. DWF.
Forgot to update program to reflect change in FSC_FIELD. Fixed 26 April 2001. DWF.
Changed BOOKMAN keyword to BKMAN to avoid conflict with BOOKSTYLE keyword. 26 April 2001. DWF.
Modified the System Defaults to say "None" if none is used. Improved documentation. 10 September 2001. DWF.
Added the ability to specify a filename at the same time as a Default Setup. 10 September 2001. DWF.
Fixed a small problem in not setting new page sizes appropriately. 22 May 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem that occurred when the Accept button was not named "Accept". 6 May 2003.DWF.
Whoops! I was a bit overly agressive on that last fix. :-( 17 July 2003. DWF.
Fixed a problem with setting page types when using the DEFAULTSETUP keyword. 31 July 2003. DWF.
Fixed a problem with turning encapsulation on in the GUI. Renamed ENCAPSULATE keyword ENCAPSULATED
to avoid obvious errors. 31 July 2003. DWF.
Removed obsolete STR_SEP and replaced with STRSPLIT. 27 Oct 2004. DWF.
Now honoring EUROPEAN keyword when setting system default setups in the INIT method. 12 Nov 2004. DWF.
Added CMYK output option 24 August 2007. Assumes LANGUAGE_LEVEL=2 printer. L. Anderson.
Fixed a problem with the filename on WINDOWS computers coming back with forward slashes instead of
backward slashes. 20 May 2008. DWF.
Modified the program to return as the default, ISOLATIN1=1. 18 July 2008. DWF.
Fixed a problem with filenames when a DEFAULTSETUP was used with it. 12 Nov 2008. DWF.
Changed default window size when LANDSCAPE keyword is set. 10 April 2009. DWF.
Changed the default window size for PORTRAIT mode to be a bit larger. 10 April 2009. DWF.
Updated for IDL 7.1 and 24-bit color PostScript support. 24 May 2009. DWF.
(See fsc_psconfig__define.pro)
NAME:
FSC_PS_SETUP__DEFINE
PURPOSE:
The purpose of FSC_PS_SETUP__DEFINE is to define a structure that is
use with PS_START and PS_END, programs that make it easy to set-up
for and close a PostScript file. The programs work in close conjunction
with PSCONFIG, another program from the Coyote Library.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics, File Output, PostScript
CALLING SEQUENCE:
Used internally in PS_START and PS_END.
COMMON BLOCKS:
_$FSC_PS_START_ Contains the PS_STRUCT structure for communication between
PS_START and PS_END.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Separated from PS_START file, 7 April 2009, by David W. Fanning.
(See fsc_ps_setup__define.pro)
NAME:
FSC_SURFACE
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to demonstrate how to
create a rotating surface using object graphics.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Widgets, Object Graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
FSC_SURFACE, data, x, y
REQUIRED INPUTS:
None. Fake data will be used if no data is supplied in call.
OPTIONAL INPUTS
data: A 2D array of surface data.
x: A vector of X data values.
y: A vector of Y data values.
OPTIONAL KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
BLOCK: Set this keyword to 1 to create a blocking widget program. This is
useful if you want to call this program from within a stopped program, for
example. Remember only the first blocking program actually blocks.
COLORTABLE: Set this keyword to a number between 0 and 40 to select one
of the pre-selected IDL color tables for elevation shading.
ELEVATION_SHADING: Set this keyword to put elevation shading into effect.
EXACT: Set this keyword to a one-, two-,or three-element array to set exact axis
scaling for the X, Y, and Z axes, respectively. If Exact is a one-element array,
all three axes are set to the same value. For example, to set the X axis to
exact scaling and the Y and Z axes to normal scaling, type:
IDL> FSC_Surface, Exact=[1,0,0]
_EXTRA: This keyword collects otherwise undefined keywords that are
passed to the IDLgrSURFACE initialization routine.
GROUP_LEADER: The group leader for this program. When the group leader
is destroyed, this program will be destroyed.
HIDDEN_LINES: Set this keyword to draw the surface with hidden lines removed.
LANDSCAPE: Set this keyword if you are printing in landscape mode. The
default is Portrait mode. The Landscape keyword on the PRINTER object
is set, but not all printers will honor this keyword setting. If yours
does not, set Landscape mode in the Printer Setup dialog.
POSITION: A two-, four- or six-element array of normalized (0 to 1) coordinates
used to position the X, Y, and Z axis in the coordinate space. Uses the form
[x0, x1, y0, y1, z0, z1]. In the absence of POSITION information, the Z position
is always [0,1] and the X and Y positions are calculated in a manner that
preserves the aspect ratio of the surface data.
SHADED: Set this keyword to set up a shaded surface plot rather than a wire
mesh surface, which is the default.
TITLE: A string used as the title of the plot.
XRANGE: A two-element array specifying the range of the X axis.
XTITLE: A string used as the X title of the plot.
YRANGE: A two-element array specifying the range of the Y axis.
ZRANGE: A two-element array specifying the range of the Z axis.
YTITLE: A string used as the Y title of the plot.
ZTITLE: A string used as the Z title of the plot.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
None.
DEPENDENCIES:
This program requires the following additional files from the Coyote Library:
error_message.pro
fsc_droplist.pro
fsc_color.pro
normalize.pro
loaddata.pro
pickcolor.pro
xcolors.pro
EXAMPLE:
To use this program with your data, type:
IDL> FSC_Surface, data
Use your LEFT mouse button to rotate the surface plot in the window.
Use your RIGHT mouse button to zoom into a closer view of the plot.
Use your MIDDLE mouse button to zoom away from the plot.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David Fanning, 8 June 97.
Made axis scaling more robust. 17 Sept 97. DWF.
Minor modifications to incorporate better understanding
of how objects work. 4 Oct 97. DWF.
Fixed error cleaning up all of my created objects. 12 Feb 98. DWF.
Changed IDLgrContainer to IDL_Container to fix 5.1 problems. 20 May 98. DWF.
Fixed mis-spelling of HELVETICA14. 29 June 98. DWF.
Added the EXACT keyword to the X and Y axes to force axis ranging. 27 July 98. DWF
Added the ability to select rendering "drag" quality for faster operation. 22 Aug 98. DWF.
Added ability to get non-exact axis scaling. 12 May 99. DWF.
Improved documentation and readability of code. 12 May 99. DWF.
Added VECTOR and LANDSCAPE keywords and improved printing capability. 16 Feb 2000. DWF.
Added different lights and a Light Controller option. 28 April 2000. DWF.
Added elevation shading. 8 May 2000. DWF.
Removed VECTOR keyword. Replaced with VECTOR/BITMAP/COLOR Print buttons. 8 May 2000. DWF.
Added HIDDEN_LINE keyword. 8 May 2000. DWF.
Added EXACT keyword extensions and changed name from XSURFACE to FSC_SURFACE. 11 May 2000. DWF.
Made change to Light Control code to accomodate FSC_DROPLIST changes. 6 Jan 2001. DWF.
Removed unused color table vector code from a LONG time ago. 17 Jan 2001. DWF.
Added TIFF file output and removed GIF output for IDL 5.4. 11 Feb 2001. DWF.
Added short wait before taking image snapshot for JPEG and TIFF files to avoid
extraneous text in output files. 22 October 2001. DWF.
Added the POSITION keyword. 16 April 2002. DWF.
Added the ability to zoom into and out of plot with RIGHT and MIDDLE mouse buttons. 16 April 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem with leaving lights on when switching to elevation shading. 16 April 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem in not restoring viewport parameters after printing. 20 April 2002. DWF.
Added BMP, EPS, and PGN file output. 20 April 2002.DWF.
Added a BLOCK keyword. 11 May 2002. DWF.
Added a check for NAN in elevation colors part of the code. 14 August 2002. DWF.
Removed extra Save As TIFF File button. 24 August 2002. DWF.
Removed NORMALIZE from the source code. 29 November 2005. DWF.
Added [XYZ]Range keywords. 15 February 2006. DWF.
Fixed a problem with colors. Elevation shading now corresponds to Z Axis range, not data range.
15 February 2006. DWF.
Added ENABLE_FORMATTING keywords to axis and plot title creation functions. 15 February 2006. DWF.
Fixed a problem with EXPOSE events not blocking when blocking widgets are running. This is apparently
due to undocumented changes in XMANAGER behaviour. 5 July 2006. DWF.
Set RETAIN=2 on draw widget and removed EXPOSE EVENTS to avoid problems with menus interfering
with window updating. (Must be 2 and not 1 on RETAIN!) 13 June 2008. DWF.
In the past, lights completely interfered with elevation shading. This is no longer the case, so
I removed all light hiding when elevation shading. 13 June 2008. DWF.
Modified the way Encapsulated PostScript output is created. Set up for 600 DPI output. 29 July 2008.
(See fsc_surface.pro)
NAME:
FSC_WINDOW
PURPOSE:
This routine implements a "smart" resizeable graphics window.
It is used as a wrapper for built-in IDL graphics procedures
such as SURFACE, CONTOUR, PLOT, SHADE_SURF, etc. In additon,
it can be used to display any user-written graphics procedure
so long as that procedure follows three simple rules: (1) It
does not open it's own graphics windows, (2) It is defined with
no more than three positional arguments (an unlimited number
of keyword arguments are allowed), and (3) It uses no device-
specific commands, such as "WSet", "Device, Decomposed=1", etc.
Keyword arguments permit the window to have its own portion
of a color table and to be able to change the colors loaded in
that portion of the color table. Colors are updated
automatically on both 8-bit and 24-bit color displays. In
addition, the window colors will "protect" themselves. I mean
by this that the window will re-load its own colors into the
color table when the window gains keyboard focus. This
prevents other applications from changing the colors used to
display data in this window. (This is an issue mainly in
IDL 5 applications where widget applications can run
concurrently with commands from the IDL command line.)
Keyword arguments also permit the window to create output
files of its contents. These files can be color and
gray-scale PostScript, and color BMP, GIF, JPEG, PICT, PNG,
TIFF, or JPEG files. Output can also be sent directly to
the default printer.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Widgets, Graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
FSC_WINDOW, command, P1, P2, P3
REQUIRED INPUTS:
COMMAND: The graphics procedure command to be executed. This parameter
must be a STRING and the the command must be a procedure. Examples
are 'SURFACE', 'CONTOUR', 'PLOT', etc.
OPTIONAL INPUTS:
P1: The first positional parameter appropriate for the graphics
command.
P2: The second positional parameter appropriate for the graphics
command.
P3: The third positional parameter appropriate for the graphics
command.
INPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
WBACKGROUND: The background color index for the window. Setting this color
along with the WERASEIT keyword causes the window to be erased with
this color. Set to !P.Background by default.
WERASEIT: Setting this keyword "erases" the contents of the current
graphics window before re-executing the graphics command. For example,
this keyword might need to be set if the graphics "command" is TVSCL.
The default is to NOT erase the display before reissuing the graphics
command.
_EXTRA: This keyword forms an anonymous structure of any unrecognized
keywords passed to the program. The keywords must be appropriate
for the graphics command being executed.
GROUP_LEADER: The group leader for this program. When the group leader
is destroyed, this program will be destroyed.
METHOD: Set this keyword to indicate that the method of an object
should be called, instead of a graphics procedure command. If this
keyword is set, the COMMAND parameter should be the name of an object
procedure method, and the P1 parameter MUST be an object reference.
TVORDER: This keyword corresponds the the !Order system variable. It
is not used in this program, but is carried along for the call to
TVREAD when windows are saved as ouput files. It will affect the
transfer of window contents into the output data file. It should be
used if the output file contents appear upside down.
WTITLE: This is the window title. It is the string "COMMAND Window (1)"
by default, where COMMAND is the input parameter. And the number
(1 in this case) is the window index number of the draw widget.
WXPOS: This is the initial X offset of the window. Default is to
position the window in the approximate middle of the display.
WYPOS: This is the initial Y offset of the window. Default is to
position the window in the approximate middle of the display.
WPOSTSCRIPT: Set this keyword to 1 to include a PostScript File button under
the Save As button. This keyword is set automatically on 24-bit display
devices. To turn the button OFF on 24-bit devices, set the keyword value to 0.
There is no guaranteed way to create perfect PostScript output when the program
is run on 8-bit displays. This will depend entirely on how the "graphics command"
is written. Hence the button is turned off automatically on 8-bit devices.
WPRINT: Set this keyword to 1 to include a Print button under the File button.
This keyword is set automatically on 24-bit display devices. To turn the
button OFF on 24-bit devices, set the keyword value to 0. There is no
guaranteed way to print output correctly when the program is run on
8-bit displays. This will depend entirely on how the "graphics command"
is written. Hence the button is turned off automatically on 8-bit devices.
WXSIZE: This is the initial X size of the window. Default is 400
pixels.
WYSIZE: This is the initial Y size of the window. Default is 400
pixels.
WCOLORS: Using this keyword adds a "Colors..." button to the
"File" menu. Set this keyword to the number of colors available
in the window and the starting index of the first color. For example,
to allow the window access to 100 colors, starting at color index 50
(i.e., color indices 50 to 149), use WColors=[100, 50]. If you use the
keyword syntax "/WColors", all the colors available will be used, not just
one color. If the keyword is set to a scalar value greater than 1, the
starting color index is set to 0. The default value for this keyword
is [(!D.Table_Size, 0].
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
TLB: The top-level base widget identifier. This can be used for a number
of purposes. For example, it could be used to destroy the window programmatically:
FSC_Window, 'Surface', dist(40), TLB=tlb
Widget_Control, tlb, /DESTROY
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
This program requires additional programs from the Fanning
Software Consulting library:
CENTERTLB.PRO
ERROR_MESSAGE.PRO
FSC_PSCONFIG__DEFINE.PRO
FSC_DROPLIST.PRO
FSC_FIELD.PRO
FSC_FILESELECT.PRO
FSC_INPUTFIELD.PRO
FSC_PLOTWINDOW.PRO
PSCONFIG.PRO
PSWINDOW.PRO
TVREAD.PRO
XCOLORS.PRO
If the "command" program requires keywords that are also keywords
to FSC_WINDOW, then you must use the keyword twice on the command line.
EXAMPLE:
If the program is called with no parameters whatsoever, it will load
example data.
IDL> FSC_WINDOW
To use the program with an IDL PLOT command, for example:
IDL> FSC_WINDOW, 'PLOT', Findgen(11), Charsize=1.5, Title='Example Plot'
To build your own graphics display command, you can do something like this.
Here is a command program that takes an image, a column number, and a row number,
and plots a column and row profile next to one another:
PRO COL_ROW_PLOT, image, column, row, _Extra=extra
; Check parameters.
IF N_Elements(image) EQ 0 THEN image = DIST(200)
IF N_ELements(column) EQ 0 THEN column = 100
IF N_Elements(row) EQ 0 THEN row = 100
; Set up plots.;
!P.Multi = [0, 2, 1]
Plot, image[column, *], Title='Row Profile', YRange=[Min(image), Max(image)], $
XStyle=1, XTitle='At Column No: ' + StrTrim(column,2), _Extra=extra
Plot, image[*, row], Title='Column Profile', YRange=[Min(image), Max(image)], $
XStyle=1, XTitle='At Row No: ' + StrTrim(row,2), _Extra=extra
!P.Multi = 0
END
This command program is used with FSC_WINDOW, like this:
IDL> Demo_GetData, image, Filename='ctscan.dat'
IDL> FSC_WINDOW, 'COL_ROW_PLOT', image, 30, 185, YTitle='Image Value'
TIPS FOR WRITING GRAPHICS DISPLAY PROGRAMS TO USE WITH FSC_WINDOW:
It is *exceedingly* difficult to write a graphics display routine that uses
color and get it to display properly on your display, in a PostScript file, and
when printed. This is because: (1) your display is a 24-bit device and the PostScript
and PRINTER devices are both 8-bit devices, and (2) the printer is different from your
display and PostScript device in not being able to load colors on the fly. (A single
color table can only be loaded when you SET_PLOT to a PRINTER, and then the colors
cannot be changed.)
Since FSC_Window knows *nothing* about your graphics display routine, the chances of
it doing all three of these things correctly are just about zero, unless you follow
the recommendations below. (In which case, your changes improve to about 50/50.)
RECOMMENDATIONS
1. Use FSC_COLOR to specify your colors. If you don't do this, please don't call
me for help. This is the FIRST thing I will recommend you try. :-) FSC_COLOR *exists* to
solve these particular problems! And _get the latest version_! Things may have changed
since you last downloaded it.
2. Consider using a white background color for your graphics display. This is what
you are going to get with PostScript whether you like it or not. It will make things
a LOT simpler for you to do it this way. Otherwise, it is up to you to write your
graphics display program in such a way that if you are in the PostScript device, you
will fill the page with the background color *before* you draw your graphics. Something
like this:
IF !D.Name EQ 'PS' THEN Polyfill, [0,0,1,1, 0], [0,1,1,0,0], /Normal, $
Color=FSC_Color(backgroundColor)
Plot, data, Color=FSC_Color(plotColor), Background=FSC_Color(backgroundColor)
3. If you plan to print the contents of your FSC_WINDOW, you *must* load your
colors *immediately* before you call the FSC_WINDOW program. This will ensure
that the program will load *these* colors before it calls the PRINTER device.
Unless you have specific requirements, I would load the colors like this:
TVLCT, FSC_Color(/AllColors, /Triple, NColors=ncolors), !D.table_Size - ncolors - 2
FSC_Window, 'yourprogram', ...
4. In your graphics display program, use FSC_Color to specify *all* colors and DO *NOT*
use a color index parameter in the call. (The colorIndex parameter is the second
positional parameter to FSC_COLOR.) You code might look something like this:
Plot, mydata, Color=FSC_Color('Dodger Blue'), Background=FSC_Color('White')
Good luck! If you have any problems (and you have followed recommendation 1 already),
then please contact me for help.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David Fanning, Sept 2000. Based on previous XWINDOW program.
Whoops! Left out the line to resize draw widgets on UNIX machines. Fixed. 12 Oct 2000, DWF.
Removed support for GIF files for IDL 5.4. 18 Jan 2001. DWF.
Beefed up documentation. 27 March 2001. DWF.
Added TVORDER keyword. 25 March 2002. DWF.
Added METHOD keyword so that an object method could used as the graphics
display routine name. 6 July 2003 KaRo
Added tips for writing graphics display programs. 26 Aug 2004. DWF.
(See fsc_window.pro)
NAME:
GAUSSSCL
PURPOSE:
This is a utility routine to perform a gaussian gray-level pixel
transformation stretch on a image.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
scaledImage = GAUSSSCL(image)
ARGUMENTS:
image: The image to be scaled. Written for 2D images, but arrays
of any size are treated alike.
KEYWORDS:
SIGMA: The sigma value or width of the Gaussian
function. Set to 1 by default.
MAX: Any value in the input image greater than this value is
set to this value before scaling.
MIN: Any value in the input image less than this value is
set to this value before scaling.
NEGATIVE: If set, the "negative" of the result is returned.
OMAX: The output image is scaled between OMIN and OMAX. The
default value is 255.
OMIN: The output image is scaled between OMIN and OMAX. The
default value is 0.
RETURN VALUE:
scaledImage: The output, scaled into the range OMIN to OMAX. A byte array.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
EXAMPLES:
LoadCT, 0 ; Gray-scale colors.
image = LoadData(11) ; Load image.
TV, GaussScl(image)
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires SCALE_VECTOR from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/scale_vector.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 5 September 2007.
(See gaussscl.pro)
NAME:
GETIMAGE
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to allow the user to open either
unformmated or XDR binary image files of up to eight dimensions.
CATEGORY:
Widgets, File I/O.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
image = GETIMAGE(filename)
OPTIONAL INPUTS:
filename: The name of the file to open for reading.
OPTIONAL KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
CANCEL: An output variable that can be set to a named variable.
The value of the return variable will be 1 if the user clicked
the "Cancel" button or if there was a problem reading the file.
DATATYPE: The "type" of data you wish to read out of the file.
The data type corresponds to the Size(image, /TYPE) value. Here
are the types supported:
BYTE 1 (default)
INTEGER 2
LONG INTEGER 3
FLOAT 4
DOUBLE 5
UNSIGNED INTEGER 12
UNSIGNED LONG INTEGER 13
64-bit LONG 14
64-bit UNSIGNED LONG 15
DIMENSIONS: A vector of image dimensions. The default value is [256, 256].
DIRECTORY: The name of the directory the file is located in. By
default the program looks in the "coyote" directory under the
main IDL directory, if one exists. Otherwise, it defaults to the
current directory.
ENDIAN: Set this keyword to an integer that indicates the byte
ordering of the data file. If you don't know what byte order means,
or you don't know anything about the byte order of the data, or
if you are sure the data was created on the same type of machine
you are now running IDL on, then just accept the default of 0 or
"native" ordering. If you are wrong, you will soon know it and you
can set the keyword to another value on your next try. :-)
If you know the machine was created on a big endian machine (such
as a Sun or HP workstation), set this value to 1 (Big Endian). If e
you are sur the image data was create on a little endian machine (such
as a Windows PC or laptop running LINUX), set the value to 2 (Little Endian).
HEADER: The size of any header information in the file in BYTES.
Default is 0.
HEADDATA: An optional output keyword that will contain the header
information read from the file.
PARENT: The group leader for this widget program. The PARENT is
required if GETIMAGE is called from another widget program in order
to make this program a MODAL widget program.
XDR: Set this keyword if the binary file is of XDR type. The default
type is "Unformatted".
XOFFSET: This is the X offset of the program on the display. The
program will be placed approximately in the middle of the display
by default.
YOFFSET: This is the Y offset of the program on the display. The
program will be placed approximately in the middle of the display
by default.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
A "CANCEL" operation is indicated by a 0 return value.
Any error in reading the file results in a 0 return value.
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires the following Coyote Library files:
CENTER_TLB
ERROR_MESSAGE
FSC_FIELD
EXAMPLE:
To load the image "galaxy.dat" in the $IDL/examples/data
directory, type:
image = GETIMAGE('galaxy.dat', DIRECTORY=!DIR + '/examples/data', $
DIMENSIONS=[256,256], Cancel=cancelled, Parent=event.top)
IF NOT cancelled THEN TV, image
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David Fanning, 3 February 96.
Fixed bug that prevented reading INTEGER data. 19 Dec 96.
Modifed program for IDL 5 MODAL operation. 19 Oct 97.
Added CANCEL keyword. 27 Oct 97. DWF.
Fixed CANCLE keyword spelling. Sigh... 29 JUN 98. DWF.
Added COYOTE_FIELD, improved appearance. 19 NOV 99. DWF.
Updated with latest version of COYOTE_FIELD. 18 FEB 2000. DWF.
Added CATCH keyword so the program will break when I want
it to. :-) 18 MAR 2000. DWF.
Added GROUP_LEADER keyword, which is synonymous with PARENT. 31 MAR 2000. DWF.
Updated obsolete PICKFILE call to DIALOG_PICKFILE. 17 JAN 2001. DWF.
Extensive update for IDL Programming Techniques, 3rd Edition. 1 November 2006. DWF.
XSIZE, YSIZE, CATCH, and FRAMES keyword made obsolete.
HEADDATA, ENDIAN, DATATYPE, DIMENSIONS keywords added.
Now dependent on FSC_FIELD, ERROR_MESSAGE, and CENTER_TLB from Coyote Library.
(See getimage.pro)
NAME:
GET_OBJECT_ID
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to be able to obtain a unique
object identifier string for a heap variable (object or pointer).
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Utility.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
objectID = Get_Object_ID(theObject)
INPUTS:
theObject: The object or pointer for which an identifier is requested. If
this is a null object, the function returns the string
"NullObject". If it is a null pointer, "NullPointer".
OUTPUTS:
objectID: The unique object or pointer identifier.
KEYWORDS:
NUMBER: If this keyword is set, the function returns the unique
number identifier associated with a valid pointer or object.
The number is returned as a STRING variable. The string
"-999" is returned if the pointer or object is invalid and
this keyword is set.
EXAMPLE:
Create a trackball object and obtain its unique object ID.
IDL> theObject = Obj_New('TRACKBALL', [100,100], 50)
IDL> objectID = Get_Object_ID(theObject, NUMBER=number)
IDL> Print, objectID
ObjHeapVar71(TRACKBALL)
IDL> Print, number
71
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 4 September 2003.
Added NUMBER keyword. DWF, 22 September 2008.
(See get_object_id.pro)
NAME:
GMASCL
PURPOSE:
This is a utility routine to perform basic gray-level pixel
transformations of images. I think of it as BYTSCL on steroids.
It is similar to IMADJUST in _Digital Image Processing with MATLAB_
by Gonzales, Wood, and Eddins. It performs a log scaling of the
image array.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
scaledImage = GMASCL(image)
ARGUMENTS:
image: The image to be scaled. Written for 2D images, but arrays
of any size are treated alike.
KEYWORDS:
GAMMA: The exponent in a power-law transformation (image^gamma). A gamma
value of 1 results in a linear distribution of values between
OMIN and OMAX. Gamma values less than 1 map darker image values
into a wider range of output values, and Gamma values
greater than 1 maps lighter image values into a wider
range of output values. The gamma value is constrained to
be greater than 1.0e-6.
MAX: Any value in the input image greater than this value is
set to this value before scaling.
MIN: Any value in the input image less than this value is
set to this value before scaling.
NEGATIVE: If set, the "negative" of the result is returned.
OMAX: The output image is scaled between OMIN and OMAX. The
default value is 255.
OMIN: The output image is scaled between OMIN and OMAX. The
default value is 0.
RETURN VALUE:
scaledImage: The output, scaled into the range OMIN to OMAX. A byte array.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
EXAMPLES:
LoadCT, 0 ; Gray-scale colors.
image = LoadData(11) ; Load image.
TV, GmaScl(image, Min=30, Max=100) ; Similar to BytScl.
TV, GmaScl(image, /Negative) ; Produce negative image.
power = Shift(ALog(Abs(FFT(image,-1))), 124, 124) ; Create power spectrum.
TV, GmaScl(power, Gamma=2.5) ; View power specturm with gamma correction.
TV, GmaScl(power, Gamma=2.5, /Negative) ; Reverse power spectrum.
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires SCALE_VECTOR from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/scale_vector.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 17 February 2006.
(See gmascl.pro)
NAME:
GRIDPOSITIONS
PURPOSE:
Sets up a column-row grid in the current graphics window in a fashion
similar to !P.MULTI, except that the grid can be confined to a portion
of the window, leaving room for color bars and other annotations.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
positions = GridPositions(columns, rows)
INPUT_PARAMETERS:
columns: The number of columns in the grid.
rows The number of rows in the grid.
OUTPUT_PARAMETERS:
positions: A 4xN array, where N=(columns*rows), giving the positions of the grid in
normalized coordinates.
KEYWORDS:
INCHES: If calculating the position in the PostScript device, indicates whether
the window size is given in centimeters (the default) or in inches. Set
this keyword to 1 to indicate inches. Ignored for other devices.
LANDSCAPE: If calculating the position in the PostScript device, set this keyword to
indicate a landscript page. Ignored for other devices.
ORDER: If this keyword is set to 0, the positions are calculated in row order. If
set to 1, the positions are calculated in column order.
XEXTENT: A one or two element array, with values from 0 to 1, giving the extent of
the grid in the X direction. For example XEXTENT=[.2, .8] will position
the X portion of the grid from 0.2 to 0.8 (normalized coordinates) in the
window. If a scalar value, the XEXTENT will be assumed to be [0, value].
XMARGIN: A one or two element array, giving the plot margin outside the grid position.
That is to say, the normal grid position will be reduced by this margin. This
corresponds to a plot margin, and as such is expressed in character units. See
the on-line help for graphics keywords for additional information. If a scalar,
the margin is taken from both the left and right sides of the position. In other
words, XMARGIN=[value, value]. By default, [0.05,0.05], which will cause grid
positions to have just a bit of space between them.
XSIZE: The X size of the window the positions are being calculated for. By
default, !D.X_SIZE.
XEXTENT: A one or two element array, with values from 0 to 1, giving the extent of
the grid in the X direction. For example XEXTENT=[.2, .8] will position
the X portion of the grid from 0.2 to 0.8 (normalized coordinates) in the
window. If a scalar value, the XEXTENT will be assumed to be [0, value].
XMARGIN: A one or two element array, giving the plot margin outside the grid position.
That is to say, the normal grid position will be reduced by this margin. This
corresponds to a plot margin, and as such is expressed in character units. See
the on-line help for graphics keywords for additional information. If a scalar,
the margin is taken from both the left and right sides of the position. In other
words, XMARGIN=[value, value]. By default, [0,0], which will cause grid
positions to abut one another.
XSIZE: The X size of the window the positions are being calculated for. By
default, !D.X_SIZE.
YEXTENT: A one or two element array, with values from 0 to 1, giving the extent of
the grid in the X direction. For example YEXTENT=[.2, .8] will position
the Y portion of the grid from 0.2 to 0.8 (normalized coordinates) in the
window. If a scalar value, the YEXTENT will be assumed to be [0, value].
YMARGIN: A one or two element array, giving the plot margin outside the grid position.
That is to say, the normal grid position will be reduced by this margin. This
corresponds to a plot margin, and as such is expressed in character units. See
the on-line help for graphics keywords for additional information. If a scalar,
the margin is taken from both the bottom and top sides of the position. In other
words, YMARGIN=[value, value]. By default, [0,0], which will cause grid
positions to abut one another.
YSIZE: The Y size of the window the positions are being calculated for. By
default, !D.Y_SIZE.
EXAMPLE:
To display four images, scaled differently, in the center of the display, with room
for a color bar:
positions = GridPositions(2, 2, YEXTENT=[0.15,0.85], XEXTENT=[0.2,0.8])
image = LoadData(11)
Erase, COLOR=FSC_Color('rose')
CTLoad, 25, /Brewer
TVImage, image, POSITION=positions[*,0]
TVImage, BytScl(Sobel(image)), POSITION=positions[*,1]
TVImage, BytScl(Hist_Equal(image)), POSITION=positions[*,2]
TVImage, BytScl(Median(image,7)), POSITION=positions[*,3]
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 17 March 2009.
(See gridpositions.pro)
NAME:
HCOLORBAR
FILENAME:
hcolorbar__define.pro
;
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to create a horizontal
colorbar object to be used in conjunction with other
IDL 5 graphics objects.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Object Graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
thisColorBar = Obj_New('HColorBar')
REQUIRED INPUTS:
None.
INIT METHOD KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
COLOR: A three-element array representing the RGB values of a color
for the colorbar axes and annotation. The default value is
white: [255,255,255].
FONTSIZE: A floating value that is the point size of the font
used for the axis and title annotations. Set to 8 point by default.
NAME: The name associated with this object.
NCOLORS: The number of colors associated with the colorbar. The
default is 256.
MAJOR: The number of major tick divisions on the colorbar axes.
The default is 5.
MINOR: The number of minor tick marks on the colorbar axes.
The default is 4.
PALETTE: A palette object for the colorbar. The default palette
is a gray-scale palette object.
POSITION: A four-element array specifying the position of the
colorbar in normalized coordinate space. The default position
is [0.10, 0.90, 0.90, 0.95].
RANGE: The range associated with the colorbar axis. The default
is [0, NCOLORS].
TITLE: A string containing a title for the colorbar axis
annotation. The default is a null string.
OTHER METHODS:
Clamp (Procedure): Given a two-element array in the data range of
the colorbar, the colorbar image is clamped to this range. In
other words, the range of colors is clamped to the specified
range. Values above or below the range in the colorbar are set to
the minimum and maximum range values, respectively.
GetProperty (Procedure): Returns colorbar properties in keyword
parameters as defined for the INIT method. Keywords allowed are:
COLOR
MAJOR
MINOR
NAME
PALETTE
POSITION
RANGE
TEXT
TITLE
TRANSFORM
SetProperty (Procedure): Sets colorbar properties in keyword
parameters as defined for the INIT method. Keywords allowed are:
COLOR
MAJOR
MINOR
NAME
PALETTE
POSITION
RANGE
TEXT
TITLE
TRANSFORM
SIDE EFFECTS:
A HColorBar structure is created. The colorbar INHERITS IDLgrMODEL.
Thus, all IDLgrMODEL methods and keywords can also be used. It is
the model that is selected in a selection event, since the SELECT_TARGET
keyword is set for the model.
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires FSC_NORMALIZE from Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_normalize.pro
EXAMPLE:
To create a colorbar object and add it to a plot view object, type:
thisColorBarObject = Obj_New('HColorBar')
plotView->Add, thisColorBarObject
plotWindow->Draw, plotView
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David Fanning, from VColorBar code, 20 Sept 98. DWF.
Changed a reference to _Ref_Extra to _Extra. 27 Sept 98. DWF.
Fixed bug when adding a text object via the TEXT keyword. 9 May 99. DWF.
Fixed the same bug when getting the text using the TEXT keyword. :-( 16 Aug 2000. DWF.
Fixed a bug with getting the text object via the TEXT keyword. 16 Aug 2000. DWF.
Added the TRANSFORM keyword to GetProperty and SetProperty methods. 16 Aug 2000. DWF.
Added RECOMPUTE_DIMENSIONS=2 to text objects. 16 Aug 2000. DWF.
Added a polygon object around the image object. This allows rotation in 3D space. 16 Aug 2000. DWF.
Removed TEXT keyword (which was never used) and improved documentation. 15 AUG 2001. DWF.
Added ENABLE_FORMATTING keyword to title objects. 22 October 2001. DWF.
Added a CLAMP method. 18 November 2001. DWF.
Forgot to pass extra keywords along to the text widget. As a result, you couldn't
format tick labels, etc. Fixed this. Any keywords appropriate for IDLgrTick objects
are now available. 26 June 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem with POSITION keyword in SetProperty method. 23 May 2003. DWF.
Fixed a problem with setting RANGE keyword in SetProperty method. 6 Sept 2003. DWF.
Removed NORMALIZE from source code. 19 November 2005. DWF.
(See hcolorbar__define.pro)
NAME:
HELP_VAR
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to display HELP on just
the variables at the level in which HELP_VAR is called.
It is similar to the HELP command, except that compiled
functions and procedures are not displayed.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
HELP_VAR
REQUIRED INPUTS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
Memory is allocated for each variable, in turn, then deleted.
Uses undefined and unsupported ROUTINE_NAMES function. May not
work in all versions of IDL, including future versions.
EXAMPLE:
PRO HELP_VAR_TEST
a = 4.0
b = Lindgen(11)
HELP_VAR
END
IDL> help_var
A FLOAT = 4.00000
B LONG = Array[11]
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 8 August 2003.
(See help_var.pro)
NAME:
HistoMatch
PURPOSE:
This is a function for Histogram Matching, in which an image
is manipulated in such a way that it's final histogram approximates
the histogram of an input image or histogram. Histogram matching
allows the user to specify the shape of the histogram of the final
product.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Image Processing
CALLING SEQUENCE:
output_image = HistoMatch(image, histogram_to_match)
INPUTS:
image - The input image to be manipulated. Assumed to be a 2D byte array.
histogram_to_match - Can be either a 1D long vector of 256 elements specifying
the histogram to match, or a 2D byte array from which the histogram to
match is calculated.
OUTPUTS:
output_image - The manipulated image adjusted to the histogram specifications.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
None.
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
None.
DEPENDENCIES:
None.
METHOD:
Based on the Histogram Matching method on pages 94-102 of Digital
Image Processing, 2nd Edition, Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods,
ISBN 0-20-118075-8.
EXAMPLE:
There is an example program at the end of this file. It will require TVIMAGE
from the Coyote Library to run. You can also find an explanation of this program
at http://www.dfanning.com/ip_tips/histomatch.html.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, January 2003.
(See histomatch.pro)
NAME:
HISTOPLOT
PURPOSE:
This program is used to draw a histogram in an IDL direct graphics window.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
HistoPlot, dataToHistogram
ARGUMENTS:
dataToHistogram: The data from which the histogram is created.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
AXISCOLORNAME: The name of the axis color. Default: "Navy". (All color names
derived from FSC_COLOR.)
BACKCOLORNAME: The name of the background color. Default: "White".
BINSIZE: The binsize of the histogram. By default, Scott's Choice of
bin size for histograms is used:
binsize = (3.5 * StdDev(data)) / N_Elements(data)^(0.3333)
If BINSIZE in not defined, and NBINS is defined, the BINSIZE is
calcuated as:
binsize = (Max(dataToHistogram) - Min(dataToHistogram)) / (NBINS -1)
DATACOLORNAME: The name of the data color for drawing the histogram outlines.
Default: "Indian Red".
FILE: The name of a color name file to use with FSC_COLOR.
FILLPOLYGON: Set this keyword to fill the histogram polygons. If this keyword
is set, the following keyword can also be used.
POLYCOLOR: The name, or vector of names, of polygon colors.
If a vector, the names are cycled though, as needed.
Defaults to 'ROSE'.
FREQUENCY: If this keyword is set, the relative frequency is plotted on the Y axis,
rather than the histogram density.
L64: If set, the return value of HISTOGRAM are 64-bit integers, rather than
the default 32-bit integers.
LINE_FILL: If set, the polygons are filled with lines instead of solid color. If
this keyword is set, the following keywords can also be used.
ORIENTATION: The orientation of the lines in line-filled polygons in degrees.
PATTERN: Set to rectangular array of pixel giving fill pattern.
POLYCOLOR: The name, or vector of names, of line colors.
If a vector, the names are cycled though, as needed.
SPACING: The spacing, in centimeters, between parallel lines.
MAXINPUT: The maximum value to use in calculating input histogram. Equivalent to MAX keyword
in HISTOGRAM documentation.
MAX_VALUE: The maximum Y data value to represent on graphics plot. Default: Max(histdataToPlot) * 1.05
MININPUT: The minimum value to use in calculating input histogram. Equivalent to MIN keyword
in HISTOGRAM documentation.
MIN_VALUE: The minimum Y data value to represent on graphics plot. Default: 0.
NAN: If set, ignore NAN values in calculating and plotting histogram.
NBINS: The number of output bins in the histogram. Meaning is slightly different from
meaning in the HISTOGRAM command. Used only to calculate BINSIZE when BINSIZE is
not specified. In this case, binsize = rangeofData/(nbins-1).
OPLOT: Set this keyword if you want to overplot data on already established axes.
The user may also enter any other keywords suitable for the PLOT and POLYFILL commands in IDL.
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
HISTDATA: The output value of the internal HISTOGRAM command.
LOCATIONS: Starting locations of each bin. (See HISTOGRAM documentation.)
OMAX: The maximum output value used to construct the histogram. (See HISTOGRAM documentation.)
OMIN: The minimum output value used to construct the histogram. (See HISTOGRAM documentation.)
REVERSE_INDICES: List of reverse indices. (See HISTOGRAM documentation.)
EXAMPLES:
IDL> Histoplot, Dist(256)
IDL> Histoplot, Fix(RandomU(seed, 200)*20), POLYCOLOR=['charcoal', 'steel blue'], /FILLPOLYGON
IDL> Histoplot, Fix(RandomU(seed, 200)*20), POLYCOLOR=['navy', 'forest green'], /LINE_FILL, ORIENTATION=[45,-45]
REQUIRES:
Requires at least these programs from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/convert_to_type.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/error_message.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_color.pro
NOTE:
While it is pointed out in the HISTOGRAM documentation, it is extremely
important that the BINSIZE be of the same data type as the data you are going to
calculate the histogram of. If it is not VERY strange things can happen. I've
tried to protect you from most of the bad things, but I don't have a high confidence
level that I have done it for every situation. If you see something that "just don't
look right", I would check first to see if your data types match. That might solve
all the problems. :-)
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 14 November 2007.
Modified to work with !P.MULTI. 20 Nov 2007. DWF.
Slight problem with extra space at the right end of the plot resolved. 20 Nov 2007. DWF.
Added FILE and NOLINES keywords. 24 Nov 2007. DWF.
Added additional HISTOGRAM access via keywords. 24 Nov 2007. DWF.
Fixed a small problem with FILLPOLY keyword. 26 Nov 2007. DWF.
Fixed a small problem with the OVERPLOTTED histogram being slightly offset. 12 Jan 2009. DWF
Major reconstructive surgery on the actual drawing part of the program. As far as I can
tell, all functionality is the same, but without drawing problems evidenced before. 14 March 2009. DWF.
A small problem with the way I was specifying ranges caused the bars to be slightly offset. 23 March 2009. DWF.
I fixed a small problem with BINSIZE and HISTOGRAM data type matching (see the Note), and I also
fixed a small problem with the range calculations when byte data is passed in. 1 April 2009. DWF.
I removed a NOLINES keyword, which was no longer being used. 1 April 2009. DWF.
MIN_VALUE and MAX_VALUE keywords now work again, thanks to Josiah Schwab. 22 April 2009. DWF.
Changed default POLYFILL color to "ROSE". 22 April 2009. DWF.
Having problems with binsize selection when data to histogram is an integer type. Fixed. 8 June 2009. DWF.
When input array have a considerable number of NANs, the Histogram command complains with an error
"Array has too many elements." This happens even when the NAN keyword is set for the Histgram
command. So, I now screen for NANs before I process the histogram. 8 June 2009.
(See histoplot.pro)
NAME:
HIST_ND
PURPOSE:
Perform an N-dimensional histogram, also known as the joint
density function of N variables, ala HIST_2D.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
hist=HIST_ND(V,[BINSIZE,MIN=,MAX=,NBINS=,REVERSE_INDICES=])
INPUTS:
V: A NxP array representing P data points in N dimensions.
BINSIZE: The size of the bin to use. Either an N point vector
specifying a separate size for each dimension, or a scalar,
which will be used for all dimensions. If BINSIZE is not
passed, NBINS must be.
OPTIONAL INPUTS:
MIN: The minimum value for the histogram. Either a P point
vector specifying a separate minimum for each dimension, or
a scalar, which will be used for all dimensions. If
omitted, the natural minimum within the dataset will be
used.
MAX: The maximum value for the histogram. Either a P point
vector specifying a separate maximmum for each dimension, or
a scalar, which will be used for all dimensions. If omitted,
the natural maximum within the dataset will be used.
NBINS: Rather than specifying the binsize, you can pass NBINS,
the number of bins in each dimension, which can be a P point
vector, or a scalar. If BINSIZE it also passed, NBINS will
be ignored, otherwise BINSIZE will then be calculated as
binsize=(max-min)/nbins. Note that *unlike* RSI's version
of histogram as of IDL 5.4, this keyword actually works as
advertised, giving you NBINS bins over the range min to max.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
MIN,MAX,NBINS: See above
REVERSE_INDICES: Set to a named variable to receive the
reverse indices, for mapping which points occurred in a
given bin. Note that this is a 1-dimensional reverse index
vector (see HISTOGRAM). E.g., to find the indices of points
which fell in a histogram bin [i,j,k], look up:
ind=[i+nx*(j+ny*k)]
ri[ri[ind]:ri[ind+1]-1]
See also ARRAY_INDICES for converting in the other
direction.
OUTPUTS:
hist: The N-Dimensional histogram, an array of size
N1xN2xN3x...xND where the Ni's are the number of bins
implied by the data, and/or the optional inputs min, max and
binsize.
OPTIONAL OUTPUTS:
The reverse indices.
EXAMPLE:
v=randomu(sd,3,100)
h=hist_nd(v,.25,MIN=0,MAX=1,REVERSE_INDICES=ri)
SEE ALSO:
HISTOGRAM, HIST_2D
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Mon Mar 5 09:45:53 2007, J.D. Smith
Correctly trim out of range elements from the
histogram, when MIN/MAX are specified. Requires IDL
v6.1 or later.
Tue Aug 19 09:13:43 2003, J.D. Smith
Slight update to BINSIZE logic to provide consistency
with HIST_2D.
Fri Oct 11 10:10:01 2002, J.D. Smith
Updated to use new DIMENSION keyword to MAX/MIN.
Fri Apr 20 12:57:34 2001, JD Smith
Slight update to NBINS logic. More aggressive keyword
checking.
Wed Mar 28 19:41:10 2001, JD Smith
Written, based on HIST_2D, and suggestions of CM.
(See hist_nd.pro)
NAME:
IMAGE_BLEND
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to demonstrate how to
use the alpha channel to blend one image into another.
The specific purpose is to see a color image on top of
a gray-scale image, with the gray-scale image showing
through behind the color image.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Widgets, Object Graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
Image_Blend
REQUIRED INPUTS:
None. The images "worldelv.dat" and "ctscan.dat" from the
examples/data directory are used.
OPTIONAL INPUTS:
backgroundImage:: A 2D image variable that will be used for the background image.
foregroundImage: A 2D image variable that will be used for the foreground image.
OPTIONAL KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
COLORTABLE: The number of a color table to use for the foreground image.
Color table 3 (red temperature) is used as a default.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
None. The program XCOLORS is required from the Coyote library.
EXAMPLE:
Image_Blend, Colortable=5
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David Fanning, 30 March 99.
Fixed bug where I redefined the image parameter. Duh... 1 April 99. DWF.
Moved the program into the 21st century. :-) 21 March 2003. DWF.
Added TIFF, GIF (if version supports it), and PS output. 27 December 2006. DWF.
(See image_blend.pro)
NAME:
IMAGE_DIMENSIONS
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to return the dimensions of the image,
and also to extract relevant image information via output keywords. The
function works only with 2D and 3D (24-bit) images.
CATEGORY:
File I/O.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CALLING SEQUENCE:
dims = Image_Dimensions(image)
RETURN VALUE:
An array containing the size of each dimension of the image. It is equivalent
to calling the SIZE function with the DIMENSIONS keyword set.
INPUTS:
image: The image variable from which information is to be obtained.
OUTPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
ALPHACHANNEL: This keyword is set to 1 if there is an alpha channel in the image. Otherwise,
the keyword is set to 0.
TRUEINDEX: The position of the "true color" index in the return value. Is -1 for 2D images.
XINDEX: The index (position) of the X dimension in the return value.
XSIZE: The X size of the image.
YINDEX: The index (position) of the Y dimension in the return value.
YSIZE: The Y size of the image.
COMMON_BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE_EFFECTS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
Only 8-bit and 24-bit images are allowed. (24-bit images with alpha channels are allowed.)
EXAMPLE:
To load open a window of the appropriate size and display a 24-bit image:
dims = Image_Dimensions(image24, XSize=xsize, YSize=ysize, TrueIndex=trueindex)
Window, XSize=xsize, YSize=ysize
TV, TRUE=trueIndex
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 5 March 2003.
Added support for alpha channel images, include ALPHACHANNEL keyword. 13 May 2009. DWF.
(See image_dimensions.pro)
NAME:
INSIDE
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to indicate whether a specified
2D point is inside (returns a 1) a specified 2D polygon or outside
(returns a 0).
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Utility.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
result = INSIDE(x, y, xpts, ypts)
INPUTS:
x: A scalar or vector of the x coordinates of the 2D point(s) to check.
y: A scalar or vector of the y coordinates of the 2D point(s) to check.
xpts: The x coordinates of the 2D polygon.
ypts: The y coordinates of the 2D polygon.
OUTPUTS:
result: A scalar or vector set to 1 if the point is inside the polygon and to
0 if the point is outside the polygon.
KEYWORDS:
INDEX: An output keyword. If set to a named variable, will return the indices
of the X and Y points that are inside the polygon.
ALGORITHM:
Based on discussions on the IDL newsgroup (comp.lang.idl-pvwave) and
discussed here:
http://www.dfanning.com/tips/point_in_polygon.html
Primarily the work of B�rd Krane and William Connelly.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 4 September 2003.
Vectorized the function in accord with William Connelly's suggestions 24 July 2005. DWF.
(See inside.pro)
NAME:
JD2TIME
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to convert a Julian day number into
a time string of the form "16 Mar 2009".
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Utility.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
result = JD2TIME(jdnumber, jdyear)
INPUTS:
jdnumber: A Julian day number or array of Julian day numbers. If absent,
today's current Julian day number.
jdyear: The year for which the Julian day number applies. If absent, the current year.
OUTPUTS:
result: A scalar or vector of time strings of the form "16 Mar 2009 15:34:26".
KEYWORDS:
None.
DEPENDENCIES:
Requires THEMONTHS from the Coyote Library.
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/themonths.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 25 June 2009.
(See jd2time.pro)
NAME:
JN2TIME
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to convert a Julian number into
a time string of the form "16 Mar 2009 15:34:26."
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Utility.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
result = JN2TIME(jnumber)
INPUTS:
jnumber: A Julian number or array of Julian numbers. If absent,
today's current local time is returned.
OUTPUTS:
result: A scalar or vector of time strings of the form "16 Mar 2009 15:34:26".
KEYWORDS:
SHORT: Set this keyword to return just the day, month, year portion of the string.
DEPENDENCIES:
Requires THEMONTHS from the Coyote Library.
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/themonths.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 25 June 2009.
(See jn2time.pro)
NAME:
LINKEDLIST
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to implement a list that
is linked in both the forward and backward directions. There
is no restriction as to what can be stored in a linked list
node. The linked list is implemented as an object.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
General programming.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
mylist = Obj_New('LINKEDLIST', item)
OPTIONAL INPUTS:
item: The first item added to the list. Items can be any
valid IDL variable type.
COMMON BLOCKS:
Are you kidding?!
RESTRICTIONS:
Be sure to destroy the LINKEDLIST object when you are finished
with it: Obj_Destroy, mylist
Node index numbers start at 0 and go to n-1, where n is the
number of items in the list.
PUBLIC METHODS:
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
PRO LINKEDLIST::ADD, item, index, AFTER=after, BEFORE=before
The ADD method adds a data item to the list.
Parameters:
item: The data item to be added to the list. Required.
index: The location in the list where the data item is
to be added. If neither the AFTER or BEFORE keyword is
set, the item is added AFTER the item at the index location.
If index is missing, the index points to the last item in
the list. Optional.
Keywords:
AFTER: If this keyword is set, the item is added after the
item at the current index.
BEFORE: If this keyword is set, the item is added before the
item at the current index.
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
PRO LINKEDLIST::DELETE, index, ALL=all, DESTROY=destroy
The DELETE method deletes an item from the list.
Parameters:
index: The location in the list where the data item is
to be delete. If index is missing, the index points to
the last item in the list. Optional.
Keywords:
ALL: If this keyword is set, all items in the list are deleted.
DESTROY: If the item at the node is an object or pointer, the
item will be destroyed before the node it deleted.
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
FUNCTION LINKEDLIST::GET_COUNT
The GET_COUNT method returns the number of items in the list.
Return Value: The number of items stored in the linked list.
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
FUNCTION LINKEDLIST::GET_ITEM, index
The GET_ITEM_PTR method returns a pointer to the specified data
item from the list.
Parameters:
index: The location in the list from which the data item is
to be retrieved. If not present, the last item in the list
is retrieved. Optional.
Keywords:
DEREFERENCE: Set this keyword to return the thing the pointer
points to (i.e., the item itself.)
ALL: Set this keyword to return an n-element array containing all the list
elements. This requires that all list elements be of the same type, and
if they are arrays, they have 7 dimensions or fewer.
If index is passed, it is ignored.
Added by HBT 14-Jul-2004.
Return Value: A pointer to the specified data item stored
in the list. IF DEREFERENCE is set, the data item itself
is returned. If ALL is set, then an array containing
all the elements is returned.
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
FUNCTION LINKEDLIST::GET_NODE, index
The GET_NODE method returns a pointer to the specified node
from the list.
Parameters:
index: The location in the list from which the data node is
to be retrieved. If not present, the last node in the list
is retrieved. The node is a structure with three fields:
Previous is a pointer to the previous node in the list.
Next is a pointer to the next node in the list. A null pointer
in the previous field indicates the first node on the list. A
null pointer in the next field indicates the last node on the
list. The item field is a pointer to the item stored in the
node. Optional.
Return Value: A pointer to the specified node structure in
the linked list.
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
PRO LINKEDLIST::HELP, PRINT=print
The HELP method performs a HELP command on each item
in the linked list.
Keywords:
PRINT: If this keyword is set, the PRINT command is used
instead of the HELP command on the items in the list.
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
PRO LINKEDLIST::MOVE_NODE, nodeIndex, location, BEFORE=before
The MOVE_NODE method moves a list node from one location to another.
Parameters:
nodeIndex: The location in the list of the node you are moving.
Required.
location: The location (index) you are moving the node to. If
location is missing, the location points to the node at the
end of the list.
Keywords:
BEFORE: If this keyword is set, the node is added to the
list before the location node. Otherwise, it is added after
the location node.
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
PRO LINKEDLIST::REPLACE_ITEM, Index, NewItem
Use this method to replace any item in the list with any other value.
This allows the caller to change an item without stepping through the
process of deleting an item then adding a new one.
Parameters:
Index: The location of the node you are replacing
NewItem: Any value of any data type.
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
EXAMPLE:
mylist = Obj_New("LINKEDLIST", 5)
mylist->Add, 10
mylist->Add, 7, 1, /Before
mylist->Add, 12
print, mylist->Get_Item(/All, /Deref)
mylist->Replace_Item, 1, 'Bob'
mylist->Help
mylist->Delete
mylist->Help, /Print
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David Fanning, 25 August 98.
25 August 99. Fixed several errors in various methods dealing with
moving nodes from one place to another. DWF.
13 June 2001. DWF. Added DEREFERENCE to the GET_ITEM method to
return the item itself, instead of the pointer to the item.
27 June 2001 Added REPLACE_ITEM method. Ben Tupper.
7 April 2003. Added DESTROY keyword to DELETE method so that objects
and pointers could be cleaned up properly when they are deleted
from the linked list. DWF.
9 April 2003. Fixed a problem that occurs when deleting the last node. DWF.
3 Feb 2004. Make sure loop index vars are long. Jeff Guerber
30 Jun 2004. Added /ALL to GET_ITEM function. Henry Throop, SWRI.
23 Nov 2004. Fixed GET_ITEM, /ALL to accomodate structures and empty
lists. Henry Throop.
(See linkedlist__define.pro)
NAME:
LIST_SELECTOR
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to implement a pop-up dialog widget
for the purpose of selecting "names". Names can be names of variables,
names of files, etc. Any string array can be used.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
selectedNames = List_Selector(theNames)
ARGUMENTS:
theNames: A string array of potential "names" that can be selected.
KEYWORDS:
ALL: Set this keyword if you wish all the names to be selected
initially.
CANCEL: An output keyword set to 1 if the user cancels or quits the
program without hitting the Accept button. Set to 0 if a proper
selection was made and the use hits the Accept button.
COUNT: An output keyword containing the number of elements in the return array.
GROUP_LEADER: The widget identifier of a widget who will be the group leader
for this dialog. Passing a group leader is the *only* way to
assure the dialog will be a MODAL dialog (as opposed to a blocking
dialog). A GROUP_LEADER is required if you will be using this
function in an IDL Virtual Machine application.
LABEL: A string that will be placed on a label above the selections.
If not used, no label is used in the program.
LIST_COUNTER: If this keyword is set, a number is associated and displayed with
each list item, starting with the number 1.
TITLE: A string that is used for the title of the dialog window. If
undefined, then "Selection Widget" is used.
SELECTED_INDICES: An output vector of the selected indices from theNames array.
RETURN VALUE:
selectedNames: Typically, an array of selected names. If there is only one item
in the selection, the variable will be a scalar string.
EXAMPLE:
See the List_Selector_Test procedure below. I use the program to allow the
user to select the names of scientific data sets in an HDF file for further
reading and processing.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 11 January 2009, based on Name_Selector program.
Added "Accept on Double-Click" functionality. 14 January 2009. DWF.
Added LIST_COUNTER keyword. 25 May 2009. DWF.
Well, basically a RE-DO of yesterday's work, although done correctly today. 26 May 2009. DWF.
(See list_selector.pro)
NAME:
LOADDATA
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to read a selection of standard
data sets that are found in the normal IDL distribution in the
subdirectory $IDL_DIR/examples/data. At least 17 data sets are
available in all categories of data. The user selects one of the
possible data sets with the mouse.
CATEGORY:
File I/O.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CALLING SEQUENCE:
If calling from the IDL command line:
data = LoadData()
If calling from within a widget program:
data = LoadData(Cancel=cancelled, Group_Leader=event.top)
If you know which data set you want, you can load it directly:
data = LoadData(7)
OPTIONAL INPUTS:
selection : The number of the data selection. Values start at 1,
and go up to the number of data sets available (currently 17).
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
CANCEL : An output keyword that is 1 of the use clicked the CANCEL
button and 0 otherwise.
data = Loaddata(Cancel=cancelled)
IF cancelled THEN RETURN
GROUP_LEADER: The group leader of the widget. This keyword
is required if you wish LOADDATA to be a modal widget program.
(Which you *always* do when calling it from a widget program.)
IMAGES: Set this keyword if you only want to select 2D image
data sets. Note that the selection number does *not* change
just because fewer data sets are available in the selection
widget.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
None.
EXAMPLE:
To load the world elevation data set:
image = LoadData(7)
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 5 March 1999.
Added some additonal random data capability. 29 April 99. DWF
Added IMAGES keyword. 31 March 2000. DWF.
Fixed a problem with the CANCEL button. 25 Oct 2002. DWF.
Added new JPEG, DICOM, TIFF, and PGN images. 30 Oct 2002. DWF.
Modified old program units to work with IDL strict arrays. 29 June 2003. DWF
(See loaddata.pro)
NAME:
LOGSCL
PURPOSE:
This is a utility routine to perform a log intensity transformation
on an image. For exponent values greater than 1.0, the upper and
lower values of the image are compressed and centered on the mean.
Larger exponent values provide steeper compression. For exponent values
less than 1.0, the compression is similar to gamma compression. (See
IMGSCL.) See pages 68-70 in _Digital Image Processing with MATLAB_
by Gonzales, Wood, and Eddins. The function is used to improve contrast
in images.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
outputImage = LOGSCL(image)
ARGUMENTS:
image: The image to be scaled. Written for 2D images, but arrays
of any size are treated alike.
KEYWORDS:
EXPONENT: The exponent in a log transformation. By default, 4.0.
MEAN: Values on either side of the mean will be compressed by the log.
The value is a normalized value between 0.0 and 1.0. By default, 0.5.
NEGATIVE: If set, the "negative" of the result is returned.
MAX: Any value in the input image greater than this value is
set to this value before scaling.
MIN: Any value in the input image less than this value is
set to this value before scaling.
OMAX: The output image is scaled between OMIN and OMAX. The
default value is 255.
OMIN: The output image is scaled between OMIN and OMAX. The
default value is 0.
RETURN VALUE:
outputImage: The output, scaled into the range OMIN to OMAX. A byte array.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
EXAMPLES:
LoadCT, 0 ; Gray-scale colors.
image = LoadData(22) ; Load image.
TV, image ; No contrast.
TV, LogScl(image) ; Improved contrast.
TV, LogScl(image, Exponent=10, Mean=0.65) ; Even more contrast.
TV, LogScl(image, /Negative, Exponent=5) ; A negative image.
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires SCALE_VECTOR from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/scale_vector.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 20 February 2006.
(See logscl.pro)
NAME:
MAP_GSHHS_SHORELINE
PURPOSE:
Uses files from the Globally Self-consistent Hierarchical High-resolution Shoreline
(GSHHS) data base to draw shorelines in the manner of MAP_CONTINENTS. In other words,
it is assumed that a map coordinate data space has been established prior to calling
this routine. See the example below. The GSHHS data files can be downloaded from this
location:
http://www.ngdc.noaa.gov/mgg/shorelines/gshhs.html
An article describing how to use this program can be found here.
http://www.dfanning.com/map_tips/gshhs.html
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Mapping Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
Map_GSHHS_Shoreline, filename
ARGUMENTS:
filename: The name of the GSHHS input file.
KEYWORDS:
COLOR: The name of the drawing color. By default, "WHITE".
FILL: Set this keyword to draw filled outlines.
LAND_COLOR: The name of the land color (for FILL). By default, "INDIAN RED".
LEVEL: The polygon LEVEL. All polygons less than or equal to this value
are drawn. 1-land, 2-lakes, 3-island in lake, 4-pond in island.
By default, 2 (land and lake outlines).
MAP_PROJECTION: A map projection structure (from MAP_PROJ_INIT). If using a map projection
structure, a map coordinate system must be set up for the entire display window.
MINAREA: The minimum feature area. By default, 500 km^2.
OUTLINE: Set this keyword to draw shorelines. Set by default if FILL=0.
WATER_COLOR: The name of the water color. By default, "SKY BLUE".
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires the following programs from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/error_message.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_color.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/undefine.pro
EXAMPLE:
Example using MAP_SET to set up the map coordinate space.
datafile = 'gshhs_h.b'
Window, XSize=500, YSize=350
pos = [0.1,0.1, 0.9, 0.8]
Map_Set, -25.0, 135.0, Position=pos, Scale=64e6, /Mercator, /NoBorder
Polyfill, [pos[0], pos[0], pos[2], pos[2], pos[0]], $
[pos[1], pos[3], pos[3], pos[1], pos[1]], $
/Normal, Color=FSC_Color('Almond')
Map_GSHHS_Shoreline, datafile, /Fill, Level=3, /Outline
XYOutS, 0.5, 0.85, 'Australia', Font=0, Color=FSC_Color('Almond'), $
/Normal, Alignment=0.5
Example using MAP_PROJ_INIT to set up the map coordinate space.
datafile = 'gshhs_h.b'
Window, XSize=500, YSize=350
Erase, Color=FSC_Color('IVORY')
; Lambert Azimuthal Projection
map = Map_Proj_Init(111, Limit=[40, -95, 50, -75], $
Center_Lat=45, Center_Lon=-85)
; Create a data coordinate space based on map positions.
Plot, map.uv_box[[0, 2]], map.uv_box[[1, 3]], Position=[0.1, 0.1, 0.90, 0.75], $
/NoData, XStyle=5, YStyle=5, /NoErase
Map_GSHHS_Shoreline, datafile, /Fill, Level=3, Map_Projection=map, $
Water='DODGER BLUE', NoClip=0
Map_Grid, /Label, /Box, Color=FSC_Color('CHARCOAL'), Map_Structure=map
Map_Continents, /USA, Map_Structure=map
XYOutS, 0.5, 0.85, 'Great Lakes Region', Font=0, Color=FSC_Color('CHARCOAL'), $
/Normal, Alignment=0.5
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 5 February 2006.
Based on programs by Liam Gumley at ftp://ftp.ssec.wisc.edu/pub/gumley/IDL/gshhs/.
Bit of a dog's dish at the moment reading GHSSH files. I've contacted the author or the
data files, but haven't heard yet. Choose *one* of the headers below and see which
one works for you on the data you have. Best I can do, sorry. 24 December 2008. DWF.
(See map_gshhs_shoreline.pro)
NAME:
MPI_AXIS__DEFINE
PURPOSE:
This is a compound widget program for interactively adjusting and keeping track
of keywords appropriate for configuing axis properties.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
xAxisObjext = Obj_New("MPI_AXIS", /XAxis)
xAxisID = xAxisObject->GUI(baseWidgetID)
INPUT PARAMETERS:
None.
INPUT KEYWORDS (Sent to the INIT method. The same keywords can be set with the SETPROPERTY method of the object.):
AUTOKEYWORDS - An anonymous struture of keywords that are passed to the AutoRange function.
AUTORANGE - The name of a function that can return axis range information as 2-element array.
CHARSIZE - The character size used for the axis. By default, 1.0.
EXACT - Set to indicate exact axis range scaling. (Can also be set with the STYLE keyword.)
EXTEND - Set to indicate extended axis range. (Can also be set with the STYLE keyword.)
GRIDSTYLE - The style used for drawing grid lines.
HIDE - Set to indicate hidden axis style. (Can also be set with the STYLE keyword.)
LOG - Set to indicate logarithmic axis.
MARGIN - The axis margin. (Currently unimplemented.)
MINOR - The number of minor tick marks between the major tick marks on the axis.
NAME = A user-defined "name" for the object.
NOBOX - Set to inhibit box-style axis. (Can also be set with the STYLE keyword.)
NOZERO - Set to indicate NO_ZERO axis style. (Can also be set with the STYLE keyword.)
RANGE - The axis range as a two-element array, [minrange, maxrange].
STYLE - The axis style. A 32-bit value whose bits select certain properties. See the
on-line documentation for the !X.STYLE system variable for more information. These
style properties can be set in a more natural way with other keywords.
THICK - The thickness of the axis. By default, 1.0.
TICKFORMAT - The format to use with tick marks. May be name of procedure.
TICKINTERVAL - The interval to space tick marks for first-level axis. (Currently not implemented.)
TICKLAYOUT - The type of tick layout desired. (Currently not implemented.)
TICKLEN - The length of the ticks on the axis. By default, 0.0. (Note that changing this
value will cause the Plot TICKLEN value to be ignored for the axis.)
TICKNAME - The string names associated with each tick mark. (Currently not implemented.)
TICKS - The number of major tick intervals.
TICKUNITS - The units to use for tick labeling. (Currently not implemented.)
TICKV - A vector of tick values. (Currently not implemented.)
TITLE - The axis title.
XAXIS - Set to indicate an X axis object. This is the default.
YAXIS - Set to indicate a Y axis object.
ZAXIS - Set to indicate a Z axis.
METHOD PROCEDURES:
GUI - This procedure method displays a graphical user interface that allows the user
to change the axis configuration parameters.
PARAMETERS:
parent - The parent of the compound widget.
KEYWORDS:
EVENT_PRO - The specified event handler procedure.
EVENT_FUNC - The specified event handler function.
ONLY_STYLE - If set, display only style parameters in the GUI.
ONLY_TICK - If set, display only tick parameters in the GUI.
SHORT_FORM - Normally, all the axis properties are displayed in the GUI. Setting
this keyword places the Tick and Style properties behind buttons on the interface.
UVALUE - The user value of the compound widget.
SETPROPERTY - This procedure can be used to set the properties of the axis
configuration object without using the graphical user interface. The
keywords are identical to those used in the INIT method, above.
METHOD FUNCTIONS:
GETKEYWORDS - This function method contains no arguments or keywords. It returns a
structure, with fields equivalent to PLOT keywords for setting axis properties.
The idea is that these keywords can be passed directly to the PLOT command using
the keyword inheritance mechanism via the _EXTRA keyword to the plot command. ished with it.
PROGRAM NOTES:
Required Programs: The following programs are required to reside in your !PATH. They can be
obtained from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/cw_spacer.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/error_message.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_droplist.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_field.pro
EXAMPLE:
A heavily documented program, named MPI_PLOT, is supplied with this program.
This program not only explains how to use the MPI_PLOTCONFIG__DEFINE and the
MPI_AXIS__DEFINE programs, it can be used as a wrapper program for the PLOT command
that you can use with your own data. The program can be downloaded here:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/mpi_plot.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David Fanning, March 2001.
(See mpi_axis__define.pro)
NAME:
MPI_PLOT
PURPOSE:
This program is a simple wrapper for the IDL PLOT command. The
main purpose of the program is to demonstrate one way the
MPI_PLOTCONFIG program can be used to update plot parameters.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
MPI_Plot, x, y
MPI_Plot, xx, yy, /Overplot
INPUT PARAMETERS:
x - The independent data. If y is not present, x is taken to be the dependent data.
y - The dependent data. The vectors x and y must be the same length.
xs - The independent data to overplot. If yy is not present, xx is taken to be the dependent data.
yy - The dependent data to overplot. The vectors xx and yy must be the same length.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
BACKGROUND - The name of a background color. (See below for a list of color names.)
By default on 24-bit systems: 'IVORY'. Uses 'GRAY' on 8-bit systems.
COLOR - The name of the plot color. (See below for a list of color names.)
By default on 24-bit systems: 'SADDLE BROWN'. Uses 'GREEN' on 8-bit systems.
When OVERPLOTing, use the COLOR keyword to specify the color of the overplot.
DATACOLOR - The name of the data color. By default the same as the COLOR keyword.
(See below for a list of color names.) When OVERPLOTing, use the COLOR keyword
to specify the color of the overplot.
OVERPLOT - Set this keyword to overplot data into the MPI_PLOT window.
If multiple windows are on the display, select the one to overplot into
by selecting it with the cursor.
PSYM - The plot symbol value. By default, 18. Possible values are:
0 - Dot
1 - Filled Circle
2 - Filled Upward Triangle
3 - Filled Downward Triangle
4 - Filled Diamond
5 - Filled Square
6 - Open Circle
7 - Open Upward Triangle
8 - Open Downward Triangle
9 - Open Diamond
10 - Open Square
11 - Plus Sign
12 - X
13 - Star
14 - Filed Rightfacing Triangle
15 - Filled Leftfacing Triangle
16 - Open Rightfacing Triangle
17 - Open Leftfacing Triangle
18 - No Symbol (the default).
TITLE - The title of the plot. By default, a null string.
XLOG = Set this keyword to use logarithmic axis styling on the X axis.
XTITLE - The title of the X axis of the plot. By default, a null string.
YLOG = Set this keyword to use logarithmic axis styling on the Y axis.
YTITLE - The title of the Y axis of the plot. By default, a null string.
In addition, any keyword appropriate for the MPI_PLOTCONFIG object program can be used.
Among those keywords, are these most popular ones:
CHARSIZE - The character size of the plot. By default, 1.0.
CHARTHICK - The character thickness of the plot. By default, 1.0.
FONT - The type of plot font: -1=Hershey, 0=Hardware, 1=True-Type. By default, !P.FONT.
LINESTYLE - The plot linestyle. By default, 0. Possible values are:
0 - Solid Line
1 - Dotted
2 - Dashed
3 - Dash Dot
4 - Dash Dot Dot
5 - Long Dash
6 - No Line
POSITION - The position of the plot in the plot window in normalized coordinates. By default, [0.20, 0.15, 0.95, 0.95].
SYMSIZE - The plot symbol size. By default, 1.0.
THICK - The plot line thickness. By default, 1.0.
TICKLEN - The plot tick length. By default, 0.02.
COLOR NAMES:
The following color names can be used for BACKGROUND, COLOR and DATACOLOR keywords:
White, Snow, Ivory, Light Yellow, Cornsilk, Beige, Seashell, Linen, Antique White,
Papaya, Almond, Bisque, Moccasin, Wheat, Burlywood, Tan, Light Gray, Lavender,
Medium Gray, Gray, Slate Gray, Dark Gray , Charcoal, Black, Light Cyan, Powder Blue,
Sky Blue, Steel Blue, Dodger Blue, Royal Blue, Blue, Navy, Honeydew, Pale Green,
Aquamarine, Spring Green, Cyan, Turquoise, Sea Green, Forest Green, Green Yellow,
Chartreuse, Lawn Green, Green, Lime Green, Olive Drab, Olive, Dark Green, Pale Goldenrod,
Khaki, Dark Khaki, Yellow, Gold, Goldenrod, Dark Goldenrod, Saddle Brown, Rose,
Pink, Rosy Brown, Sandy Brown, Peru, Indian Red, Chocolate, Sienna, Dark Salmon,
Salmon, Light Salmon, Orange, Coral, Light Coral, Firebrick, Brown, Hot Pink,
Deep Pink, Magenta, Tomato, Orange Red, Red, Violet Red, Maroon, Thistle, Plum,
Violet, Orchid, Medium Orchid, Dark Orchid, Blue Violet, and Purple.
REQUIRED PROGRAMS:
The following programs are required to reside in your !PATH. They can be
obtained from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/adjustposition.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/cw_drawcolor.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/cw_spacer.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/error_message.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_color.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_droplist.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_field.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_fileselect.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_inputfield.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_psconfig__define.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/mpi_plotconfig__define.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/mpi_axis.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/mpi_axis__define.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/pickcolorname.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/psconfig.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/pswindow.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/tvread.pro
All these programs can be obtained at once by downloading the MPI_PLOT zip file:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/mpi_plot.zip
COMMON BLOCK:
The addition of the OVERPLOT keyword required a COMMON block named MPI_PLOT_COMMMON
to store the program information pointer. This pointer is loaded in the COMMON block
when the keyboard focus changes. Thus, to overplot into an MPI_PLOT window, first
select the window with the cursor.
RESTRICTIONS
Colors will be loaded in the color table.
EXAMPLE:
x = Findgen(11) & y = Findgen(11)
MPI_PLOT, x, y
MPT_PLOT, Reverse(x), y, /Overplot, Linestyle=2
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, March 2001, and offered to the IDL user
community by the Max-Plank Institute of Meteorology in Hamburg, Germany.
Added OVERPLOT keyword and made numerous general improvements. 21 November 2001. DWF
Removed restriction for only one copy of MPI_PLOT on display at once. 25 November 2001. DWF.
Added XLOG and YLOG keywords. 7 May 2002. DWF.
PostScript configuration now opens up with a plot window the same aspect
ratio as the MPI_PLOT window. 21 August 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem in which PSCONFIG was called as a blocking widget rather than as a
modal widget, as required. 11 March 2003. DWF.
Made a change to the GUI method that fixes a problem I have been having
on some Linux machines in widgets not always showing up. 15 July 2003. DWF.
Fixed a problem when ploting vectors with more that 32K elements. 7 March 2006. DWF.
Fixed a problem with initial display on Macs. 20 May 2009. DWF.
(See mpi_plot.pro)
NAME:
MPI_PLOTCONFIG__DEFINE
PURPOSE:
This is a program for interactively adjusting and keeping track
of keywords appropriate for configuring the PLOT command.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
plotConfigObj = Obj_New("MPI_PLOTCONFIG")
INPUT PARAMETERS:
None.
INPUT KEYWORDS (Sent to the INIT method. The same keywords can be set with the SETPROPERTY method of the object.):
BACKGROUND - The name of the background color. By default on 24-bit systems: 'IVORY'. ON 8-bit systems 'GRAY'.
CHARSIZE - The character size of the plot. By default, 1.0.
CHARTHICK - The character thickness of the plot. By default, 1.0.
COLOR - The name of the plot color. (This will be the axis color if DATACOLOR is also used.)
By default on 24-bit systems: 'SADDLE BROWN'. Uses 'GREEN' on 8-bit systems.
DATACOLOR - The name of the data color. (Requires use of USEDATACOLOR to be active.) By default
on 24-bit systems: 'NAVY'. Uses 'YELLOW' on 8-bit systems.
_EXTRA - Extra keywords to be passed to MPI_AXIS objects used internally.
FONT - The type of plot font: -1=Hershey, 0=Hardware, 1=True-Type. By default, !P.FONT.;
LINESTYLE - The plot linestyle. By default, 0. Possible values are:
0 - Solid Line
1 - Dotted
2 - Dashed
3 - Dash Dot
4 - Dash Dot Dot
5 - Long Dash
6 - No Line
NOAXISINFO - Set this keyword to inhibit axis information on the GUI. By default, 0.
POSITION - The position of the plot in the plot window in normalized coordinates. By default, [0.20, 0.15, 0.95, 0.95].
PSYM - The plot symbol value. By default, 18. Possible values are:
0 - Dot
1 - Filled Circle
2 - Filled Upward Triangle
3 - Filled Downward Triangle
4 - Filled Diamond
5 - Filled Square
6 - Open Circle
7 - Open Upward Triangle
8 - Open Downward Triangle
9 - Open Diamond
10 - Open Square
11 - Plus Sign
12 - X
13 - Star
14 - Filed Rightfacing Triangle
15 - Filled Leftfacing Triangle
16 - Open Rightfacing Triangle
17 - Open Leftfacing Triangle
18 - No Symbol (the default).
SYMSIZE - The plot symbol size. By default, 1.0.
SUBTITLE - The plot subtitle. By default, "".
TITLE - The plot title. By default, "".
THICK - The plot line thickness. By default, 1.0.
TICKLEN - The plot tick length. By default, 0.02.
USEDATACOLOR - Set this keyword to return a DATACOLOR field in the keyword structure. By default, 0.
XAXIS - An MPI_AXIS object for the X axis. One is created by default, if not provided.
YAXIS - An MPI_AXIS object for the Y axis. One is created by default, if not provided.
METHOD PROCEDURES:
GUI - This procedure method displays a graphical user interface that allows the user
to change plot configuration parameters. The following keywords can be used:
ALL_EVENTS - Set this keyword to have an event sent any time something in the
GUI changes. The default is to send an event only when the user hits the ACCEPT button.
Note that the NOTIFYID keyword must be used to generate events.
BLOCK - Set this keyword if you want to block the command line. The default is to NOT block the command line.
DEFAULTFONT - The name of a font to use as the default font.
GROUP_LEADER - The group leader for this GUI. If this keyword is used, the program will be
distroyed when the group leader is destroyed.
LABELDEFAULTSIZE - The default screen size for a label. All labels are offsets from this size. 55 by default.
The purpose of this keyword is to allow the user to modify the look of the GUI if different
fonts are used.
LABELFONT - The name of a font to use for program labels.
NOTIFYID - A two-element array containing the widget identifier and top-level base ID of a widget
designated to receive an event from this program. The event structure will be defined and sent
like this:
Widget_Control, notifyid[0], Send_Event={ MPI_PLOTCONFIG_EVENT, $
ID: notifyid[0], $
TOP:notifyid[1], $
HANDLER: 0L, $
OBJECT: self }
Most event handlers will be written so that they will get the plot keywords
from the plot configuration object and draw the plot. A sample event handler might
look like this:
PRO MPI_Plot_Configuration_Events, event
Widget_Control, event.top, Get_UValue=info, /No_Copy
WSet, info.wid
plotkeywords = event.object->GetKeywords()
Plot, info.indep, info.dep, _Extra=plotkeywords
Widget_Control, event.top, Set_UValue=info, /No_Copy
END
XLONGFORM - By default, the X axis information is displayed in "short" form, with only the
most relevant information readily available. Other axis information is accessed via buttons.
Set this keyword to display the X axis information in a "long" form, in which all the axis
information is immediately visible.
YLONGFORM - By default, the Y axis information is displayed in "short" form, with only the
most relevant information readily available. Other axis information is accessed via buttons.
Set this keyword to display the Y axis information in a "long" form, in which all the axis
information is immediately visible.
SETPROPERTY - This procedure can be used to set the properties of the plot
configuration object without using the graphical user interface. The
keywords are identical to those used in the INIT method, above.
METHOD FUNCTIONS:
GETKEYWORDS - This function method contains no arguments or keywords. It returns a
structure, with fields equivalent to PLOT keywords. The idea is that these
keywords can be passed directly to the PLOT command using the keyword inheritance
mechanism via the _EXTRA keyword to the plot command. A possible sequence of commands
might look like this:
IDL> plotConfigObj = Obj_New("MPI_PLOTCONFIG") ; Create the plot configuration object.
IDL> plotConfigObj->GUI, /Block ; Allow the user to configure the plot parameters.
IDL> plotKeywords = plotConfigObj->GetKeywords() ; Get the plot keywords.
IDL> Plot, x, y, _Extra=plotKeywords ; Draw the plot in the way the user specified.
IDL> Obj_Destroy, plotConfigObj ; Destroy the object when finished with it.
PROGRAM NOTES:
Color Names: Color names are those used with FSC_Color and PickColorName. See the
documentation for those programs for instuctions on loading your own colors.
To see the default colors and names, type this:
IDL> color = PickColorName('yellow')
Working with DataColor: Many people like to have the data color in a line plot
different from the axis color. This requires two commands in IDL: a PLOT command
with the NODATA keyword set, to draw in the axis color, followed by the OPLOT command,
with the data drawn in the data color. Unfortunately, IDL only has a single COLOR keyword
to represent both colors. So, you must be a bit resourceful to use this feature.
The proper sequence of commands to use this feature of the plot configuration object
will looks like this. First, initialize the object with the USEDATACOLOR keyword:
plotConfigObj = Obj_New("MPI_PLOTCONFIG", /UseDataColor) ; Use the DataColor option.
When you are ready to draw the plot, the keyword structure will have a new field named
DataColor. Since this keyword is not recognized by the PLOT command, it will be ignored
in the first PLOT command to draw the axes:
plotKeywords = plotConfigObj->GetKeywords() ; Get the plot keywords.
Plot, x, y, _Extra=plotKeywords, /NoData ; Just draw the axes.
Next, change the color field to the datacolor field value, and overplot the
data onto the axes you just drew:
plotKeywords.color = PlotKeywords.datacolor
OPlot, x, y, _Extra=plotKeywords
You can see an example of how this is done in the heavily documented example program
MPI_PLOT, which you can use as a wrapper for the PLOT command with your own data, if you like.
Required Programs: The following programs are required to reside in your !PATH. They can be
obtained from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/adjustposition.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/cw_drawcolor.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/cw_spacer.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/error_message.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_color.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_droplist.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_field.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_plotwindow.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/mpi_axis__define.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/pickcolorname.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/pswindow.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/tvread.pro
EXAMPLE:
A heavily documented program, named MPI_PLOT, is supplied with this program.
This program not only explains how to use the MPI_PLOTCONFIG__DEFINE program,
it can be used as a wrapper program for the PLOT command that you can use with
your own data. The program can be downloaded here:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/mpi_plot.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, March 2001.
Made a change to the GUI method that fixes a problem I have been having
on some Linux machines in widgets not always showing up. 15 July 2003. DWF.
Removed obsolete STR_SEP and replaced with STRSPLIT. 27 Oct 2004. DWF.
Fixed a problem when users tried to set PSYM to a negative value. 24 June 2008. DWF.
(See mpi_plotconfig__define.pro)
NAME:
NAME_SELECTOR
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to implement a pop-up dialog widget
for the purpose of selecting "names". Names can be names of variables,
names of files, etc. Any string array can be used.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
selectedNames = Name_Selector(theNames)
ARGUMENTS:
theNames: A string array of potential "names" that can be selected.
KEYWORDS:
ALL: Set this keyword if you wish all the names to be selected
initially.
CANCEL: An output keyword set to 1 if the user cancels or quits the
program without hitting the Accept button. Set to 0 if a proper
selection was made and the use hits the Accept button.
COUNT: An output keyword containing the number of elements in the return array.
GROUP_LEADER: The widget identifier of a widget who will be the group leader
for this dialog. Passing a group leader is the *only* way to
assure the dialog will be a MODAL dialog (as opposed to a blocking
dialog). A GROUP_LEADER is required if you will be using this
function in an IDL Virtual Machine application.
LABEL: A string that will be placed on a label above the selections.
If not used, no label is used in the program.
NUMCOLS: The number of columns to organize the string array in. The default
is to use one column per approximately 20 strings.
TITLE: A string that is used for the title of the dialog window. If
undefined, then "Selection Widget" is used.
RETURN VALUE:
selectedNames: Typically, an array of selected names. If there is only one item
in the selection, the variable will be a scalar string.
EXAMPLE:
See the Name_Selector_Test procedure below. I use the program to allow the
user to select the names of scientific data sets in an HDF file for further
reading and processing.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 21 December 2008.
Added a COUNT keyword. DWF. 6 January 2009.
(See name_selector.pro)
NAME:
NCDF_BROWSER
PURPOSE:
This program is designed to make it easier to browse and read the
data and metadata in netCDF and HDF files. The user can browse files,
and read the data and metadata into main-level IDL variables. New netCDF
and HDF files can be opened at any time. The user interacts with the
program via a browser window (GUI). This program is a wrapper for the
NCDF_DATA object (ncdf_data__define.pro), which must also be downloaded.
Note that only HDF files with scientific datasets (SD) can be read currently.
There is no support for VDATA objects or other objects sometimes found in HDF
files. Also note that when variables are returned from HDF files, they are returned
in a calibrated form, if calibration information about the variable is present in the
file. Calibration information is presented as an extra variable attribute in the
browser.
calibratedData = calData.cal * (uncalibratedData - calData.offset)
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
File I/O
CALLING SEQUENCE:
IDL> NCDF_Browser, filename
Arguments:
filename: The name of a netCDF and HDF file to open and browse.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
EXTENSION: In general, netCDF and HDF files use *.nc, *.ncf, *.ncdf and *.hdf file extensions to
identify themselves as netCDF and HDF files. Some users have their own file extensions.
You can use this keyword to identify the file extension you wish to use. If
set here, it will be used as the file filter in place of the normal file
extensions in DIALOG_PICKFILE.
obj = ('NCDF_DATA', file, EXTENSION='*.bin')
NO_READ_ON_PARSE: Normally, when a file is opened it is parsed for information.
One piece of information is the minimum and maximum values of the variables.
This requires actually reading the variables. This can slow things down
considerably is the variable is large. Setting this keyword will suppress
the reading of the variables during the parsing of the data file, with the
result that no minimum or maximum values will be reported.
NOTES:
This program is only a (useful) front-end for a more flexible
object program of class NCDF_DATA. In this front end, the NCDF_DATA
object is created and then destroyed when the GUI is destroyed.
The NCDF_DATA object can be used to read netCDF data in a non-interactive
way, if you prefer not to use a GUI to interact with the data file.
REQUIRES:
The following programs are required from the Coyote Library.
http://www.dfanning.com/netcdf_data__define.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/error_message.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/centertlb.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/undefine.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/textbox.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/fsc_base_filename.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/textlineformat.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 03 Feb 2008. Used ideas from many
people, including Chris Torrence, Ken Bowman, Liam Gumely,
Andrew Slater, and Paul van Delst.
Added Extension keyword. DWF. 04 Feb 2008.
Added error handling and protection for NCDF variables that have a dimension of length zero. 22 April 2009. DWF.
Added NO_READ_ON_PARSE keyword. 22 April 2009. DWF.
Now convert NCDF CHAR type variables to strings on output. 22 April 2009. DWF
Made the default value of NO_READ_ON_PARSE set to 1. 25 June 2009. DWF.
(See ncdf_browser.pro)
NAME:
NCDF_DATA::Browse
PURPOSE:
This method is invoked to create a Browser Window the user can
interact with to explored the data and metadata in a netCDF or HDF file.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
IDL> nCDFObject -> Browse
ARGUMENTS:
None.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
XOFFSET: Normally, the Browser Window is centered, however is this
keyword and the YOFFSET keywords are used, the Browser Window
can be located with the upper-left corner at these locations in
device coordinates. The X offset of the Browser Window.
YOFFSET: The Y offset of the Browser Window.
(See ncdf_data__define.pro)
NAME:
NCDF_DATA::OpenFile
PURPOSE:
This method is used to open a new netCDF or HDF file and add it to the object.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
IDL> nCDFObject -> OpenFile, filename
ARGUMENTS:
filename: The name of a netCDF or HDF file to open.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
None.
(See ncdf_data__define.pro)
NAME:
NCDF_DATA::ReadAttribute
PURPOSE:
This method is used to read and return a global attribute from a netCDF or HDF file.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
IDL> value = nCDFObject -> ReadAttribute(theAttribute)
RETURN VALUE:
value: A variable containing the attribute.
ARGUMENTS:
theAttribute: The name of the attribute you wish to read from the file.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
SUCCESS: An output parameter, set to 1 if the file was read successfully,
and to 0 otherwise.
(See ncdf_data__define.pro)
NAME:
NCDF_DATA::ReadDimension
PURPOSE:
This method is used to read and return a dimension of a netCDF file.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
IDL> dimension = nCDFObject -> ReadDimension(dimensionName)
RETURN VALUE:
dimension: The value of the dimension.
ARGUMENTS:
dimensionName: The name of the dimension to read.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
SUCCESS: An output parameter, set to 1 if the file was read successfully,
and to 0 otherwise.
(See ncdf_data__define.pro)
NAME:
NCDF_DATA::ReadFile
PURPOSE:
This method is used to read and return the contents of a netCDF or HDF file.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
IDL> data = nCDFObject -> ReadFile(theFile)
RETURN VALUE:
data: A structure variable containing the filename, a structure of global attributes,
a structure of dimensions, and one struture for each variable in the file.
ARGUMENTS:
theFile: The optional name of a netCDF or HDF file to read. If not supplied, the
name of the file currently stored in the object will be read.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
SUCCESS: An output parameter, set to 1 if the file was read successfully,
and to 0 otherwise.
(See ncdf_data__define.pro)
NAME:
NCDF_DATA::ReadGlobalAttr
PURPOSE:
This method is used to read and return the global attributes of a netCDF or HDF file.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
IDL> struct = nCDFObject -> ReadGlobalAttr()
RETURN VALUE:
struct: A structure variable containing global attributes of the file.
The attribute names are the fields of the structure.
ARGUMENTS:
None. The global attributes of the file loaded into the object will be read and returned.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
SUCCESS: An output parameter, set to 1 if the file was read successfully,
and to 0 otherwise.
(See ncdf_data__define.pro)
NAME:
NCDF_DATA::ReadVariable
PURPOSE:
This method is used to read and return a variable from a netCDF or HDF file.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
IDL> data = nCDFObject -> ReadVariable(theVariable)
RETURN VALUE:
data: The nCDF variable.
ARGUMENTS:
theVariable: The name of the variable you wish to read from the file.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
COUNT: An optional vector containing the counts to be used in reading theVariable.
Count is a 1-based vector with an element for each dimension. The default
matches the size of the variable so that all data is written out.
OFFSET: An optional vector containing the starting position for the read. The default
start position is [0, 0, ...].
START: Equivalent to the OFFSET vector, except for HDF files.
STRIDE: An optional vector containing the strides, or sampling intervals, between
accessed values of the netCDF variable. The default stride vector is that
for a contiguous read, [1, 1, ...]. Note that for HDF files, the default
STRIDE vector is [0, 0, ...].
SUCCESS: An output parameter, set to 1 if the file was read successfully,
and to 0 otherwise.
(See ncdf_data__define.pro)
NAME:
NCDF_DATA::ReadVariableWithAttr
PURPOSE:
This method is used to read and return a variable and its attributes from a netCDF or HDF file.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
IDL> struct = nCDFObject -> ReadVariable(theVariable)
RETURN VALUE:
struct: A structure containing the variable (in the field "data") and its
attributes.
ARGUMENTS:
theVariable: The name of the variable you wish to read from the file.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
SUCCESS: An output parameter, set to 1 if the file was read successfully,
and to 0 otherwise.
(See ncdf_data__define.pro)
NAME:
NCDF_DATA__DEFINE
PURPOSE:
This program is designed to make it easier to browse and read the
data and metadata in netCDF and HDF files. The user can browse files,
and read the data and metadata into main-level IDL variables. New netCDF
and HDF files can be opened at any time. The user interacts with the
program via a browser window (GUI) or directly through the methods of
the object. The program implements an IDL object.
Note that only HDF files with scientific datasets (SD) can be read currently.
There is no support for VDATA objects or other objects sometimes found in HDF
files. Also note that when variables are returned from HDF files, they are returned
in a calibrated form, if calibration information about the variable is present in the
file. Calibration information is presented as an extra variable attribute in the
browser.
calibratedData = calData.cal * (uncalibratedData - calData.offset)
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
File I/O
CALLING SEQUENCE:
IDL> nCDFObject = Obj_New('NCDF_DATA', filename)
ARGUMENTS:
filename: The name of a netCDF or HDF file to open and browse.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
BROWSE: If this keyword is set, the Browse Window is invoked as soon
as the object is initiated.
DESTROY_FROM_BROWSER: As with all objects, this object is persistent until
it is destroyed. However, with this keyword set, the object will
be destroyed when the user closes the Browse Window.
EXTENSION: In general, netCDF and HDF files use *.nc, *.ncf, *.ncdf of *.hdf file extensions to
identify themselves as netCDF or HDF files. Some users have their own file extensions.
You can use this keyword to identify the file extension you wish to use. If
set here, it will be used as the file filter in place of the normal file
extensions in DIALOG_PICKFILE.
obj = ('NCDF_DATA', file, EXTENSION='*.bin')
NO_READ_ON_PARSE: Normally, when a file is opened it is parsed for information.
One piece of information is the minimum and maximum values of the variables.
This requires actually reading the variables. This can slow things down
considerably is the variable is large. Setting this keyword will suppress
the reading of the variables during the parsing of the data file, with the
result that no minimum or maximum values will be reported.
NOTES:
This program is designed to be flexible in how it is used, so it
can be used in both interactive and non-interactive (called directly)
ways. A less flexible way of interacting with the program is via the
NCDF_BROWSER program, which is a front-end to this object.
The netCDF and HDF file formats are thought to be "standards". And to
a large extent, they are. But files are not always created to standards,
and both netCDF and HDF files can be quirky. If you look carefully at the
code you will see places where I work around quirks in the files I typically
use on a daily basis. If you find you can't read a particular file, let me know
about it. I may be able to improve the program in such as way that it can be read.
This program is not meant to be the be-all and end-all of programs. Rather, it is
a tool I use, and improve upon whenever necessary, in my own work with netCDF and HDF
files. It will get better for all of us if you report problems to me directly.
REQUIRES:
The following programs are required from the Coyote Library. And it is always a
good idea to make sure you have the latest version of the Coyote Library code,
as updates are irregular and frequent.
http://www.dfanning.com/netcdf_data__define.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/error_message.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/centertlb.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/undefine.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/textbox.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/fsc_base_filename.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/textlineformat.pro
METHODS:
The following methods can be used directly.
ncdfObject -> Browse ; Use GUI to browse file data and metadata.
ncdfObject -> OpenFile, filename ; Opens a new netCDF or HDF file.
globalAttr = ncdfObject -> ReadGlobalAttr() ; Return a structure containing global attributes.
attribute = ncdfObject -> ReadAttribute(attrname); Return an attribute, identified by name.
dim = ncdfObject -> ReadDimension(dimName) ; Return a dimension, identified by name.
variable = ncdfObject -> ReadVariable(varname) ; Return a variable, identified by name.
varstruct = ncdfObject -> ReadVariableWithAttr(varname) ; Return a variable, identified by
; name, along with its attributes.
allData = ncdfObject -> ReadFile(filename) ; Read all the data in the file, into structures.
EXAMPLE:
IDL> filename = 'example.nc'
IDL> ncdfObj = Obj_New('NCDF_DATA', filename)
IDL> ncdfObj -> Browse
IDL> Obj_Destroy, ncdfObj
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 03 Feb 2008. Used ideas from many
people, including Chris Torrence, Ken Bowman, Liam Gumely,
Andrew Slater, and Paul van Delst.
Added EXTENSION keyword, resizeable TLB, and ability to download
individual global attibutes. DWF. 04 Feb 2008.
Added ReadDimension and ReadVariableWithAttr methods. DWF. 05 Feb 2008.
Ill-formed attribute names giving me fits. Now doing checks with IDL_VALIDNAME
before creating structures. 06 February 2008. DWF.
Same problem. Wide use of IDL_VALIDNAME everywhere it seems wise. 06 Feb 2008. DWF.
Added functionality to read a variable with its attributes from the browser interface,
and fixed a problem with reading CHAR values. 2 March 2008. DWF.
Fixed a problem with changing variable name when reading variable plus attributes. 6 March 2008. DWF.
Fixed a problem with not setting GLOBAL keyword when inquiring about global attribute. 6 March 2008. DWF.
Made sure file was parsed before attempting to read variables and attributes to avoid errors. 7 March 2008. DWF.
Small bug with variable attributes fixed. 18 Dec 2008. DWF.
Added ability to read HDF files containing Scientific Datasets (SD). 21 February 2009. DWF.
Added error handling and protection for NCDF variables that have a dimension of length zero. 22 April 2009. DWF.
Added NO_READ_ON_PARSE keyword. 22 April 2009. DWF.
Now convert NCDF CHAR type variables to strings on output. 22 April 2009. DWF
Fixed a problem with the directory being correct when file name passed in. 11 May 2009. DWF.
Added COUNT, OFFSET, and STRIDE keywords to ReadVariable method. 25 June 2009. DWF.
(See ncdf_data__define.pro)
NAME:
NUMBER_FORMATTER
PURPOSE:
This is a utility routine format a number into a string. It is
used primarily for formatting numbers that will appear in
text widgets in widget programs.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities, Widget Programming
CALLING SEQUENCE:
numberAsString = Number_Formatter(number)
ARGUMENTS:
number: The number to be turned into a string. May be any data type
except complex, double complex, pointer or object. Must be a scalar.
KEYWORDS:
DECIMALS: Set this keyword to the number of decimal places to
be included to the right of the decimal point in floats
and doubles. Set to 2 by default.
RETURN VALUE:
numberAsString: A string representation of the number.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
EXAMPLES:
IDL> Print, Number_Formatter(16.837574837e-14)
1.683757e-13
IDL> Print, Number_Formatter(16.837574837e-14, Decimals=2)
1.68e-13
RESTRICTIONS:
None.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 9 March 2006.
Fixed a small problem when presented with a number that ends in a decimal
after conversion to a string. 3 January 2007. DWF.
Small changes to do all calculations in DOUBLE and LONG64. 22 February 2007. DWF.
Made it possible to pass a vector of numbers to the program. 18 August 2007. DWF.
(See number_formatter.pro)
NAME:
OBJECT_SHADE_SURF
PURPOSE:
This program shows you the correct way to write an
elevation-shaded surface in object graphics. This would
be the equivalent of these direct graphics commands:
Surface, data, Shades=BytScl(data)
Shade_Surf, data, Shades=BytScl(data)
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
2642 Bradbury Court
Fort Collins, CO 80521 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Object Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
OBJECT_SHADE_SURF, data, x, y
INPUTS:
data: The 2D surface data.
x: A vector of X values, corresponding to the X values of data.
y: A vector of Y values, corresponding to the Y values of data.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
STYLE: Set equal to 1 for a wire-frame surface. Set equal to 2 for
a solid surface (the default).
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
EXAMPLE:
OBJECT_SHADE_SURF
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David Fanning, November 1998.
(See object_shade_surf.pro)
NAME:
OWINDOW
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to create an object window.
I use it mostly when I am creating and testing object graphics
programs, but it is also a nice template for larger object
graphics programs. The window is resizeable and it destroys
its objects when it is destroyed.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Widgets, IDL 5 Object Graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
thisWindow = OWindow(thisView)
REQUIRED INPUTS:
None. A default view object is created with a gray background and
a viewplane rectangle defined as [0,0,1,1].
OPTIONAL INPUTS:
thisView: A view or scene object that you wish to be displayed
in the window.
RETURN VALUE:
thisWindow: The window graphics object associated with this window.
OPTIONAL KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
GROUP_LEADER: The group leader for this program. When the group leader
is destroyed, this program will be destroyed.
TITLE: A string used as the title of the graphics window.
XSIZE: The X Size of the graphics window in device coordinates. The
default value is 300.
YSIZE: The Y Size of the graphics window in device coordinates. The
default value is 300.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
None.
EXAMPLE:
To display a view object in this window, type:
IDL> thisWindow = OWindow(thisView)
Later, after you have modified the view object, you can type:
IDL> thisWindow->Draw, modifiedView
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David Fanning, 19 June 97.
Set RETAIN=1 on draw widget. 6 Oct 97. DWF.
Changed discredited IDLgrContainer to IDL_Container. 29 JUN 98. DWF.
(See owindow.pro)
NAME:
PICKCOLOR
PURPOSE:
A modal dialog widget allowing the user to select
the RGB color triple specifying a color. The return
value of the function is the color triple specifying the
color or the "name" of the color if the NAME keyword is set.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING:
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics, Color Specification. See related program FSC_COLOR.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
color = PickColor(colorindex)
RETURN VALUE:
The return value of the function is a 1-by-3 array containing
the values of the color triple that specifies the selected color.
The color can be loaded, for example, in any color index:
color = PickColor(240)
TVLCT, color, 240
The return value is the original color triple if the user
selects the CANCEL button.
IF the NAMES keyword is set, the return value of the function is
the "name" of the selected color. This would be appropriate for
passing to the FSC_COLOR program, for example.
OPTIONAL INPUT POSITIONAL PARAMETERS:
COLORINDEX: The color index of the color to be changed. If not
specified the color index !D.Table_Size - 2 is used.
The Current Color and the Color Sliders are set to the
values of the color at this color index.
OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
BREWER: Set this keyword if you wish to use the Brewer Colors, as defined
in this reference:
http://www.personal.psu.edu/cab38/ColorBrewer/ColorBrewer_intro.html
GROUP_LEADER: The group leader for this widget program. This
keyword is required for MODAL operation. If not supplied
the program is a BLOCKING widget. Be adviced, however, that
the program will NOT work if called from a blocking widget
program, unless a GROUP_LEADER is supplied.
NAMES: Set this keyword to return the "name" of the selected color
rather than its color triple.
STARTINDEX: 88 pre-determined colors are loaded The STARTINDEX
is the index in the color table where these 88 colors will
be loaded. By default, it is !D.Table_Size - 89.
TITLE: The title on the program's top-level base. By default the
title is "Pick a Color".
OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
CANCEL: A keyword that is set to 1 if the CANCEL button is selected
and to 0 otherwise.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
88 pre-determined colors are loaded in the color table.
In addition, the color index at COLORINDEX is modified while
the program is on the display. When the program exits, the
entry color table is restored. Thus, on 8-bit displays there
might be some color effects in graphics windows while PICKCOLOR
is on the display. Changes in the color table are not noticable
on 16-bit and 24-bit displays.
EXAMPLE:
To specify a color for a plot in color decomposition OFF mode:
Device, Decomposed=0
!P.Color = !P.Color < (!D.Table_Size - 1)
color = PickColor(!P.Color, Cancel=cancelled)
IF NOT cancelled THEN BEGIN
TVLCT, color, !P.Color
Plot, data
ENDIF
To specify a color for a plot in color decomposition ON mode:
Device, Decomposed=1
color = PickColor(Cancel=cancelled)
!P.Color = Color24(color)
IF NOT cancelled THEN Plot, data
To obtain the name of the selected color to pass to GetColor:
selectedColor = PickColor(/Name)
axisColor = FSC_Color(selectedColor, !D.Table_Size-4)
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David Fanning, 28 Oct 99.
Added NAME keyword. 18 March 2000, DWF.
Fixed a small bug when choosing a colorindex less than !D.Table_Size-17. 20 April 2000. DWF.
Added actual color names to label when NAMES keyword selected. 12 May 2000. DWF.
Modified to use 88 colors and FSC_COLOR instead of 16 colors and GETCOLOR. 4 Dec 2000. DWF.
Now drawing small box around each color. 13 March 2003. DWF.
Added CURRENTCOLOR keyword. 3 July 2003. DWF.
Added BREWER keyword. 15 May 2008. DWF.
Fixed a couple of problems with outline color. 19 May 2008. DWF.
(See pickcolor.pro)
NAME:
PICKCOLORNAME
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to provide a blocking
or modal widget interface for selecting a color "name".
The program uses colors familiar to the FSC_COLOR program,
and is often used to select a color name for passing to FSC_COLOR.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING:
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics, Color Specification.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
colorName = PickColorName(startColorName)
OPTIONAL INPUT PARAMETERS:
startColorName: A string with the "name" of the color. Colors available are these:
Almond Antique White Aquamarine Beige Bisque Black
Blue Blue Violet Brown Burlywood Cadet Blue Charcoal
Chartreuse Chocolate Coral Cornflower Blue Cornsilk Crimson
Cyan Dark Goldenrod Dark Gray Dark Green Dark Khaki Dark Orchid
Dark Red Dark Salmon Dark Slate Blue Deep Pink Dodger Blue Firebrick
Forest Green Gold Goldenrod Gray Green Green Yellow
Honeydew Hot Pink Indian Red Ivory Khaki Lavender
Lawn Green Light Coral Light Cyan Light Gray Light Salmon Light Sea Green
Light Yellow Lime Green Linen Magenta Maroon Medium Gray
Medium Orchid Moccasin Navy Olive Olive Drab Orange
Orange Red Orchid Pale Goldenrod Pale Green Papaya Peru
Pink Plum Powder Blue Purple Red Rose
Rosy Brown Royal Blue Saddle Brown Salmon Sandy Brown Sea Green
Seashell Sienna Sky Blue Slate Blue Slate Gray Snow
Spring Green Steel Blue Tan Teal Thistle Tomato
Turquoise Violet Violet Red Wheat White Yellow
The color WHITE is used if this parameter is absent.
If the BREWER keyword is set, you can use the Brewer Color names:
WT1 WT2 WT3 WT4 WT5 WT6 WT7 WT8
TAN1 TAN2 TAN3 TAN4 TAN5 TAN6 TAN7 TAN8
BLK1 BLK2 BLK3 BLK4 BLK5 BLK6 BLK7 BLK8
GRN1 GRN2 GRN3 GRN4 GRN5 GRN6 GRN7 GRN8
BLU1 BLU2 BLU3 BLU4 BLU5 BLU6 BLU7 BLU8
ORG1 ORG2 ORG3 ORG4 ORG5 ORG6 ORG7 ORG8
RED1 RED2 RED3 RED4 RED5 RED6 RED7 RED8
PUR1 PUR2 PUR3 PUR4 PUR5 PUR6 PUR7 PUR8
PBG1 PBG2 PBG3 PBG4 PBG5 PBG6 PBG7 PBG8
YGB1 YGB2 YGB3 YGB4 YGB5 YGB6 YGB7 YGB8
RYB1 RYB2 RYB3 RYB4 RYB5 RYB6 RYB7 RYB8
TG1 TG2 TG3 TG4 TG5 TG6 TG7 TG8
As of 3 JULY 2008, the BREWER names are always available. If the BREWER keyword is set, only
the BREWER names are available.
INPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
BOTTOM: The colors used in the program must be loaded somewhere
in the color table. This keyword indicates where the colors
start loading. By default BOTTOM is set equal to !D.Table_Size-NCOLORS-1.
BREWER: Set this keyword if you wish to use the Brewer Colors, as defined
in this reference:
http://www.personal.psu.edu/cab38/ColorBrewer/ColorBrewer_intro.html
COLUMNS: Set this keyword to the number of columns the colors should
be arranged in.
FILENAME: The string name of an ASCII file that can be opened to read in
color values and color names. There should be one color per row
in the file. Please be sure there are no blank lines in the file.
The format of each row should be:
redValue greenValue blueValue colorName
Color values should be between 0 and 255. Any kind of white-space
separation (blank characters, commas, or tabs) are allowed. The color
name should be a string, but it should NOT be in quotes. A typical
entry into the file would look like this:
255 255 0 Yellow
GROUP_LEADER: This identifies a group leader if the program is called
from within a widget program. Note that this keyword MUST be provided
if you want to guarantee modal widget functionality. (If you don't know
what this means, believe me, you WANT to use this keyword, always.)
INDEX: This keyword identifies a color table index where the selected color
is to be loaded when the program exits. The default behavior is to restore
the input color table and NOT load a color.
TITLE: This keyword accepts a string value for the window title. The default
is "Select a Color".
OUTPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
CANCEL: On exit, this keyword value is set to 0 if the user selected
the ACCEPT button. IF the user selected the CANCEL button, or
closed the window in any other way, this keyword value is set to 1.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
Colors are loaded in the current color table. The input color table
is restored when the program exits. This will only be noticable on
8-bit displays. The startColorName is returned if the user cancels
or destroys the widget before a selection is made. Users should
check the CANCEL flag before using the returned color.
EXAMPLE:
To call the program from the IDL comamnd line:
IDL> color = PickColorName("red") & Print, color
To call the program from within a widget program:
color = PickColorName("red", Group_Leader=event.top) & Print, color
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 31 August 2000.
Modified program to read colors from a file and to use more
colors on 24-bit platforms. 16 October 2000. DWF.
Added the COLUMNS keyword. 16 October 2000. DWF.
Fixed a small problem with mapping a modal widget. 2 Jan 2001. DWF
Now drawing small box around each color. 13 March 2003. DWF.
Added eight new colors. Total now of 104 colors. 11 August 2005. DWF.
Modified GUI to display system colors. 13 Dec 2005. DWF.
Added BREWER keyword to allow Brewer Colors. 15 May 2008. DWF.
Added all BREWER names to the default naming scheme. 3 July 2008. DWF.
Set a size for the color name label widget. Otherwise, the widget always
jumps back to the center of the display when I select a color on UNIX
machines. Also had to remove TLB updating with UPDATE keyword to avoid
tickling the same IDL bug. Sigh... 13 March (Friday) 2009.
(See pickcolorname.pro)
NAME:
PrecipMap
PURPOSE:
This is a program that demonstrates how to place an IDL map projection
onto an image that is already in a map projection space. It uses a NOAA
precipitation image that is in a polar stereographic map projection, and
for which the latitudes and longitudes of its four corners are known.
For additional details, see http://www.dfanning.com/map_tips/precipmap.html.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Map Projection
CALLING SEQUENCE:
IDL> PrecipMap, filename
INPUTS:
filename: The name of the precipitation file. For demo, download
ST4.2005010112.24h.bin from ftp://ftp.dfanning.com/pub/dfanning/outgoing/misc.
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires files from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/documents/programs.html
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 28 April 2006 from code and discussion supplied
by James Kuyper in the IDL newsgroup.
(See precipmap.pro)
NAME:
PRINTWINDOW
This program sends the contents of the specified
window to the default printer. The current window
is used if a window index number is not provided.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
IDL> PrintWindow, wid
OPTIONAL POSITIONAL PARAMETERS:
WID The window index number of the window to send to the
printer. !D.Window used by default.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
LANDSCAPE If this keyword is set, the output is in Landscape
mode. Otherwise, Portrait mode is used.
PAGESIZE: Set this keyword to a string indicating the type
of PostScript page size you want. Current values are "LETTER",
"LEGAL", and "A4". Default is "LETTER".
RGB_ERROR: Some printers (particularly attached to LINUX machines) cannot
load a 24-bit image. You get this error message:
%Can't set RGB color on an indexed destination.
If this happens to you, set this keyword and the 24-bit image will
be made into a 2D image with color table vectors. Colors are not
quaranteed to be accurate with this method, but in practice it is
not usually too bad.
IDL> PrintWindow, /RGB_Error
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning based on previous PRINT_IT program. 29 July 2000.
Added RGB_Error keyword. 2 Nov 2004. DWF.
(See printwindow.pro)
NAME:
ProgramRootDir
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to provide a portable way of finding
the root directory of a program distribution. The directory that is returned
is the directory in which the source file using ProgramRootDir resides.
The program is useful for distributing applications that have a large number
of files in specific program directories.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
SYNTAX:
theDirectory = ProgramRootDir()
RETURN_VALUE:
theDirectory: The directory in which the program module running ProgramRootDir resides.
ARGUMENTS:
None.
KEYWORDS:
NOMARK: Normally, the directory that is returned contains a path separator at its
end, so that the directory can easily be concatinated with other file names.
If this keyword is set, the final path separator mark is removed from the
directory name.
ONEUP: Set this keyword if you want to start your search one directory
*above* where your source program resides (i.e., "../Source").
This allows you, for example, to put your source files in a Source
directory that it at the same level as your Data directory, Utility
directory, etc. See the example below.
TWOUP: Set this keyword if you want to start your search two directories
*above* where your source program resides (i.e., "../../Source").
EXAMPLE:
Assume that your application files (and source programs) reside in this root directory:
../app
You have placed a DATA directory immediately under the APP directiory, and a RESOURCES
directory immedately under the DATA directory. Your directory structure looks like this:
../app ; Contains your application and source (*.pro) files.
../app/data ; Contains your application data files.
...app/data/resources ; Contains your application resource files.
The end user can install the APP directory wherever he or she likes. In your
program, you will identify the DATA and RESOURCES directory like this:
; Get icon image in resources directory.
filename = Filepath(Root_Dir=ProgramRootDir(), Subdirectory=['data','resources'], 'myicon.tif')
; Get default image in data directory.
filename = Filepath(Root_Dir=ProgramRootDir(), Subdirectory='data', 'ctscan.tif')
Alternatively, you might set up an application directory structure like this:
../app ; Contains your application files.
../app/source ; Contains your application source (*.pro) files.
../app/data ; Contains your application data files.
...app/data/resources ; Contains your application resource files.
In this case, you would use the ONEUP keyword to find your data and resource files, like this:
; Get icon image in resources directory.
filename = Filepath(Root_Dir=ProgramRootDir(/ONEUP), Subdirectory=['data','resources'], 'myicon.tif')
; Get default image in data directory.
filename = Filepath(Root_Dir=ProgramRootDir(/ONEUP), Subdirectory='data', 'ctscan.tif')
MODIFICATION_HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 23 November 2003. Based on program SOURCEROOT, written by
Jim Pendleton at RSI (http://www.rsinc.com/codebank/search.asp?FID=35).
Added ONEUP keyword. 10 December 2003. DWF.
Added TWOUP keyword. 8 June 2007. DWF.
Added NOMARK keyword. 8 June 2007. DWF.
(See programrootdir.pro)
NAME:
PROGRESSBAR__DEFINE
PURPOSE:
Creates a simple progress bar for indicating the progess of a looping
operation in IDL.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
progressBar = Obj_New("PROGRESSBAR")
ARGUMENTS:
None.
KEYWORDS:
BACKGROUND: The name of the background color of the progress bar. By default, "black".
COLOR: The name of the color for the progress bar. By default: "red".
Possible color names are those defined by FSC_COLOR:
Almond Antique White Aquamarine Beige Bisque Black
Blue Blue Violet Brown Burlywood Charcoal Chartreuse
Chocolate Coral Cornsilk Cyan Dark Goldenrod Dark Gray
Dark Green Dark Khaki Dark Orchid Dark Salmon Deep Pink Dodger Blue
Firebrick Forest Green Gold Goldenrod Gray Green
Green Yellow Honeydew Hot Pink Indian Red Ivory Khaki
Lavender Lawn Green Light Coral Light Cyan Light Gray Light Salmon
Light Yellow Lime Green Linen Magenta Maroon Medium Gray
Medium Orchid Moccasin Navy Olive Olive Drab Orange
Orange Red Orchid Pale Goldenrod Pale Green Papaya Peru
Pink Plum Powder Blue Purple Red Rose
Rosy Brown Royal Blue Saddle Brown Salmon Sandy Brown Sea Green
Seashell Sienna Sky Blue Slate Gray Snow Spring Green
Steel Blue Tan Thistle Tomato Turquoise Violet
Violet Red Wheat White Yellow
FAST_LOOP: Set this keyword if what you are doing in the loop doesn't involve
any color operations and you want the progress bar to update as fast
as possible. With this keyword set, the program will eliminate extra
calls to FSC_COLOR, which can be slow if you are calling it, say,
10,000 times!
GROUP_LEADER: The group leader for the progress bar.
NOCANCEL: Set this keyword to eliminate the CANCEL button from the progres bar.
PERCENT: The initial percent on the progress bar. Used only if the START keyword is
also set.
START: Set this keyword if you wish to call the START method immediately upon initialization.
TEXT: The textual message that goes above the progress bar. By default:
"Operation in progress..."
TITLE: The title of the progress bar window. By default: "Progress Bar".
XSIZE: The X size of the progress bar itself. By default, 150 pixels.
YSIZE: The Y size of the progress bar itself. By default, 10 pixels.
PROCEDURE:
The user is responsible for starting, updating, checking for CANCEL events, and
destroying the progress indicator. The sequence of commands might look
like this:
progressBar = Obj_New("PROGRESSBAR")
progressBar -> Start
FOR j=0,9 DO BEGIN
IF progressBar -> CheckCancel() THEN BEGIN
ok = Dialog_Message('The user cancelled operation.')
RETURN
ENDIF
Wait, 0.5 ; Would probably be doing something ELSE here!
progressBar -> Update, (j+1)*10
ENDFOR
progressBar -> Destroy
See the example program at the end of this file for a working example of code.
METHODS:
CHECKCANCEL: This function method returns a 1 if the user has clicked
the CANCEL button. Otherwise, it returns a 0.
cancelled = progressBar -> CheckCancel()
IF cancelled THEN progressBar->Destroy
DESTROY: Destroys the progress bar widgets as well as the object.
progressBar -> Destroy
GETPROPERTY: Gets certain properties of the object.
progressBar -> GetProperty, Color=currentColor
SETPROPERTY: Allows the user to set certain properties of the object.
progressBar -> SetProperty, Color='green'
START: Puts the progress bar on the display and enables it to receive events.
progressBar -> Start
UPDATE: Updates the progress bar. Requires on argument, a number between 0
and 100 that indicates the percent of progress bar that should be filled
with a color. Can optional specify TEXT that is displayed above the progress
bar.
progressBar -> Update, 50
progressBar -> Update, 50, Text='Operation 50% completed...'
EXAMPLE:
See the example program at the bottom of this file.
RESTRICTIONS:
Note that the progress bar cannot be run as a MODAL widget program and
still capture CANCEL button events. Thus, the user *may* be able to generate events
in the calling program while this progress bar is in operation.
DEPENDENCIES:
This program requires FSC_COLOR from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_color.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 19 September 2002.
Added TEXT keyword to Update method. 12 Nov 2002. DWF.
Added FAST_LOOP keyword. 19 Dec 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem in where I was checking for CANCEL button event. 2 April 2003. DWF.
Removed the XMANAGER call in the START method, since it wasn't needed. 7 October 2003. DWF.
General maintenance updates. Added START keyword to INIT method to allow immediate
starting upon initialization. Added better error handling and checking. 10 October 2003. DWF.
Added ACCEPT button and CheckButton method. Modified Example program to demonstrate new
functionality. 1 December 2003. DWF.
Added XOFFSET and YOFFSET keywords. 4 March 2004. DWF.
Removed obsolete STR_SEP and replaced with STRSPLIT. 27 Oct 2004. DWF.
Added keyword keyword TITLE to Update method. 23 Feb 2005. Benjamin Hornberger
Added BACKGROUND keyword. 22 Dec 2006. DWF.
Added RETAIN=1 keyword to Widget_Draw command. 9 Dec 2007. DWF.
(See progressbar__define.pro)
NAME:
PSCONFIG
PURPOSE:
This program is simply a function wrapper for the FSC_PSCONFIG
object program (fsc_psconfig__define.pro). It was written so
that it could serve as a drop-in replacement for the PS_FORM
program it replaces. It calls the object program's graphical
user interface as a modal widget and returns the DEVICE keywords
collected from the form in a form that is appropriate for
configuring the PostScript device.
It is now possible to call the program without a graphical user
interface, thus getting the default keywords directly. This is
appropriate for many applications. Use the NOGUI keyword when
you call the program. For example, like this:
Set_Plot, 'PS'
Device, _Extra=PSConfig(/NoGUI, Filename='myfilename.eps')
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CALLING SEQUENCE:
psKeywords = PSConfig()
CATEGORY:
Configuring PostScript output.
DOCUMENTATION:
Complete documentation for the FSC_PSCONFIG object, including
keyword and method descriptions, and example programs using the object
can be found on the Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming web page:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/docs/fsc_psconfig.html
INPUT:
psConfigObject -- An optional FSC_PSCONFIG object reference can be
passed as an argument to the function. The object is not destroyed
if passed in as an argument.
psConfigObject = Obj_New("FSC_PSCONFIG")
keywords = PSConfig(psConfigObject)
Having the object means that you have an on-going and current record
of exactly how your PostScript device is configured. Be sure to destroy
the object when you are finished with it.
KEYWORDS:
NOGUI: Setting this keyword returns the default keyword settings directly,
without allowing user interaction.
Any keyword accepted by the FSC_PSCONFIG object can be used with
this program. Here are a few of the most popular keywords.
Bits_per_Pixel - The number of image bits saved for each image pixel: 2, 4, or 8. The default is 8.
Color - Set this keyword to select Color PostScript output. Turned on by default.
Decomposed - Set this keyword to turn on 24-bit color support. Set to zero to select indexed color
support. Default is 0. Applies only to IDL versions 7.1 and higher.
DefaultSetup - Set this keyword to the "name" of a default style. Current styles (you can easily
create and add your own to the source code) are the following:
"System (Portrait)" - The normal "default" system set-up. Also, "System".
"System (Landcape)" - The normal "default" landscape system set-up.
"Centered (Portrait)" - The window centered on the page. Also, "Center" or "Centered".
"Centered (Landscape)" - The window centered on the landscape page. Also, "Landscape".
"Square (Portrait)" - A square plot, centered on the page.
"Square (Landscape)" - A square plot, centered on the landscape page.
"Figure (Small)" - A small encapsulated figure size, centered on page. Also, "Encapsulated" or "Encapsulate".
"Figure (Large)" - A larger encapsulated figure size, centered on page. Also, "Figure".
"Color (Portrait)" - A "centered" plot, with color turned on. Also, "Color".
"Color (Landscape)" - A "centered" landscape plot, with color turned on.
Directory - Set this keyword to the name of the starting directory. The current directory is used by default.
Encapsulate - Set this keyword to select Encapsulated PostScript output. Turned off by default.
European - Set this keyword to indicate "european" mode (i.e., A4 page and centimeter units). Turned off by default.
Filename - Set thie keyword to the name of the PostScript file. The default is "idl.ps".
Inches - Set this keyword to indicate sizes and offsets are in inches as opposed to centimeters. Set by European keyword by default.
Landscape - Set this keyword to select Landscape page output. Portrait page output is the default.
PageType - Set this keyword to the "type" of page. Possible values are:
"Letter" - 8.5 by 11 inches. (Default, unless the European keyword is set.)
"Legal" - 8.5 by 14 inches.
"Ledger" - 11 by 17 inches.
"A4" - 21.0 by 29.7 centimeters. (Default, if the European keyword is set.)
XOffset - Set this keyword to the X Offset. Uses "System (Portrait)" defaults. (Note: offset calculated from lower-left corner of page.)
XSize - Set this keyword to the X size of the PostScript "window". Uses "System (Portrait)" defaults.
YOffset - Set this keyword to the Y Offset. Uses "System (Portrait)" defaults. (Note: offset calculated from lower-left corner of page.)
YSize - Set this keyword to the Y size of the PostScript "window". Uses "System (Portrait)" defaults.
In addition, the following keywords can be used:
CANCEL -- An output keyword that will be set to 1 if the user
chooses the Cancel button on the form. It will be 0 otherwise.
FONTINFO -- Set this keyword is you wish to have font information
appear on the form. The default is to not include font information.
FONTTYPE -- Set this keyword to a named variable that will indicate
the user's preference for font type. Values will be -1 (Hershey fonts),
0 (hardware fonts), and 1 (true-type fonts). This keyword will always
return -1 unless the FONTINFO keyword has also been set.
GROUP_LEADER -- Set this keyword to a widget identifier of the widget
you wish to be a group leader for this program.
EXAMPLE:
To have the user specify PostScript configuration parameters, use
the program like this:
keywords = PSConfig(Cancel=cancelled)
IF cancelled THEN RETURN
thisDevice = !D.Name
Set_Plot, 'PS'
Device, _Extra=keywords
Plot, findgen(11) ; Or whatever graphics commands you use.
Device, /Close_File
Set_Plot, thisDevice
OTHER PROGRAMS NEEDED:
The following programs are required to run this one:
fsc_droplist.pro
fsc_fileselect.pro
fsc_inputfield.pro
fsc_plotwindow
fsc_psconfig__define.pro
MODIFICATIONS:
Written by David W. Fanning, 31 January 2000.
Added NOGUI keyword to allow default keywords to be obtained without
user interaction. 11 Oct 2004. DWF.
Added CMYK option 24 August 2007. Requires LANGUAGE_LEVEL=2 printer. L. Anderson
Updated for IDL 7.1 and 24-bt color PostScript support. 24 May 2009. DWF.
(See psconfig.pro)
NAME:
PSWINDOW
PURPOSE:
This function is used to calculate the size of a PostScript
window that has the same aspect ratio (ratio of height to
width) as the current display graphics window. It creates
the largest possible PostScript output window with the
desired aspect ratio. This assures that graphics output
looks similar, if not identical, to PostScript output.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
pageInfo = PSWINDOW()
INPUTS:
None.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
CM: Normally the structure value that is returned from this
function reports its values in inches. Setting this keyword
causes the return values to be in units of centimeters.
FUDGE: A quick way to set symetrical XFUDGE and YFUDGE factors.
If this keyword is set to a value, XFUDGE and YFUDGE keywords are
set to the same value.
LANDSCAPE: Normally this function assumes a PostScript window
in Portrait mode. Setting this keyword assumes you want
the graphic in Landscape mode.
MARGIN: The margin around the edges of the plot. The value must be
a floating point value between 0.0 and 0.5. It is expressed in
normalized coordinate units. The default margin is 0.05.
PAGESIZE: Set this keyword to a string indicating the type
of PostScript page size you want. Current values are "LETTER",
"LEGAL", and "A4". Default is "LETTER".
PRINTER: Set this keyword if the output will be used to
configure the PRINTER device, rather than the PS device.
(In the PRINTER device, offsets are always calculated from
the lower-left corner of the page and do not rotate in
Landscape mode, as they do with the PS device.) Note that
the PRINTER device is only able to accept these keywords
in IDL 5.1 and higher.
XFUDGE: Printers calculate the offset point from the printable
edge of the paper (sometimes), rather from the corner of the paper.
For example, on my Lexmark printer, both X and Y offsets are
calculated from a point 0.25 inches in from the edge. This keyword
allows you to set a "fudge" factor that will be subtracted from
the XOFFSET that is returned to the user. This allows you to create
output that is centered on the page. The fudge factor should be in
the same units as the returned size and offset values.
YFUDGE: Printers calculate the offset point from the printable
edge of the paper (sometimes), rather from the corner of the paper.
For example, on my Lexmark printer, both X and Y offsets are
calculated from a point 0.25 inches in from the edge. This keyword
allows you to set a "fudge" factor that will be subtracted from
the YOFFSET that is returned to the user. This allows you to create
output that is centered on the page. The fudge factor should be in
the same units as the returned size and offset values.
OUTPUTS:
pageInfo: The output value is a named structure defined like
this:
pageInfo = {PSWINDOW_STRUCT, XSIZE:0.0, YSIZE:0.0, $
XOFSET:0.0, YOFFSET:0.0, INCHES:0, PORTRAIT:0, LANDSCAPE:0}
The units of the four size fields are inches unless the CM
keyword is set.
The output can be used to immediately configure the PostScript
or Printer device, like this:
Set_Plot, 'PS' ; or 'PRINTER'
Device, _Extra=pageInfo
RESTRICTIONS:
The aspect ratio of the current graphics window is calculated
like this:
aspectRatio = FLOAT(!D.Y_VSIZE) / !D.X_VSIZE
EXAMPLE:
To create a PostScript output window with the same aspect
ratio as the curently active display window, type:
pageInfo = PSWINDOW()
SET_PLOT, 'PS'
DEVICE, _Extra=pageInfo
To configure the PRINTER device:
pageInfo = PSWINDOW(/Printer, Fudge=0.25)
SET_PLOT, 'PRINTER'
DEVICE, _Extra=pageInfo
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, November 1996.
Fixed a bug in which the YOFFSET was calculated incorrectly
in Landscape mode. 12 Feb 97.
Took out a line of code that wasn't being used. 14 Mar 97.
Added correct units keyword to return structure. 29 JUN 98. DWF
Fixed a bug in how landscape offsets were calculated. 19 JUL 99. DWF.
Fixed a bug in the way margins were used to conform to my
original conception of the program. 19 JUL 99. DWF.
Added Landscape and Portrait fields to the return structure. 19 JUL 99. DWF.
Added PageSize keyword, changed MARGIN keyword, and completely
rewrote most of the intenal code. 9 FEB 2000. DWF.
Fixed a bug in how I calculated the aspect ratio. 1 MAR 2000. DWF.
Added PRINTER keyword to return proper offset values for the
PRINTER device, where the offset location is not rotated. 1 MAR 2000. DWF.
Added PRINTER fudge factors to take into account that printer offsets are
calculated from the printable area of the paper, rather than the corner
of the paper. 8 AUG 2000. DWF.
Changed the default margin to 0.05 from 0.15. 29 Nov 2004, DWF.
(See pswindow.pro)
NAME:
PS_END
PURPOSE:
The purpose of PS_START and PS_END is to make it easy to set-up
for and close a PostScript file. The programs work in close conjunction
with PSCONFIG, another program from the Coyote Library.
If ImageMagick (http://www.imagemagick.org/script/index.php) is installed
on your computer, you can easily convert PostScript output to JPEG, PNG, and TIFF
image output. (See the keywords to PS_END.)
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics, File Output, PostScript
CALLING SEQUENCE:
PS_START
Various graphics commands here...
PS_END
KEYWORD PARAMETERS FOR PS_END:
All keywords for PS_END require that ImageMagick is installed on your computer
and is configured correctly. Image conversion is done by spawning a "convert"
command to ImageMagick.
ALLOW_TRANSPARENT: To make the background of some image files white, rather than transparent,
you have to set the "-alpha off" string in the ImageMagick call. This
string is automatically added to the ImageMagick call unless this keyword
is set, in which case the string is not added and the image background will
be transparent. (See RESTRICTIONS note below for more information.)
DENSITY: The horizontal and vertical density of the image when the PostScript file
is converted to an image format by ImageMagick. By default, 300. Use this
keyword to set another value.
GIF: Set this keyword to convert the PostScript output file to a GIF image.
JPEG: Set this keyword to convert the PostScript output file to a JPEG image.
PNG: Set this keyword to convert the PostScript output file to a PNG image.
IM_OPTIONS: A string of ImageMagick "convert" options that can be passed to
the ImageMagick convert command. By default, a null string. No
error checking occurs with this string.
RESIZE: If an image is being created from the PostScript file, it is often
resized by some amount. The default value is 25 percent. You can use
this keyword to change the value to some other amount (e.g, RESIZE=100).
The value is passed on to resize argument as a percentage in the
ImageMagick call.
TIFF: Set this keyword to convert the PostScript output file to a TIFF image.
The convert command looks like this. You can modify it in the code if you want it to
do something else for you.
convert inputPostScriptFilename -resize 50% -density 300 -alpha off outputImageFilename
COMMON BLOCKS:
_$FSC_PS_START_ Contains the PS_STRUCT structure for communication between
PS_START and PS_END.
SIDE EFFECTS:
When PS_START is called, the current graphics device is set to "PS" (the PostScript
device). When PS_END is called the current graphics device is returned to the device
in effect when PS_START was called.
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires numerous programs from the Coyote Library. To convert PostScript files
to PNG, JPEG, and TIFF files requires ImageMagick be installed on your
computer and configured correctly. You can download Coyote Library programs here:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/coyoteprograms.zip
ImageMagick can be found here:
http://www.imagemagick.org/script/index.php
NOTE: In this version of PS_END, I have added the "alpha" option to the ImageMagick
command. This is a relatively recent addition to the convert command. (Added in ImageMagick
version 6.3.4). I believe PS_END can discover which version of ImageMagick you are useing
and act accordingly, but if it can't, set this alpha option to your liking.
EXAMPLE:
To create a line plot in a PostScript file named lineplot.ps and
also create a PNG file named lineplot.png for display in a browser,
type these commands.
PS_Start, FILENAME='lineplot.ps'
Plot, Findgen(11), COLOR=FSC_Color('navy'), /NODATA, XTITLE='Time', YTITLE='Signal'
OPlot, Findgen(11), COLOR=FSC_Color('indian red')
OPlot, Findgen(11), COLOR=FSC_Color('olive'), PSYM=2
PS_End, /PNG
NOTES:
You can easily configure any modifications you like for your PostScript output
by setting fields in the plot and axis system variables (!P, !X, !Y, and !Z).
The modifications currently made by default in this program are these:
!P.Thick = 2
!X.Thick = 2
!Y.Thick = 2
!Z.Thick = 2
!P.Font = 1
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 20 May 2008.
Slight modification to allow filenames with spaces in them.
Added NoMatch keyword. 17 March 2009. DWF.
Added a number of keywords to make these commands more configurable. 19 March 2009. DWF.
Only set thickness system variables if starting system variables are set to their
default values (namely, 0). This allows users to set their own system variables
before they call PS_START, rather than after. 23 March 2009. DWF.
Moved PS_END to its own file to allow the IDLExBr_Assistant to work properly. 7 April 2009. DWF.
Reordered ImageMagick commands to put them in the proper sequence to get "alpha" switch to work. 23 April 2009. DWF.
Put the switches *ahead* of the PostScript file name. Now resizing works and default size reduction
returned to 25%. 23 April 2009. DWF.
Still having a devil of a time getting the ImageMagick "convert" command right. Fonts
have become a problem. Now trying a "flatten" option in the command. 12 May 2009. DWF.
(See ps_end.pro)
NAME:
PS_START
PURPOSE:
The purpose of PS_START and PS_END is to make it easy to set-up
for and close a PostScript file. The programs work in close conjunction
with PSCONFIG, another program from the Coyote Library.
If ImageMagick (http://www.imagemagick.org/script/index.php) is installed
on your computer, you can easily convert PostScript output to JPEG, PNG, and TIFF
image output. (See the keywords to PS_END.)
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics, File Output, PostScript
CALLING SEQUENCE:
PS_START
Various graphics commands here...
PS_END
KEYWORD PARAMETERS FOR PS_START:
FONT: Set this to the type of font you want. A -1 selects Hershey
fonts, a 0 selects hardware fonts (Helvetica, normally), and
a 1 selects a True-Type font. Set to 1 by default.
GUI: The default behavior is to use PSCONFIG to configure the
PostScript device silently. If you wish to allow the user
to interatively configure the PostScript device, set this
keyword.
NOMATCH: Normally, PS_Start will try to "match" the aspect ratio of the
PostScript file "window" to the current display window. If this
keyword is set, then this doesn't occur, giving the user the
option of specifying the size and offsets of the PostScript
window directly though appropriate keywords.
QUIET: If set, informational messages are not set.
SCALE_FACTOR: Set this to the PostScript scale factor. By default: 1.
TT_FONT: The name of a true-type font to use of FONT=1. By default, "TIMES".
Any keyword supported by PSCONFIG can be used to configure the PostScript device.
Common keywords would include FILENAME, XSIZE, YSIZE, XOFFSET, YOFFSET, etc. See
the PSCONFIG documentation for details. If size keywords are used, you *must* set
the NOMATCH keyword.
COMMON BLOCKS:
_$FSC_PS_START_ Contains the PS_STRUCT structure for communication between
PS_START and PS_END.
SIDE EFFECTS:
When PS_START is called, the current graphics device is set to "PS" (the PostScript
device). When PS_END is called the current graphics device is returned to the device
in effect when PS_START was called.
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires numerous programs from the Coyote Library. To convert PostScript files
to PNG, JPEG, and TIFF files requires ImageMagick be installed on your
computer and configured correctly. You can download Coyote Library programs here:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/coyoteprograms.zip
ImageMagick can be found here:
http://www.imagemagick.org/script/index.php
NOTE: In this version of PS_START, I have added the "alpha" option to the ImageMagick
command. This is a relatively recent addition to the convert command. (Added in ImageMagick
version 6.3.4). Your version of ImageMagick may not allow it. If so, simply comment out the
alpha command in the code below (on or about line 242), or uncomment it, as the case may be.
EXAMPLE:
To create a line plot in a PostScript file named lineplot.ps and
also create a PNG file named lineplot.png for display in a browser,
type these commands.
PS_Start, FILENAME='lineplot.ps'
Plot, Findgen(11), COLOR=FSC_Color('navy'), /NODATA, XTITLE='Time', YTITLE='Signal'
OPlot, Findgen(11), COLOR=FSC_Color('indian red')
OPlot, Findgen(11), COLOR=FSC_Color('olive'), PSYM=2
PS_End, /PNG
NOTES:
You can easily configure any modifications you like for your PostScript output
by setting fields in the plot and axis system variables (!P, !X, !Y, and !Z).
The modifications currently made by default in this program are these:
!P.Thick = 2
!P.CharThick = 2
!P.Charsize = 1.25 (or 1.5 if in UNIX)
!X.Thick = 2
!Y.Thick = 2
!Z.Thick = 2
!P.Font = 0
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 20 May 2008.
Slight modification to allow filenames with spaces in them.
Added NoMatch keyword. 17 March 2009. DWF.
Added a number of keywords to make these commands more configurable. 19 March 2009. DWF.
Only set thickness system variables if starting system variables are set to their
default values (namely, 0). This allows users to set their own system variables
before they call PS_START, rather than after. 23 March 2009. DWF.
Moved PS_END to its own file to allow the IDLExBr_Assistant to work properly. 7 April 2009. DWF.
(See ps_start.pro)
NAME:
RANGEOF
PURPOSE:
This function returns the range (i.e., the minimum and maximum value)
of its argument.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
range = RangeOf(variable)
INPUTS:
variable: Any numeric IDL variable, except complex.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
None.
OUTPUTS:
range: A two-element vector containing the minimum and maximum value
of the variable.
EXAMPLE:
x = RandomU(3L, 10) * 100
Print, RangeOf(x)
3.78892 98.4703
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 15 February 2009.
(See rangeof.pro)
NAME:
READ_TOMS_AEROSOL
PURPOSE:
This is a demonstration program, used in the TOMS Tutorial
(http://www.dfanning.com/graphics_tips/toms_tutorial.html),
to show how to write a program that looks the same on the
display and in a PostScript file. TOMS satellite data is
overlaid on a map projection.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
Read_TOMS_Aerosol, filename
ARGUMENTS:
filename: The name of the TOMS data file. If not provided, the user
will be prompted for the name of the file.
KEYWORDS:
DATA: Set this keyword to a named variable that on return will
contain a 288 by 180 array of floating point values. Missing
data is indicated by !Values.F_NAN.
HEADER: Set this keyword to a named variable that on return will
contain the first three lines of the TOMS data set.
LIMIT: A four-element input vector that limits the extent of the map
projection. Identical to the LIMIT keyword for MAP_SET.
The form of the keyword is:
LIMIT = [latmin, lonmin, latmax, lonmax]
PS: Set this keyword to 1 if you wish to create PostScript output
instead of sending graphics output to the display.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None
RESTRICTIONS:
TOMS data can be freely obtained from NASA at http://toms.gsfc.nasa.gov/.
Requires numerious files from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/coyoteprograms.zip
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 18 January 2006
(See read_toms_aerosol.pro)
NAME:
REPMAT
PURPOSE:
This program replicates a matrix or array in the style of
the MATLAB RebMat command. The matrix or array is "tiled"
in some integer number of columns and rows.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
tiledMatrix = RepMat(matrix, ncol, nrow)
AUGUMENTS:
matix: The matrix or array to be tiled.
ncol: The number of columns in the tile.
nrow: The number of rows in the tile.
RETURN_VALUE:
tiledMatrix: If (xdim,ydim) is the size of the original 2D matrix, then the
output matrix is sized (ncol*xdim, nrow*ydim).
KEYWORDS:
None.
EXAMPLE:
IDL> matrix = Reform(Indgen(6) + 1, 3, 2)
IDL> Print, matrix, FORMAT='(3I3)'
1 2 3
4 5 6
IDL> Print, RepMat(matrix, 3, 2), FORMAT='(9I3)'
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 8 May 2009.
(See repmat.pro)
NAME:
REVERSE_AXES
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to extend the SIMPLE_SURFACE
program to demonstrate how to create reversible axes in
object graphics.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Widgets, Object Graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
REVERSE_AXES, data, x, y
REQUIRED INPUTS:
None. Fake data will be used if no data is supplied in call.
OPTIONAL INPUTS
data: A 2D array of surface data.
x: A vector of X data values.
y: A vector of Y data values.
OPTIONAL KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
EXACT: Set this keyword to get exact axis scaling.
_EXTRA: This keyword collects otherwise undefined keywords that are
passed to the surface initialization routine.
GROUP_LEADER: The group leader for this program. When the group leader
is destroyed, this program will be destroyed.
LANDSCAPE: Set this keyword if you are printing in landscape mode. The
default is Portrait mode. The Landscape keyword on the PRINTER object
is set, but not all printers will honor this keyword setting. If yours
does not, set Landscape mode in the Printer Setup dialog.
VECTOR: Set this keyword if you want vector printing (as opposed to
the default bitmap printing).
XTITLE: A string used as the X title of the plot.
YTITLE: A string used as the Y title of the plot.
ZTITLE: A string used as the Z title of the plot.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
EXAMPLE:
To use this program with your 2D data, type:
IDL> Reverse_Axes, data
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David Fanning, October 2001.
(See reverse_axes.pro)
NAME:
SCALE_VECTOR
PURPOSE:
This is a utility routine to scale the elements of a vector
(or an array) into a given data range. The processed vector
[MINVALUE > vector < MAXVECTOR] is scaled into the data range
given by MINRANGE and MAXRANGE.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
scaledVector = SCALE_VECTOR(vector, [minRange], [maxRange], [MINVALUE=minvalue], [MAXVALUE=maxvalue])
INPUT POSITIONAL PARAMETERS:
vector: The vector (or array) to be scaled. Required.
minRange: The minimum value of the scaled vector. Set to 0 by default. Optional.
maxRange: The maximum value of the scaled vector. Set to 1 by default. Optional.
Note that it is the processed vector [MINVALUE > vector < MAXVALUE] that is
scaled between minRange and maxRange. See the MINVALUE and MAXVALUE keywords below.
INPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
DOUBLE: Set this keyword to perform scaling in double precision.
Otherwise, scaling is done in floating point precision.
MAXVALUE: MAXVALUE is set equal to (vector < MAXVALUE) prior to scaling.
The default value is MAXVALUE = Max(vector).
MINVALUE: MINVALUE is set equal to (vector > MAXVALUE) prior to scaling.
The default value is MINXVALUE = Min(vector).
NAN: Set this keyword to enable not-a-number checking. NANs
in vector will be ignored.
PRESERVE_TYPE: Set this keyword to preserve the input data type in the output.
RETURN VALUE:
scaledVector: The vector (or array) values scaled into the data range.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
EXAMPLES:
x = [3, 5, 0, 10]
xscaled = SCALE_VECTOR(x, -50, 50)
Print, xscaled
-20.0000 0.000000 -50.0000 50.0000
Suppose your image has a minimum value of -1.7 and a maximum value = 2.5.
You wish to scale this data into the range 0 to 255, but you want to use
a diverging color table. Thus, you want to make sure value 0.0 is scaled to 128.
You proceed like this:
scaledImage = SCALE_VECTOR(image, 0, 255, MINVALUE=-2.5, MAXVALUE=2.5)
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires the following programs from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/convert_to_type.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fpufix.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 12 Dec 1998.
Added MAXVALUE and MINVALUE keywords. 5 Dec 1999. DWF.
Added NAN keyword. 18 Sept 2000. DWF.
Removed check that made minRange less than maxRange to allow ranges to be
reversed on axes, etc. 28 Dec 2003. DWF.
Added PRESERVE_TYPE and DOUBLE keywords. 19 February 2006. DWF.
Added FPUFIX to cut down on floating underflow errors. 11 March 2006. DWF.
(See scale_vector.pro)
NAME:
SCROLLWINDOW
PURPOSE:
This procedure is more or less a drop-in replacement for the WINDOW
command. The main difference is that if the requested window size
is larger then the current display size, the window is created in a
base widget with scroll bars so the user can scroll around
the larger window. Use the WID keyword to pass in the window
index number of the window you want to create (a small change
from the WINDOW syntax). If the program can create a window with
this window index number, it will. Otherwise, this keyword will
return the window index number of the window that was actually
created.
I use ScrollWindow to create windows that I can view both on
my large monitor at work and on my smaller laptop monitor when
I travel.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
ScrollWindow, xsize, ysize
ARGUMENTS:
xsize: The x size of the graphics window. By default, 640.
ysize: The y size of the graphics window. By default, 512.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
FREE: Get a window with a free or unused window index number.
This is *always* done with a scrollable window. The window
index number of the window is returned in the WID keyword.
PIXMAP: Set to create a pixmap window. In this case, no scrollable
window is possible. A normal IDL graphics window is
always created.
TITLE: The title string that is displayed on the window.
WID: The window index number. If supplied as an IDL variable,
this can be both an input and an output keyword. If a
window with this window index number can be created, it
is. Otherwise, this varible upon exit from the program
contains the window index number of the graphics window
that was created.
XPOS: The x offset of the upper-left corner of the window.
XSIZE: The same as the xsize argument. Provided so ScrollWindow
can be a drop-in replacement for the Window command.
YPOS: The y offset of the upper-left corner of the window.
YSIZE: The same as the ysize argument. Provided so ScrollWindow
can be a drop-in replacement for the Window command.
EXAMPLE:
ScrollWindow, XSIZE=800, YSIZE=400 ; Produces normal IDL graphics window.
ScrollWindow, XSIZE=1800, YSIZE=1200 ; Produces a scrollable graphics window.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 25 March 2009
(See scrollwindow.pro)
NAME:
SELECTIMAGE
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to allow the user to select a formatted
image file for reading. The image data is returned as the result of the
function. The program allows the user to see a thumbnail version of the
image, along with information about the image, before selection. The
program uses the file extention to determine what kind of image is to
be read. The following image types are supported:
TYPE FILE EXTENSION
BMP *.bmp
DICOM *.dcm
FITS *.fits, *.fts (requires NASA ASTRO library on IDL Path)
GIF *.gif (IDL 6.2 and higher)
JPEG *.jpg, *.jpeg, *.jpe
JPEG2000 *.jpf, *.jpx, *.jp2, *.j2c, *.j2k
PICT *.pict
PNG *.png
TIFF *.tif, *tiff
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
General programming.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
image = SelectImage()
INPUT PARAMETERS:
None. All input is via keywords.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
BMP -- Set this keyword to select BMP files.
DICOM -- Set this keyword to select DICOM files.
DIRECTORY -- The initial input directory name. The current directory by default.
EXAMPLES -- If this keyword is set, the program changes directory to !DIR/examples/data.
EXCLUDE -- A list of filenames that should excluded from the file selection list.
FILENAME -- The initial filename. If the initial directory has image files of the
correct type, the default is to display the first of these files. Otherwise, blank.
FILTER -- A string, representing the file filter. For example, '*.jpg'.
FITS -- Set the keyword to select FITS files. (Must have NASA Astro Library on path.)
FLIPIMAGE -- Set this keyword if you wish to flip the image from its current orientation. Setting
this keyword reverses the Y dimension of the image.
GIF -- Set this keyword to select GIF files. (IDL versions before 5.4 and after 6.0, only.)
GROUP_LEADER -- Set this keyword to a widget identifier group leader. This keyword MUST be
set when calling this program from another widget program to guarantee modal operation.
J2000 -- Set this keyword to select JPEG2000 files. (May also be set as J2K.) (IDL 6.1 or above.)
J2K -- Set this keyword to select JPEG2000 files. (May also be set as J2000.) (IDL 6.1 or above.)
JPEG -- Set this keyword to select JPEG files.
LISTXSIZE -- Set this keyword to the XSIZE of the list widget. Default is 30 or MAX(StrLen(filenames)), whichever is larger.
OFFSETS -- A two-element array containing the X and Y offsets of the program, from the upper left
corner of the display. On dismissal of the program, if this is a named variable (passed into
the program by reference), then it will contain the last offsets of the program. This is
useful if you want to call SelectImage again and have it positioned in exactly the same
location it was before.
ONLY2D -- Set this keyword if you only want the user to be able to select 2D images. Note
that the user will be able to browse all images, but the Accept button will only
be sensitive for 2D images.
ONLY3D -- Set this keyword if you only want the user to be able to select 3D or true-color images.
Note that the user will be able to browse all images, but the Accept button will only
be sensitive for 3D or true-color images.
PICT -- Set this keyword to select PICT files.
PGM -- Set this keyword to select PGM files.
PPM -- Set this keyword to select PPM files.
PNG -- Set this keyword to select PNG files.
PREVIEWSIZE -- Set this keyword to the maximum size (in pixels) of the preview window. Default is 150.
SILENT -- Set this keyword to turn off Group_Leader educational message. Use only if you
are sure you know what you are doing. :-)
TIFF -- Set this keyword to select TIFF files. (This is the default filter selection.)
TITLE -- Set this keyword to the text to display as the title of the main image selection window.
NOTE: Any extra keywords passed into the program will collected and passed along to the READ_XXX routines
that actually do the image file reading. Using this keyword inheritance mechanism makes it impossible
to trap misspelled or misused keywords. Please take care when using ANY keyword for this routine!
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
CANCEL -- This keyword is set to 1 if the user exits the program in any way except hitting the ACCEPT button.
The ACCEPT button will set this keyword to 0.
FHEADER -- Set this keyword to a named variable that will return the FITS header information for a FITS file.
FILEINFO -- This keyword returns information about the selected file. Obtained from the QUERY_**** functions.
OUTDIRECTORY -- The directory where the selected file is found.
OUTFILENAME -- The short filename of the selected file.
PALETTE -- The current color table palette returned as a 256-by-3 byte array.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
Probably doesn't work correctly on VMS systems :-( If you can help, please
contact me. I don't have a VMS system to test on.
OTHER COYOTE LIBRARY FILES REQUIRED:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/centertlb.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/error_message.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_fileselect.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/image_dimensions.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/number_formatter.pro
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/tvimage.pro
Note: Keyword inheritance to collect undefined keywords that may be passed into the
program for use in READ_XXX routines, make it impossible to trap keyword useage errors.
Please take care when using keywords.
EXAMPLE:
To read JPEG files from the directory:
IDL> image = SelectImage(/JPEG)
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 18 Jan 2001.
Added modification to read both 8-bit and 24-bit BMP files. 27 Jan 2001. DWF.
Fixed a problem with calculating the new size of the draw widget. 5 April 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem with List Widgets not sizing correctly on UNIX machines. 10 Aug 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem with the initial file not being selected correctly when you changed
the file type. 10 Aug 2002. DWF.
Added a FLIPIMAGE keyword 10 Aug 2002. DWF.
When user chooses to Flip Image, I now reverse the Y dimension of the image,
rather than set the !Order system variable. 10 Aug 2002. DWF.
Added OUTDIRECTORY and OUTFILENAME keywords. 18 Aug 2002. DWF.
Fairly extensive changes in the way this program works and selects images.
A new version of FSC_FileSelect is also required. Because of interactions
with the operating system with image filters, the program has probably
become more Windows-centric. The default is now to display all image
files the program is capable of reading. 31 October 2002. DWF.
Added ONLY2D keyword to allow the acceptance of 2D images only. 3 Nov 2002. DWF.
Added ability to center itself on the display. 8 Nov 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem caused by reading old images with short color table vectors. 26 Nov 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem with specifying a fully-qualified filename. 26 Nov 2002. DWF.
Now highlights the selected file in the directory. 26 Nov 2002. DWF.
Improved error handling. 9 Dec 2002. DWF.
Added PALETTE keyword and improved color operation on 8-bit displays. If the image file
contains a color palette, that palette is now loaded when the image is read from the file.
The current color palette can be obtained with the PALETTE keyword. 4 April 2003. DWF.
Added ONLY3D keyword. 19 April 2003. DWF.
Added ability to read PPM and PGM files. 24 November 2003. DWF.
Added TITLE keyword. 1 December 2003. DWF.
Added EXAMPLES keyword. 22 December 2005. DWF.
Added GIF and JPEG2000 file types. Rearranged and cleaned up code. 3 January 2006. DWF.
Added LISTXSIZE keyword. 3 January 2006. DWF.
Added file type checkmark buttons. Program now compatible with IDL 5.6 and higher. 3 January 2006. DWF.
Improved error handling with invalid file types. 5 January 2006. DWF.
Added OFFSETS and EXCLUDE keywords. 3 March 2006 DWF.
Modified the program to check for FITS unsigned integer data. 3 March 2006. DWF.
Added ability to double-click image name in list to Accept. 10 March 2006. DWF.
Added FHEADER keyword to return FITS header information. 3 April 2006. DWF.
Fixed a problem in which the file type was not set if the user cancelled. 10 July 2006. DWF.
Added a "fit" file extension for FITS images. 1 April 2008. DWF.
Added a FILTER keyword. 1 April 2008. DWF.
Updated for reading transparent images. 13 May 2009. DWF.
(See selectimage.pro)
NAME:
SELECT_OBJECTS
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to demonstrate how to select
and move objects in an object graphics window. Once the objects
appear in the window, use your mouse to select the objects and
move them in the window. The window is resizeable.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Object Graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
SELECT_OBJECTS
REQUIRED INPUTS:
None.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
None.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires VCOLORBAR from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/vcolorbar__define.pro.
EXAMPLE:
Select_Objects
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David Fanning, 21 September 98.
Added the ability to shrink and expand the objects. 27 Sept 98. DWF.
(See select_objects.pro)
NAME:
SetDefaultValue
PURPOSE:
This procedure sets default values for positional and keyword arguments to
IDL procedures and functions.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
SetDefaultValue, argument, defaultValue
ARGUMENTS:
argument: The augument variable you are setting the default value of. If this variable
is undefined, the defaultValue will be assigned to it. Otherwise, the argument
variable will not change.
defaultValue: The default value that will be assigned to the argument variable ONLY if the argument
variable is undefined. If this variable is undefined, the argument variable will
be treated as if the BOOLEAN keyword had been set.
KEYWORDS:
BOOLEAN: If this keyword is set, the argument value will always be forced to return with a
value of 0 or 1.
EXAMPLE:
FUNCTION Action, arg1, arg2, MULTIPLY=multiply
SetDefaultValue, arg1, 1
SetDefaultValue, arg2, 2
SetDefaultValue, multiply, 1, /BOOLEAN
IF multiply THEN RETURN, arg1 * arg2 ELSE RETURN, arg1 + arg2
END
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, November 26, 2008, from suggestion by Carsten Lechte on
IDL newsgroup on this date.
Made a change to the way the BOOLEAN keyword works. Now argument is set to BOOLEAN before
return, if required. 3 Dec 2008. DWF.
(See setdefaultvalue.pro)
NAME:
SHAPEINFO
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is allow the user to browse a very narrow
selection of shapefiles. Namely, those containing geographical shapes
in latitude and longitude coordinates. In other words, shapefiles
containing maps. File attributes are listed in the left-hand list
widget. Clicking on a file attribute, will list all the entity
attributes for that file attribute in the right-hand list. Clicking
an entity attribute with list the type of entity, and the X and Y
bounds of that entity (shown as LON and LAT, respectively), in the
statusbar at the bottom of the display.
Knowing the attribute and entity names of a shapefile will give
you insight into how to read and display the information in the file.
For examples, see the Coyote Library programs DrawCounties and DrawStates.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
ShapeInfo, shapefile
ARGUMENTS:
shapefile: The name of the input shapefile. If not provided, the user
will be prompted to select a shapefile.
KEYWORDS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
It is assumed the shapefile contains 2D map information. The X and Y bounds of
each shapefile entity are reported as LON and LAT values, respectively.
Required Coyote Library programs:
CenterTLB
Error_Message
EXAMPLE:
filename = Filepath(SubDir=['examples','data'], 'states.shp')
ShapeInfo, filename
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 21 October 2006.
(See shapeinfo.pro)
NAME:
Sharpen
PURPOSE:
This function sharpens an image using a Laplacian kernel.
The final result is color adjusted to match the histogram
of the input image.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Image Processing
CALLING SEQUENCE:
sharp_image = Sharpen(image)
INPUTS:
image - The input image to be sharpened. Assumed to be a 2D byte array.
OUTPUTS:
sharp_image - The sharpened image.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
KERNEL -- By default the image is convolved with this 3-by-3 Laplacian kernel:
[ [-1, -1, -1], [-1, +8, -1], [-1, -1, -1] ]. You can pass in any square kernel
of odd width. The filtered image is added back to the original image to provide
the sharpening effect.
DISPLAY -- If this keyword is set a window is opened and the details of the sharpening
process are displayed.
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
None.
DEPENDENCIES:
None.
METHOD:
This function is based on the Laplacian kernel sharpening method on pages 128-131
of Digital Image Processing, 2nd Edition, Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods,
ISBN 0-20-118075-8.
EXAMPLE:
There is an example program at the end of this file.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, January 2003.
(See sharpen.pro)
NAME:
SIMPLE_SURFACE
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to demonstrate how to
create a simple surface plot with axes and rotational
capability in object graphics.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Widgets, Object Graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
SIMPLE_SURFACE, data, x, y
REQUIRED INPUTS:
None. Fake data will be used if no data is supplied in call.
OPTIONAL INPUTS
data: A 2D array of surface data.
x: A vector of X data values.
y: A vector of Y data values.
OPTIONAL KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
EXACT: Set this keyword to get exact axis scaling.
_EXTRA: This keyword collects otherwise undefined keywords that are
passed to the surface initialization routine.
GROUP_LEADER: The group leader for this program. When the group leader
is destroyed, this program will be destroyed.
LANDSCAPE: Set this keyword if you are printing in landscape mode. The
default is Portrait mode. The Landscape keyword on the PRINTER object
is set, but not all printers will honor this keyword setting. If yours
does not, set Landscape mode in the Printer Setup dialog.
VECTOR: Set this keyword if you want vector printing (as opposed to
the default bitmap printing).
XTITLE: A string used as the X title of the plot.
YTITLE: A string used as the Y title of the plot.
ZTITLE: A string used as the Z title of the plot.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires FSC_NORMALIZE from the Coyote Library.
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_normalize.pro
EXAMPLE:
To use this program with your 2D data, type:
IDL> Simple_Surface, data
(See simple_surface.pro)
NAME:
SORT_ND
PURPOSE:
Efficiently perform an N-dimensional sort along any dimension
of an array.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
inds=sort_nd(array,dimension)
INPUTS:
array: An array of at least 2 dimensions to sort.
dimension: The dimension along which to sort, starting at 1
(1:rows, 2:columns, ...).
OUTPUTS:
inds: An index array with the same dimensions as the input
array, containing the (1D) sorted indices. Can be used
directly to index the arary (ala SORT).
EXAMPLE:
a=randomu(sd,5,4,3,2)
sorted=a[sort_nd(a,2)]
SEE ALSO:
HISTOGRAM
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Tue Aug 22 15:51:12 2006, J.D. Smith
Written, based on discussion on c.l.i-p, 08/2006.
(See sort_nd.pro)
NAME:
STATIONPLOT
PURPOSE:
This is routine for drawing station plots on a map or other display.
Normally, this routine is used in conjunction with WINDBARB.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
StationPlot, x, y
REQUIRED INPUTS:
x: The X location of the center of the station plot, expressed in data coordinates.
y: The Y location of the center of the station plot, expressed in data coordinates.
KEYWORDS:
COLOR: The name of the color to draw the station plot in. May be a vector
the same length as X. Colors are those available in FSC_COLOR.
RADIUS: The radius of the station plot circle in normalized coordinates.
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires FSC_COLOR from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/fsc_color.pro
EXAMPLE:
seed = -3L
lon = Randomu(seed, 20) * 360 - 180
lat = Randomu(seed, 20) * 180 - 90
speed = Randomu(seed, 20) * 100
direction = Randomu(seed, 20) * 180 + 90
Erase, Color=FSC_Color('Ivory', !P.Background)
Map_Set, /Cylindrical,Position=[0.1, 0.1, 0.9, 0.9], Color=FSC_Color('Steel Blue'), /NoErase
Map_Grid, Color=FSC_Color('Charcoal', !D.Table_Size-2)
Map_Continents, Color=FSC_Color('Sea Green', !D.Table_Size-3)
StationPlot, lon, lat, Color='Indian Red'
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, 20 May 2003, based on TVCircle from the
NASA Astonomy Library.
Added THICK keyword. 23 February 2005. DWF.
(See stationplot.pro)
NAME:
STR_SIZE
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this function is to return the proper
character size to make a specified string a specifed
width in a window. The width is specified in normalized
coordinates. The function is extremely useful for sizing
strings and labels in resizeable graphics windows.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics Programs, Widgets.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
thisCharSize = STR_SIZE(thisSting, targetWidth)
INPUTS:
thisString: This is the string that you want to make a specifed
target size or width.
OPTIONAL INPUTS:
targetWidth: This is the target width of the string in normalized
coordinates in the current graphics window. The character
size of the string (returned as thisCharSize) will be
calculated to get the string width as close as possible to
the target width. The default is 0.25.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
INITSIZE: This is the initial size of the string. Default is 1.0.
STEP: This is the amount the string size will change in each step
of the interative process of calculating the string size.
The default value is 0.05.
XPOS: X position of the output test string. This can be
used on the Postscript device, where no pixmap windows are
available and where therefore the test strings would appear on
the printable area. Default is 0.5 on most devices. If !D.NAME
is PS, the default is 2.0 to draw the test string out of the
drawable window area.
YPOS: Y position of the output test string. This can be
used on the Postscript device, where no pixmap windows are
available and where therefore the test strings would appear on
the printable area. Default is 0.5 on most devices. If !D.NAME
is PS, the default is 2.0 to draw the test string out of the
drawable window area.
OUTPUTS:
thisCharSize: This is the size the specified string should be set
to if you want to produce output of the specified target
width. The value is in standard character size units where
1.0 is the standard character size.
EXAMPLE:
To make the string "Happy Holidays" take up 30% of the width of
the current graphics window, type this:
XYOUTS, 0.5, 0.5, ALIGN=0.5, "Happy Holidays", $
CHARSIZE=STR_SIZE("Happy Holidays", 0.3)
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David Fanning, 17 DEC 96.
Added a scaling factor to take into account the aspect ratio
of the window in determing the character size. 28 Oct 97. DWF
Added check to be sure hardware fonts are not selected. 29 April 2000. DWF.
Added a pixmap to get proper scaling in skinny windows. 16 May 2000. DWF.
Forgot I can't do pixmaps in all devices. :-( Fixed. 7 Aug 2000. DWF.
Added support of PostScript at behest of Benjamin Hornberger. 11 November 2004. DWF.
(See str_size.pro)
NAME:
SYMCAT
PURPOSE:
This function provides a symbol catalog for specifying a number of plotting symbols.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
Plot, findgen(11), PSYM=SYMCAT(theSymbol)
To connect symbols with lines, use a negative value for the PSYM keyword:
Plot, findgen(11), PSYM=-SYMCAT(theSymbol)
INPUTS:
theSymbol: The number of the symbol you wish to use. Possible values are:
0 : No symbol.
1 : Plus sign.
2 : Asterisk.
3 : Dot (period).
4 : Open diamond.
5 : Open upward triangle.
6 : Open square.
7 : X.
8 : Defined by the user with USERSYM.
9 : Open circle.
10 : Histogram style plot.
11 : Open downward triangle.
12 : Open rightfacing triangle.
13 : Open leftfacing triangle.
14 : Filled diamond.
15 : Filled square.
16 : Filled circle.
17 : Filled upward triangle.
18 : Filled downward triangle.
19 : Filled rightfacing triangle.
20 : Filled leftfacing triangle.
21 : Hourglass.
22 : Filled Hourglass.
23 : Bowtie.
24 : Filled bowtie.
25 : Standing Bar.
26 : Filled Standing Bar.
27 : Laying Bar.
28 : Filled Laying Bar.
29 : Hat up.
30 : Hat down.
31 : Hat right.
32 : Hat down.
33 : Big cross.
34 : Filled big cross.
35 : Circle with plus.
36 : Circle with X.
37 : Upper half circle.
38 : Filled upper half circle.
39 : Lower half circle.
40 : Filled lower half circle.
41 : Left half circle.
42 : Filled left half circle.
43 : Right half circle.
44 : Filled right half circle.
45 : Star.
46 : Filled star.
RETURN VALUE:
The return value is whatever is appropriate for passing along
to the PSYM keyword of (for example) a PLOT or OPLOT command.
For the vast majority of the symbols, the return value is 8.
KEYWORDS:
COLOR: Set this keyword to the color (index or 24-bit value) of
the color desired. For example:
Plot, Findgen(11), COLOR=FSC_COLOR('yellow'), PSYM=-SYMCAT(4, COLOR=FSC_COLOR('green'))
THICK: Set this keyword to the thickness desired. Default is 1.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 2 September 2006. Loosely based on the
program MC_SYMBOL introduced on the IDL newsgroup 1 September 2006,
and MPI_PLOTCONFIG__DEFINE from the Coyote Library.
2 October 2006. DWF. Modified to allow PSYM=8 and PSYM=10 to have
their normal meanings. This shifted previous symbols by two values
from their old meanings. For example, an hourglass went from symbol
number 19 to 21.
Whoops! Added two symbols but forgot to change limits to allow for them. 4 May 2007. DWF.
Added THICK keyword. 21 Aug 2007. DWF.
Added COLOR keyword and made THICK keyword apply to all symbols. 11 Nov 2008. DWF.
(See symcat.pro)
NAME:
Terminator_Map
PURPOSE:
This is a program for viewing a map of the Earth with a day/night terminator.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
Terminator_Map, center_lon, center_lat, Map_Projection='Aitoff'
INPUT ARGUMENTS:
center_lon: The longitude, in degrees, of the center of the map, (-180 to 180). Defaults to 0.0.
center_lat: The latitude, in degrees, of the center of the map, (-90 to 90). Defaults to 0.0.
Latitudes other than zero can cause program problems. See the NOTES section for details.
INPUT KEYWORDS:
FLIPDAY: The program suffers from an inability to always correctly distinguish the
"day" side of the day/night terminator (see NOTES section). If the program
gets it wrong, you can use this keyword to "flip" the day/night area. For
example, here is a call that gets it wrong:
Terminator_Map, 0, 90.0, MAP_PROJECTION=4, time="Thu Apr 13 08:49:34 2006"
Unfortunately, you can only know if it is "wrong" by visual inspection. The sun
is always placed correctly. I realize this limits the usefulness of the program,
generally, but it is a limitation I am not motivated enough to fix. That is to
say, the program meets my limited needs perfectly. :-)
KEEP_ASPECT: If set, the aspect ratio of the map is more or less preserved.
MAP_PROJECTION: Either the number or the name of one of the following map projection types. Defaults to "CYLINDRICAL".
0 CYLINDRICAL
1 GOODESHOMOLOSINE
2 HAMMER
3 LAMBERT
4 MERCATOR
5 MILLER_CYLINDRICAL
6 MOLLWEIDE
7 ROBINSON
TIME: A date/time string of nearly any format. The month, however, should be represented
as a three-letter string. The time is written as hh:mm:ss. Examples of date/time strings
are these:
'Wed Apr 12 22:39:52 2006'
'12 APR 2006 04:16:00'
'Apr 12, 2006 04:16:00'
'Nov 12, 2006'
If undefined, the current day and time (from SYSTIME) is used.
OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
IMAGE: If passed a named variable, will return a 24-bit image of the result in the display window.
DEPENDENCIES:
Requires both the Coyote Library and the JHUAPL Library to be on the !PATH, since many programs
from both are used.
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/coyotefiles.zip
http://fermi.jhuapl.edu/s1r/idl/s1rlib/local_idl.html
EXAMPLE:
Window, XSize=800, YSize=400
Terminator_Map
NOTES:
The spherical geometry problems inherent with working the map projections are not
completely solved in this program. The main problem seems to be that if the
terminator polygon (represented in the program by the variables lon_terminus
and lat_terminus) overlaps the pole regions, then stardard methods for determining
if a point is inside or outside a polygon are not reliable. (*All* longitudes are
inside the polygon if the polygon overlaps a pole!) In the program, this manifests
itself as the sun side of the terminator appearing dark and the night side appearing
light. Hence, the FLIPDAY keyword.
To some extent, this problem can be eliminated by setting the CENTER_LAT parameter
to zero, at least with some map projections. I've thought about forcing it to be
zero and forcing you to use well-behaved map projections, but have decided to leave
the program the way it is so you can discover the limitations yourself.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, April 12, 2006.
(See terminator_map.pro)
NAME:
TEXTBOX
PURPOSE:
This function allows the user to type some text in a
pop-up dialog widget and have it returned to the program.
This is an example of a Pop-Up Dialog Widget.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utility, Widgets
CALLING SEQUENCE:
thetext = TextBox()
INPUTS:
None.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
CANCEL: An output parameter. If the user kills the widget or clicks the Cancel
button this keyword is set to 1. It is set to 0 otherwise. It
allows you to determine if the user canceled the dialog without
having to check the validity of the answer.
theText = TextBox(Title='Provide Phone Number...', Label='Number:', Cancel=cancelled)
IF cancelled THEN Return
GROUP_LEADER: The widget ID of the group leader of this pop-up
dialog. This should be provided if you are calling
the program from within a widget program:
thetext = TextBox(Group_Leader=event.top)
If a group leader is not provided, an unmapped top-level base widget
will be created as a group leader.
LABEL: A string the appears to the left of the text box.
TITLE: The title of the top-level base. If not specified, the
string 'Provide Input:' is used by default.
VALUE: A string variable that is the intial value of the textbox. By default, a null string.
XSIZE: The size of the text widget in pixel units. By default, 200.
OUTPUTS:
theText: The string of characters the user typed in the
text widget. No error checking is done.
RESTRICTIONS:
The widget is destroyed if the user clicks on either button or
if they hit a carriage return (CR) in the text widget. The
text is recorded if the user hits the ACCEPT button or hits
a CR in the text widget.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W. Fanning, December 20, 2001.
Added VALUE keyword to set the initial value of the text box. 4 Nov 2002. DWF.
(See textbox.pro)
NAME:
TextLineFormat
PURPOSE:
This is a utility program for taking a line of text and shortening
it to a defined maximum length. The result of the function is a string
array in which no line of text in the string array is longer than the maximum
length. The text is broken into "words" by white space. The algorithm is
modified slightly if there are LF (line feeds) in the text, or if any single
word in the text is too large to fit on a line.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities
CALLING SEQUENCE:
formattedText = TextLineFormat(theText)
INPUTS:
theText: The line of text that is to be formatted.
KEYWORDS:
LENGTH: The maximum line length allowed in the resulting text array.
Set to 60 characters by default. Lines greater than length
can be permitted if Line Feeds (ASCII 10B) are found
in the text or single words are too large to fit on a line.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David Fanning, June 2005.
Fixed a small problem with cumulative total not counting spaces between
words. Changed the default size to 60. DWF. 18 August 2005.
Added check for LF in text to accommodate reading netCDF file attributes.
If LF are present, I break on these, and return. 15 Feb 2008. DWF.
Better handling of lines with no white space in them for breaking. 23 March 2009. DWF.
(See textlineformat.pro)
NAME:
TEXTURE_SURFACE
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to demonstrate how to
create a simple surface plot with an image applied as
a texture in object graphics.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Widgets, Object Graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
TEXTURE_SURFACE, data, x, y, Image=image
REQUIRED INPUTS:
None. Fake data will be used if no data is supplied in call.
OPTIONAL INPUTS
data: A 2D array of surface data.
x: A vector of X data values.
y: A vector of Y data values.
OPTIONAL KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
BORDERCOLOR : A three element array [R, G, B] describing the color
used to draw the non-textured part of the surface if POSITION is
specified.
COLORTABLE: The number of an IDL color table to use for the image
texture. Used only if the supplied image is 2D. Ignored otherwise.
EXACT: Set this keyword to get exact axis scaling.
_EXTRA: This keyword collects otherwise undefined keywords that are
passed to the surface initialization routine.
GROUP_LEADER: The group leader for this program. When the group leader
is destroyed, this program will be destroyed.
IMAGE: An 8-bit or 24-bit image you wish to use for the image texture.
LANDSCAPE: Set this keyword if you are printing in landscape mode. The
default is Portrait mode. The Landscape keyword on the PRINTER object
is set, but not all printers will honor this keyword setting. If yours
does not, set Landscape mode in the Printer Setup dialog.
POSITION: A four element array of the form [x1, y1, x2, y2] that will
position the image with its lower-left corner at (x1,y1) and its upper-
right corner at (x2,y2) in the device coordinate system of the surface.
In other words, if my surface is a 41 by 41 array, and I want the image
positioned with lower-left at (5,10) and upper-right at (25,18), then
I call the program like this: Texture_Surface, Position=[5, 10, 25, 18].
VECTOR: Set this keyword if you want vector printing (as opposed to
the default bitmap printing).
XTITLE: A string used as the X title of the plot.
YTITLE: A string used as the Y title of the plot.
ZSCALE: A number larger than or equal to 0.001 and less than or equal to 1.0 that affects Z scaling.
ZTITLE: A string used as the Z title of the plot.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
EXAMPLE:
To use this program with your surface data and 2D image, type:
IDL> data = Loaddata(2)
IDL> image = Loaddata(7)
IDL> Texture_Surface, data, Image=image, Colortable=33
RESTRICTIONS:
Requires the ASPECT program from the Coyote Library:
http://www.dfanning.com/programs/aspect.pro
MODIFICATION HISTORY
Written by David W. Fanning, 1 Nov 2001, from previous Simple_Surface code.
Modifications suggested by Karl Shultz added to allow surface color
specification and improved resolution about image edges when
positioning images. BORDERCOLOR keyword added. DWF. 4 Nov 2001.
The surface now maintains the same X/Y aspect ratio as the surface data. DWF. 8 April 2002.
Added ZSCALE keyword. DWF. 8 April 2002.
(See texture_surface.pro)
NAME:
TRANSFORM_VOLUME
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to transform (e.g., rotate,
scale, and translate) a 3D array or volume.
AUTHOR:
Martin Downing,
Clinical Research Physicist,
Grampian Orthopaedic RSA Research Centre,
Woodend Hospital, Aberdeen, AB15 6LS.
Pnone: 01224 556055 / 07903901612
Fa: 01224 556662
E-mail: m.downing@abdn.ac.uk
CATEGORY:
Mathematics, graphics.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
result = TRANSFORM_VOLUME( volume )
INPUTS:
volume: The 3D array or volume to be transformed.
OPTIONAL KEYWORDS:
BUFFER_SIZE: To reduce memory overhead the routine processes the job in chunks, the number
of elements of which can be set using the BUFFER_SIZE keyword, set this keyword to
0 to force the whole array to be processed at one time. The default value is 128.
MISSING: The value to return for transformed values outside the bounds of
the volume. (Passed to the INTERPOLATE function.) Default is 0.
T3DMAT: The homogeneous transforamtion matrix. If this keyword is not present,
the following keywords can be used to create a homogeneous transformation matrix:
ROTATION - The rotation vector [rx,ry,rz]. The order of rotation is ZYX.
TRANSLATE - The translation vector [tx,ty,tz].
SCALE - The scale vector [sx,sy,sz].
CENTRE_ROTATION - The centre of rotation [cx,cy,cz].
OUTPUTS:
result: The transformed array or volume.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None.
DEPENDENCIES:
The program uses the library INTERPLOLATE routine, which currently (IDL 5.4)
uses linear interpolation. Note that the operation is performed in chunks,
each of which is independant of the result of the others, so the operation
could easiliy be parallelised.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: Martin Downing, 16 September 2001.
Added MISSING keyword. Removed INPLACE keyword. 25 Nov 2001. MD
(See transform_volume.pro)
NAME:
TVIMAGE
PURPOSE:
This purpose of TVIMAGE is to enable the TV command in IDL
to be a completely device-independent and color-decomposition-
state independent command. On 24-bit displays color decomposition
is always turned off for 8-bit images and on for 24-bit images.
The color decomposition state is restored for those versions of
IDL that support it (> 5.2). Moreover, TVIMAGE adds features
that TV lacks. For example, images can be positioned in windows
using the POSITION keyword like other IDL graphics commands.
TVIMAGE also supports the !P.MULTI system variable, unlike the
TV command. TVIMAGE was written to work especially well in
resizeable graphics windows. Note that if you wish to preserve
the aspect ratio of images in resizeable windows, you should set
the KEEP_ASPECT_RATIO keyword, described below. TVIMAGE works
equally well on the display, in the PostScript device, and in
the Printer and Z-Graphics Buffer devices. The TRUE keyword is
set automatically to the correct value for 24-bit images, so you
don't need to specify it when using TVIMAGE.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING:
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics display.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
TVIMAGE, image
INPUTS:
image: A 2D or 3D image array. It should be byte data. Can also be
a 3D image with an alpha channel (e.g., MxNx4).
x : The X position of the lower-left corner of the image.
This parameter is only recognized if the TV keyword is set.
If the Y position is not used, X is taken to be the image
"position" in the window. See the TV command documenation
for details.
y : The Y position of the lower-left corner of the image.
This parameter is only recognized if the TV keyword is set.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
ACOLOR: Set this keyword to the axis color. If a byte or integer value,
it will assume you are using INDEXED color mode. If a long integer
is will assume you are using DECOMPOSED color mode. If a string,
is will pass the string color name along to FSC_COLOR for processing.
AXES: Set this keyword to draw a set of axes around the image.
AXKEYWORDS: An IDL structure variable of PLOT keywords as structure fields
and keyword values as the values of the fields. Pass directly to the
PLOT command that draws the axes for the image. Ignored unless the
AXES keyword is set. For example,
TVImage, image, /AXES, AXKEYWORDS={CHARSIZE:1.5, XTITLE:'Distance (mm)', $
YTITLE:'Signal', TICKLEN:-0.025}, ACOLOR='NAVY'
BACKGROUND: This keyword specifies the background color. Note that
the keyword ONLY has effect if the ERASE keyword is also
set or !P.MULTI is set to multiple plots and TVIMAGE is
used to place the *first* plot. Can be a string (e.g., 'ivory'), or
a 24-bit value that can be decomposed into a color, or an 8-bit
index number into the current color table. ERASE and BACKGROUND
should only be used on 24-bit devices that support windows!
BREWER: If set, applies only to BACKGROUND AND ACOLOR keywords. Selects
brewer colors, rather than standard FSC_COLOR colors as strings.
ERASE: If this keyword is set an ERASE command is issued
before the image is displayed. ERASE and BACKGROUND
should only be used on 24-bit devices that support windows!
The keyword is ignored on 8-bit devices or devices that do
not support windows.
_EXTRA: This keyword picks up any TV keywords you wish to use.
HALF_HALF: If set, will tell CONGRID to extrapolate a *half* row
and column on either side, rather than the default of
one full row/column at the ends of the array. If you
are interpolating images with few rows, then the
output will be more consistent with this technique.
This keyword is intended as a replacement for
MINUS_ONE, and both keywords probably should not be
used in the same call to CONGRID.
KEEP_ASPECT_RATIO: Normally, the image will be resized to fit the
specified position in the window. If you prefer, you can
force the image to maintain its aspect ratio in the window
(although not its natural size) by setting this keyword.
The image width is fitted first. If, after setting the
image width, the image height is too big for the window,
then the image height is fitted into the window. The
appropriate values of the POSITION keyword are honored
during this fitting process. Once a fit is made, the
POSITION coordiates are re-calculated to center the image
in the window. You can recover these new position coordinates
as the output from the POSITION keyword.
MARGIN: A single value, expressed as a normalized coordinate, that
can easily be used to calculate a position in the window.
The margin is used to calculate a POSITION that gives
the image an equal margin around the edge of the window.
The margin must be a number in the range 0.0 to 0.333. This
keyword is ignored if the POSITION or OVERPLOT keywords are
used. It is also ignored when TVImage is executed in a
multi-plot window, EXCEPT if it's value is zero. In this
special case, the image will be drawn into its position in
the multi-plot window with no margins whatsoever. (The
default is to have a slight margin about the image to separate
it from other images or graphics.
MINUS_ONE: The value of this keyword is passed along to the CONGRID
command. It prevents CONGRID from adding an extra row and
column to the resulting array, which can be a problem with
small image arrays.
NOINTERPOLATION: Setting this keyword disables the default bilinear
interpolation done to the image when it is resized. Nearest
neighbor interpolation is done instead. This is preferred
when you do not wish to change the pixel values of the image.
This keyword must be set, for example, when you are displaying
GIF files that come with their own non-IDL color table vectors.
NORMAL: Setting this keyword means image position coordinates x and y
are interpreted as being in normalized coordinates. This keyword
is only valid if the TV keyword is set.
OVERPLOT: Setting this keyword causes the POSITION keyword to be ignored
and the image is positioned in the location established by the
last graphics command. For example:
Plot, Findgen(11), Position=[0.1, 0.3, 0.8, 0.95]
TVImage, image, /Overplot
POSITION: The location of the image in the output window. This is
a four-element floating array of normalized coordinates of
the type given by !P.POSITION or the POSITION keyword to
other IDL graphics commands. The form is [x0, y0, x1, y1].
The default is [0.0, 0.0, 1.0, 1.0]. Note that this keyword is ALSO
an output keyword. That is to say, upon return from TVIMAGE
this keyword (if passed by reference) contains the actual
position in the window where the image was displayed. This
may be different from the input values if the KEEP_ASPECT_RATIO
keyword is set, or if you are using TVIMAGE with the POSITION
keyword when !P.MULTI is set to something other than a single
plot. One use for the output values might be to position other
graphics (e.g., a colorbar) in relation to the image.
Note that the POSITION keyword should not, normally, be used
when displaying multiple images with !P.MULTI. If it *is* used,
its meaning differs slightly from its normal meaning. !P.MULTI
is responsible for calculating the position of graphics in the
display window. Normally, it would be a mistake to use a POSITION
graphics keyword on a graphics command that was being drawn with
!P.MULTI. But in this special case, TVIMAGE will use the POSITION
coordinates to calculate an image position in the actual position
calculated for the image by !P.MULTI. The main purpose of this
functionality is to allow the user to display images along with
colorbars when using !P.MULTI. See the example below.
QUIET: There are situations when you would prefer that TVIMAGE does not
advertise itself by filling out the FSC_$TVIMAGE common block. For
example, if you are using TVIMAGE to draw a color bar, it would
not be necessary. Setting this keyword means that TVIMAGE just
goes quietly about it's business without bothering anyone else.
SCALE: Set this keyword to byte scale the image before display.
TV: Setting this keyword makes the TVIMAGE command work much
like the TV command, although better. That is to say, it
will still set the correct DECOMPOSED state depending upon
the kind of image to be displayed (8-bit or 24-bit). It will
also allow the image to be "positioned" in the window by
specifying the coordinates of the lower-left corner of the
image. The NORMAL keyword is activated when the TV keyword
is set, which will indicate that the position coordinates
are given in normalized coordinates rather than device
coordinates.
Setting this keyword will ensure that the keywords
KEEP_ASPECT_RATIO, MARGIN, MINUS_ONE, MULTI, and POSITION
are ignored.
XRANGE: If the AXES keyword is set, this keyword is a two-element vector
giving the X axis range. By default, [0, size of image in X].
YRANGE: If the AXES keyword is set, this keyword is a two-element vector
giving the Y axis range. By default, [0, size of image in Y].
OUTPUTS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
Unless the KEEP_ASPECT_RATIO keyword is set, the displayed image
may not have the same aspect ratio as the input data set.
RESTRICTIONS:
If the POSITION keyword and the KEEP_ASPECT_RATIO keyword are
used together, there is an excellent chance the POSITION
parameters will change. If the POSITION is passed in as a
variable, the new positions will be returned in the same variable
as an output parameter.
If a 24-bit image is displayed on an 8-bit display, the
24-bit image must be converted to an 8-bit image and the
appropriate color table vectors. This is done with the COLOR_QUAN
function. The TVIMAGE command will load the color table vectors
and set the NOINTERPOLATION keyword if this is done. Note that the
resulting color table vectors are normally incompatible with other
IDL-supplied color tables. Hence, other graphics windows open at
the time the image is display are likely to look strange.
Other programs from Coyote Library (e.g., FSC_COLOR) may also be
required.
EXAMPLE:
To display an image with a contour plot on top of it, type:
filename = FILEPATH(SUBDIR=['examples','data'], 'worldelv.dat')
image = BYTARR(360,360)
OPENR, lun, filename, /GET_LUN
READU, lun, image
FREE_LUN, lun
TVIMAGE, image, POSITION=thisPosition, /KEEP_ASPECT_RATIO
CONTOUR, image, POSITION=thisPosition, /NOERASE, XSTYLE=1, $
YSTYLE=1, XRANGE=[0,360], YRANGE=[0,360], NLEVELS=10
To display four images in a window without spacing between them:
!P.Multi=[0,2,2]
TVImage, image, Margin=0
TVImage, image, Margin=0
TVImage, image, Margin=0
TVImage, image, Margin=0
!P.Multi = 0
To display four image in a window with associated color bars:
!P.Multi=[0,2,2]
p = [0.02, 0.3, 0.98, 0.98]
LoadCT, 0
TVImage, image, Position=p
Colorbar, Position=[p[0], p[1]-0.1, p[2], p[1]-0.05]
p = [0.02, 0.3, 0.98, 0.98]
LoadCT, 2
TVImage, image, Position=p
Colorbar, Position=[p[0], p[1]-0.1, p[2], p[1]-0.05]
p = [0.02, 0.3, 0.98, 0.98]
LoadCT, 3
TVImage, image, Position=p
Colorbar, Position=[p[0], p[1]-0.1, p[2], p[1]-0.05]
p = [0.02, 0.3, 0.98, 0.98]
LoadCT, 5
TVImage, image, Position=p
Colorbar, Position=[p[0], p[1]-0.1, p[2], p[1]-0.05]
!P.Multi =0
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David Fanning, 20 NOV 1996.
Fixed a small bug with the resizing of the image. 17 Feb 1997. DWF.
Removed BOTTOM and NCOLORS keywords. This reflects my growing belief
that this program should act more like TV and less like a "color
aware" application. I leave "color awareness" to the program
using TVIMAGE. Added 24-bit image capability. 15 April 1997. DWF.
Fixed a small bug that prevented this program from working in the
Z-buffer. 17 April 1997. DWF.
Fixed a subtle bug that caused me to think I was going crazy!
Lession learned: Be sure you know the *current* graphics
window! 17 April 1997. DWF.
Added support for the PRINTER device. 25 June 1997. DWF.
Extensive modifications. 27 Oct 1997. DWF
1) Removed PRINTER support, which didn't work as expected.
2) Modified Keep_Aspect_Ratio code to work with POSITION keyword.
3) Added check for window-able devices (!D.Flags AND 256).
4) Modified PostScript color handling.
Craig Markwart points out that Congrid adds an extra row and column
onto an array. When viewing small images (e.g., 20x20) this can be
a problem. Added a Minus_One keyword whose value can be passed
along to the Congrid keyword of the same name. 28 Oct 1997. DWF
Changed default POSITION to fill entire window. 30 July 1998. DWF.
Made sure color decomposition is OFF for 2D images. 6 Aug 1998. DWF.
Added limited PRINTER portrait mode support. The correct aspect ratio
of the image is always maintained when outputting to the
PRINTER device and POSITION coordinates are ignored. 6 Aug 1998. DWF
Removed 6 August 98 fixes (Device, Decomposed=0) after realizing that
they interfere with operation in the Z-graphics buffer. 9 Oct 1998. DWF
Added a MARGIN keyword. 18 Oct 1998. DWF.
Re-established Device, Decomposed=0 keyword for devices that
support it. 18 Oct 1998. DWF.
Added support for the !P.Multi system variable. 3 March 99. DWF
Added DEVICE, DECOMPOSED=1 command for all 24-bit images. 2 April 99. DWF.
Added ability to preserve DECOMPOSED state for IDL 5.2 and higher. 4 April 99. DWF.
Added TV keyword to allow TVIMAGE to work like the TV command. 11 May 99. DWF.
Added the OVERPLOT keyword to allow plotting on POSITION coordinates
estabished by the preceding graphics command. 11 Oct 99. DWF.
Added automatic recognition of !P.Multi. Setting MULTI keyword is no
longer required. 18 Nov 99. DWF.
Added NOINTERPOLATION keyword so that nearest neighbor interpolation
is performed rather than bilinear. 3 Dec 99. DWF
Changed ON_ERROR condition from 1 to 2. 19 Dec 99. DWF.
Added Craig Markwardt's CMCongrid program and removed RSI's. 24 Feb 2000. DWF.
Added HALF_HALF keyword to support CMCONGRID. 24 Feb 2000. DWF.
Fixed a small problem with image start position by adding ROUND function. 19 March 2000. DWF.
Updated the PRINTER device code to take advantage of available keywords. 2 April 2000. DWF.
Reorganized the code to handle 24-bit images on 8-bit displays better. 2 April 2000. DWF.
Added BACKGROUND keyword. 20 April 2000. DWF.
Fixed a small problem in where the ERASE was occuring. 6 May 2000. DWF.
Rearranged the PLOT part of code to occur before decomposition state
is changed to fix Background color bug in multiple plots. 23 Sept 2000. DWF.
Removed MULTI keyword, which is no longer needed. 23 Sept 2000. DWF.
Fixed a small problem with handling images that are slices from 3D image cubes. 5 Oct 2000. DWF.
Added fix for brain-dead Macs from Ben Tupper that restores Macs ability to
display images. 8 June 2001. DWF.
Fixed small problem with multiple plots and map projections. 29 June 2003. DWF.
Converted all array subscripts to square brackets. 29 June 2003. DWF.
Removed obsolete STR_SEP and replaced with STRSPLIT. 27 Oct 2004. DWF.
Small modification at suggestion of Karsten Rodenacker to increase size of
images in !P.MULTI mode. 8 December 2004. DWF.
Minor modifications on Karsten Rodenacker's own account concerning margination
and TV behaviour. 8 December 2004. KaRo
There was a small inconsistency in how the image was resized for PostScript as
opposed to the display, which could occasionally result in a small black line
to the right of the image. This is now handled consistently. 3 January 2007. DWF.
Made a small change to CMCONGRID to permit nearest-neighbor interpolation for 3D arrays.
Previously, any 24-bit image was interpolated, no matter the setting of the NOINTERP
keyword. 22 April 2007. DWF.
Updated the program for the 24-bit Z-buffer in IDL 6.4. 11 June 2007. DWF.
Added new POSITION keyword functionality for !P.MULTI display. 9 Sept 2007. DWF.
Bit one too many times. Added _STRICT_EXTRA keywords for all _EXTRA keywords. 1 Feb 2008. DWF.
Added FSC_$TVIMAGE common block for interactive interaction with TVINFO. 16 March 2008. DWF.
Added SCALE keyword. 18 March 2008. DWF.
Added keywords to allow axes to be drawn around the image. 18 March 2008. DWF.
Added QUIET keyword to allow by-passing of FSC_$TVIMAGE common block updating. 21 March 2008. DWF.
Made BACKGROUND and ERASE valid keywords only on 24-bit devices. Ignored on others. 28 May 2008. DWF.
Cannot make color work in device independent way for axes, unless I handle axis color directly. To this
end, I have added an ACOLOR keyword. 16 June 2008. DWF.
Added BREWER keyword so I can specify Brewer colors with BACKGROUND and ACOLOR keywords. 16 June 2008. DWF.
Fixed a problem with the BACKGROUND keyword and multiple plots. 16 March 2009. DWF.
Added the ability to display transparent images. 13 May 2009. DWF.
Modified to work with 24-bit color PostScript in IDL 7.1. 24 May 2009. DWF.
(See tvimage.pro)
NAME:
TVINFO
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is allow interactive inquiry of image
position and values for images displayed with either TVIMAGE or TVSCALE.
After a call to TVIMAGE or TVSCALE, TVINFO can be called and the user
can use the cursor to click in the image display window. If the user clicks
inside the image, the image location and value will be printed out in the
user's IDL console window.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING:
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com/
CATEGORY:
Graphics display.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
TVINFO, image
INPUTS:
image: A 2D or 3D image array. Values will be returned from this image. (Required)
position: A four-element array giving image position in the window in normalized
coordinates. If not provided, uses the stored position from TVIMAGE or TVSCALE.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
None.
OUTPUTS:
Image locations and values are printed in the IDL console window.
SIDE EFFECTS:
TVINFO blocks the IDL command line until the RIGHT mouse button is clicked
in the image display window.
RESTRICTIONS:
TVINFO *only* works for the last image displayed with TVIMAGE or TVSCALE
on a Windows or X device. Precautions are taken to help you avoid shooting
yourself in the foot, but I can't anticipate every foolish action at the
IDL command line. Expecially if you close the image window before exiting
the program with the RIGHT mouse button, you are COMPLETELY on your own!
Coyote Library programs are required to use TVINFO. Among the ones I know
about are these:
TVIMAGE, TVSCALE, SCALE_VECTOR, IMAGE_DIMENSIONS, ERROR_MESSAGE, CONVERT_TO_TYPE, FPUFIX.
If the program doesn't compile, you probably need library routines. They
can be found here:
http:/www.dfanning.com/documents/programs.html
EXAMPLE:
To display an image with axes and then inquire about it:
filename = FILEPATH(SUBDIR=['examples','data'], 'worldelv.dat')
image = BYTARR(360,360)
OPENR, lun, filename, /GET_LUN
READU, lun, image
FREE_LUN, lun
thisPosition = [0.1, 0.1, 0.9, 0.9]
TVIMAGE, image, /KEEP_ASPECT, POSITION=thisPosition, /AXES
TVINFO, image
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David W Fanning, 16 March 2008.
Added ability to specify position directly in call. 20 March 2008. DWF
Changed cursor operation to conform with expected differences
between Windows and UNIX. 20 March 2008, DWF.
(See tvinfo.pro)
NAME:
TVREAD
PURPOSE:
To get accurate screen dumps with the IDL command TVRD on 24-bit
PC and Macintosh computers, you have to be sure to set color
decomposition on. This program adds that capability automatically.
In addition, the program will optionally write BMP, GIF, JPEG,
PICT, PNG, and TIFF color image files of the screen dump.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics
CALLING SEQUENCE:
image = TVREAD(xstart, ystart, ncols, nrows)
The returned image will be a 2D image on 8-bit systems and
a 24-bit pixel interleaved true-color image on 24-bit systems.
A -1 will be returned if a file output keyword is used (e.g., JPEG, TIFF, etc.).
OPTIONAL INPUTS:
XSTART -- The starting column index. By default, 0.
YSTART -- The starting row index. By default, 0.
NCOLS -- The number of columns to read. By default, !D.X_Size - XSTART
NROWS -- The number of rows to read. By default, !D.Y_Size - YSTART.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
BMP -- Set this keyword to write the screen dump as a color BMP file.
CANCEL -- An output keyword set to 1 if the user cancels out of a
filename dialog. Set to 0 otherwise.
COLORS -- If a 24-bit image has to be quantized, this will set the number
of colors in the output image. Set to 256 by default. Applies to BMP,
GIF, PICT, and PNG formats written from 24-bit displays.(See the
COLOR_QUAN documentation for details.)
CUBE -- If this keyword is set to a value between 2 and 6 the color
quantization will use a cubic method of quantization. Applies to BMP,
GIF, PICT, and PNG formats written from 24-bit displays.(See the
COLOR_QUAN documentation for details.)
DITHER -- If this keyword is set the quantized image will be dithered.
Applies to BMP, GIF, PICT, and PNG formats written from 24-bit displays.
(See the COLOR_QUAN documentation for details.)
FILENAME -- The base name of the output file. (No file extensions;
they will be added automatically.) This name may be changed by the user.
image = TVREAD(Filename='myfile', /JPEG)
No file will be written unless a file output keyword is used
(e.g., JPEG, TIFF, etc.) in the call. By default the FILENAME is
set to "idl". The file extension will be set automatically to match
the type of file created.
GIF -- Set this keyword to write the screen dump as a color GIF file.
JPEG -- Set this keyword to write the screen dump as a color JPEG file.
NODIALOG -- Set this keyword if you wish to avoid the DIALOG_PICKFILE
dialog that asks you to name the output file. This keyword should be
set, for example, if you are processing screens in batch mode.
ORDER -- Set this keyword to determine the image order for reading the
display. Corresponds to !Order and set to such as the default.
OVERWRITE_PROMPT -- Set this keyword if you would like to get a prompt
if you are overwriting a file. This applies only to operations with
DIALOG_PICKFILE.
PICT -- Set this keyword to write the screen dump as a color PICT file.
PNG -- Set this keyword to write the screen dump as a color PNG file.
TIFF -- Set this keyword to write the screen dump as a color TIFF file.
TRUE -- Set this keyword to the type of interleaving you want. 1 = Pixel
interleaved, 2 = row interleaved, 3 = band interleaved.
TYPE -- Can be set to the type of file to write. Use this instead of
setting BMP, GIF, JPEG, PICT, PNG, or TIFF keywords: TYPE='JPEG'. The
primary purpose of this is to make event handlers easier to write.
QUALITY -- This keyword sets the amount of compression for JPEG images.
It should be set to a value between 0 and 100. It is set to 75 by default.
(See the WRITE_JPEG documentation for details.)
WID -- The index number of the window to read from. The current graphics window
(!D.Window) is selected by default. An error is issued if no windows are
currently open on a device that supports windows.
_EXTRA -- Any keywords that are appropriate for the WRITE_*** routines are
also accepted via keyword inheritance.
COMMON BLOCKS:
None
RESTRICTIONS: Requires IDL 5.2 and higher.
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 9 AUG 2000.
Added changes to make the program more device independent. 16 SEP 2000. DWF.
Removed GIF file support for IDL 5.4 and above. 18 JAN 2001. DWF.
Added NODIALOG keyword. 28 MAR 2001. DWF.
Added an output CANCEL keyword. 29 AUG 2001. DWF.
Added ERROR_MESSAGE code to file. 17 DEC 2001. DWF.
Added ORDER keyword. 25 March 2002. DWF.
Now create 24-bit PNG files if reading from a 24-bit display. 11 May 2002. DWF.
Now create 24-bit BMP files if reading from a 24-bit display. 23 May 2002. DWF.
Removed obsolete STR_SEP and replaced with STRSPLIT. 27 Oct 2004. DWF.
Unleashed the GIF code for IDL 6.2 and above. 10 Nov 2005. DWF.
Rolled back previous change to IDL 6.1. 24 Jan 2006. DWF.
Fixed a problem in which 16-bit displays were treated as 24-bit displays,
and as a result could not produce WHITE colors. Now all 16-bit displays
are treated as 8-bit displays. It is an ugly trade-off. 24 Jan 2006. DWF.
Added TYPE keyword 27 Sep 2006. DWF.
Updated program to work with 24-bit Z-buffer in IDL 6.4. 11 June 2007. DWF.
Added OVERWRITE_PROMPT keyword. 2 Oct 2008. DWF.
(See tvread.pro)
NAME:
TVSCALE
PURPOSE:
This purpose of TVSCALE is to enable the TVSCL command in IDL
to be a completely device-independent and color-decomposition-
state independent command. On 24-bit displays color decomposition
is always turned off for 8-bit images and on for 24-bit images.
The color decomposition state is restored for those versions of
IDL that support it (> 5.2). Moreover, TVSCALE adds features
that TVSCL lacks. For example, images can be positioned in windows
using the POSITION keyword like other IDL graphics commands.
TVSCALE also supports the !P.MULTI system variable, unlike the
TVSCL command. TVSCALE was written to work especially well in
resizeable graphics windows. Note that if you wish to preserve
the aspect ratio of images in resizeable windows, you should set
the KEEP_ASPECT_RATIO keyword, described below. TVSCALE works
equally well on the display, in the PostScript device, and in
the Printer and Z-Graphics Buffer devices. The TRUE keyword is
set automatically to the correct value for 24-bit images, so you
don't need to specify it when using TVSCALE. In addition, you can
use the TOP and BOTTOM keywords to define a particular set of
number to scale the data to. The algorithm used is this:
TV, BytScl(image, TOP=top-bottom) + bottom
Note that if you scale the image between 100 and 200, that
there are 101 possible pixel values. So the proper way to
load colors would be like this:
LoadCT, NColors=101, Bottom=100
TVSCALE, image, Top=200, Bottom=100
Alternatively, you could use the NCOLORS keyword:
LoadCT, NColors=100, Bottom=100
TVSCALE, image, NColors=100, Bottom=100
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING:
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Graphics display.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
TVSCALE, image
INPUTS:
image: A 2D or 3D image array. It does not have to be byte data.
x : The X position of the lower-left corner of the image.
This parameter is only recognized if the TV keyword is set.
If the Y position is not used, X is taken to be the image
"position" in the window. See the TV command documenation
for details.
y : The Y position of the lower-left corner of the image.
This parameter is only recognized if the TVSCL keyword is set.
KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
ACOLOR: Set this keyword to the axis color. If a byte or integer value,
it will assume you are using INDEXED color mode. If a long integer
is will assume you are using DECOMPOSED color mode. If a string,
is will pass the string color name along to FSC_COLOR for processing.
AXES: Set this keyword to draw a set of axes around the image.
AXKEYWORDS: An IDL structure variable of PLOT keywords as structure fields
and keyword values as the values of the fields. Pass directly to the
PLOT command that draws the axes for the image. Ignored unless the
AXES keyword is set. For example,
TVScale, image, /AXES, AXKEYWORDS={CHARSIZE:1.5, XTITLE:'Distance (mm)', $
YTITLE:'Signal', COLOR:FSC_Color('dodger blue')}
BACKGROUND: This keyword specifies the background color. Note that
the keyword ONLY has effect if the ERASE keyword is also
set or !P.MULTI is set to multiple plots and TVIMAGE is
used to place the *first* plot. Can be a string (e.g., 'ivory'), or
a 24-bit value that can be decomposed into a color, or an 8-bit
index number into the current color table. ERASE and BACKGROUND
should only be used on 24-bit devices that support windows!
BOTTOM: The image is scaled so that all displayed pixels have values
greater than or equal to BOTTOM and less than or equal to TOP.
The value of BOTTOM is 0 by default.
ERASE: If this keyword is set an ERASE command is issued
before the image is displayed. ERASE and BACKGROUND
should only be used on 24-bit devices that support windows!
The keyword is ignored on 8-bit devices or devices that do
not support windows.
_EXTRA: This keyword picks up any TV keywords you wish to use.
HALF_HALF: If set, will tell CONGRID to extrapolate a *half* row
and column on either side, rather than the default of
one full row/column at the ends of the array. If you
are interpolating images with few rows, then the
output will be more consistent with this technique.
This keyword is intended as a replacement for
MINUS_ONE, and both keywords probably should not be
used in the same call to CONGRID.
KEEP_ASPECT_RATIO: Normally, the image will be resized to fit the
specified position in the window. If you prefer, you can
force the image to maintain its aspect ratio in the window
(although not its natural size) by setting this keyword.
The image width is fitted first. If, after setting the
image width, the image height is too big for the window,
then the image height is fitted into the window. The
appropriate values of the POSITION keyword are honored
during this fitting process. Once a fit is made, the
POSITION coordiates are re-calculated to center the image
in the window. You can recover these new position coordinates
as the output from the POSITION keyword.
MARGIN: A single value, expressed as a normalized coordinate, that
can easily be used to calculate a position in the window.
The margin is used to calculate a POSITION that gives
the image an equal margin around the edge of the window.
The margin must be a number in the range 0.0 to 0.333. This
keyword is ignored if the POSITION or OVERPLOT keywords are
used. It is also ignormed when TVImage is executed in a
multi-plot window, EXCEPT if it's value is zero. In this
special case, the image will be drawn into its position in
the multi-plot window with no margins whatsoever. (The
default is to have a slight margin about the image to separate
it from other images or graphics.
MAXVALUE: The data is linearly scaled between the MIN and MAX values,
if they are provided. MAX is set to MAX(image) by default.
MINVALUE: The data is linearly scaled between the MIN and MAX values,
if they are provided. MIN is set to MIN(image) by default.
MINUS_ONE: The value of this keyword is passed along to the CONGRID
command. It prevents CONGRID from adding an extra row and
column to the resulting array, which can be a problem with
small image arrays.
NCOLORS: If this keyword is supplied, the TOP keyword is ignored and
the TOP keyword is set equal to BOTTOM + NCOLORS - 1. This
keyword is provided to make TVSCALE easier to use with the
color-loading programs such as LOADCT:
LoadCT, 5, NColors=100, Bottom=100
TVScale, image, NColors=100, Bottom=100
NOINTERPOLATION: Setting this keyword disables the default bilinear
interpolation done to the image when it is resized. Nearest
neighbor interpolation is done instead. This is preferred
when you do not wish to change the pixel values of the image.
NORMAL: Setting this keyword means image position coordinates x and y
are interpreted as being in normalized coordinates. This keyword
is only valid if the TVSCL keyword is set.
OVERPLOT: Setting this keyword causes the POSITION keyword to be ignored
and the image is positioned in the location established by the
last graphics command. For example:
Plot, Findgen(11), Position=[0.1, 0.3, 0.8, 0.95]
TVScale, image, /Overplot
POSITION: The location of the image in the output window. This is
a four-element floating array of normalized coordinates of
the type given by !P.POSITION or the POSITION keyword to
other IDL graphics commands. The form is [x0, y0, x1, y1].
The default is [0.0, 0.0, 1.0, 1.0]. Note that this keyword is ALSO
an output keyword. That is to say, upon return from TVSCALE
this keyword (if passed by reference) contains the actual
position in the window where the image was displayed. This
may be different from the input values if the KEEP_ASPECT_RATIO
keyword is set, or if you are using TVSCALE with the POSITION
keyword when !P.MULTI is set to something other than a single
plot. One use for the output values might be to position other
graphics (e.g., a colorbar) in relation to the image.
Note that the POSITION keyword should not, normally, be used
when displaying multiple images with !P.MULTI. If it *is* used,
its meaning differs slightly from its normal meaning. !P.MULTI
is responsible for calculating the position of graphics in the
display window. Normally, it would be a mistake to use a POSITION
graphics keyword on a graphics command that was being drawn with
!P.MULTI. But in this special case, TVSCALE will use the POSITION
coordinates to calculate an image position in the actual position
calculated for the image by !P.MULTI. The main purpose of this
functionality is to allow the user to display images along with
colorbars when using !P.MULTI. See the example below.
QUIET: There are situations when you would prefer that TVIMAGE does not
advertise itself by filling out the FSC_$TVIMAGE common block. For
example, if you are using TVIMAGE to draw a color bar, it would
not be necessary. Setting this keyword means that TVIMAGE just
goes quietly about it's business without bothering anyone else.
TOP: The image is scaled so that all displayed pixels have values
greater than or equal to BOTTOM and less than or equal to TOP.
The value of TOP is !D.Table_Size by default.
TVSCL: Setting this keyword makes the TVIMAGE command work much
like the TVSCL command, although better. That is to say, it
will still set the correct DECOMPOSED state depending upon
the kind of image to be displayed (8-bit or 24-bit). It will
also allow the image to be "positioned" in the window by
specifying the coordinates of the lower-left corner of the
image. The NORMAL keyword is activated when the TV keyword
is set, which will indicate that the position coordinates
are given in normalized coordinates rather than device
coordinates.
Setting this keyword will ensure that the keywords
KEEP_ASPECT_RATIO, MARGIN, MINUS_ONE, MULTI, and POSITION
are ignored.
XRANGE: If the AXES keyword is set, this keyword is a two-element vector
giving the X axis range. By default, [0, size of image in X].
YRANGE: If the AXES keyword is set, this keyword is a two-element vector
giving the Y axis range. By default, [0, size of image in Y].
OUTPUTS:
None.
SIDE EFFECTS:
Unless the KEEP_ASPECT_RATIO keyword is set, the displayed image
may not have the same aspect ratio as the input data set.
RESTRICTIONS:
If the POSITION keyword and the KEEP_ASPECT_RATIO keyword are
used together, there is an excellent chance the POSITION
parameters will change. If the POSITION is passed in as a
variable, the new positions will be returned in the same variable
as an output parameter.
If a 24-bit image is displayed on an 8-bit display, the
24-bit image must be converted to an 8-bit image and the
appropriate color table vectors. This is done with the COLOR_QUAN
function. The TVSCALE command will load the color table vectors
and set the NOINTERPOLATION keyword if this is done. Note that the
resulting color table vectors are normally incompatible with other
IDL-supplied color tables. Hence, other graphics windows open at
the time the image is display are likely to look strange.
EXAMPLE:
To display an image with a contour plot on top of it, type:
filename = FILEPATH(SUBDIR=['examples','data'], 'worldelv.dat')
image = BYTARR(360,360)
OPENR, lun, filename, /GET_LUN
READU, lun, image
FREE_LUN, lun
thisPosition = [0.1, 0.1, 0.9, 0.9]
TVSCALE, image, POSITION=thisPosition, /KEEP_ASPECT_RATIO
CONTOUR, image, POSITION=thisPosition, /NOERASE, XSTYLE=1, $
YSTYLE=1, XRANGE=[0,360], YRANGE=[0,360], NLEVELS=10
To display four image in a window with associated color bars:
!P.Multi=[0,2,2]
p = [0.02, 0.3, 0.98, 0.98]
LoadCT, 0
TVSCALE, image, Position=p
Colorbar, Position=[p[0], p[1]-0.1, p[2], p[1]-0.05]
p = [0.02, 0.3, 0.98, 0.98]
LoadCT, 2
TVSCALE, image, Position=p
Colorbar, Position=[p[0], p[1]-0.1, p[2], p[1]-0.05]
p = [0.02, 0.3, 0.98, 0.98]
LoadCT, 3
TVSCALE, image, Position=p
Colorbar, Position=[p[0], p[1]-0.1, p[2], p[1]-0.05]
p = [0.02, 0.3, 0.98, 0.98]
LoadCT, 5
TVSCALE, image, Position=p
Colorbar, Position=[p[0], p[1]-0.1, p[2], p[1]-0.05]
!P.Multi =0
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by: David Fanning, 27 May 1999 from TVIMAGE code.
Added MIN, MAX, and NCOLORS keywords 28 May 1999. DWF.
Added the OVERPLOT keyword to allow plotting on POSITION coordinates
estabished by the preceding graphics command. 11 Oct 99. DWF.
Added NOINTERPOLATION keyword so that nearest neighbor interpolation
is performed rather than bilinear. 3 Dec 99. DWF
Brought the TVSCALE code up to date with TVIMAGE code. 3 April 2000. DWF.
Brought the TVSCALE code up to date with TVIMAGE code. 6 May 2000. DWF.
Change MIN and MAX keywords to MINVALUE and MAXVALUE to prevent
ambiguous keyword errors. 27 July 2000. DWF.
Brought up to date with changes in TVImage. 23 Sept 2000. DWF.
Added fix for brain-dead Macs from Ben Tupper that restores Macs ability to display images. 8 June 2001. DWF.
Removed obsolete STR_SEP and replaced with STRSPLIT. 27 Oct 2004. DWF.
Brought up to date with changes to TVImage as of 22 April 2007. DWF.
Updated the program for the 24-bit Z-buffer in IDL 6.4. 11 June 2007. DWF.
Added new POSITION keyword functionality for !P.MULTI display. 9 Sept 2007. DWF.
Bit one too many times. Added _STRICT_EXTRA keywords for all _EXTRA keywords. 1 Feb 2008. DWF.
Added FSC_$TVIMAGE common block for interactive interaction with TVINFO. 16 March 2008. DWF.
Added keywords to allow axes to be drawn around the image. 18 March 2008. DWF.
Added QUIET keyword to allow by-passing of FSC_$TVIMAGE common block updating. 21 March 2008. DWF.
Made BACKGROUND and ERASE valid keywords only on 24-bit devices. Ignored on others. 28 May 2008. DWF.
Cannot make color work in device independent way for axes, unless I handle axis color directly. To this
end, I have added an ACOLOR keyword. 16 June 2008. DWF.
Added BREWER keyword so I can specify Brewer colors with BACKGROUND and ACOLOR keywords. 16 June 2008. DWF.
Added back missing HALF_HALF and OVERPLOT keywords. 17 October 2008. DWF.
Added the ability to display transparent images. 13 May 2009. DWF.
Modified to work with 24-bit color PostScript in IDL 7.1. 24 May 2009. DWF.
(See tvscale.pro)
NAME:
UNDEFINE
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to delete or undefine
an IDL program variable from within an IDL program or
at the IDL command line. It is a more powerful DELVAR.
Pointer and structure variables are traversed recursively
to undefine any variables pointed to in the pointer or in
a structure dereference.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1642 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfanning.com
CATEGORY:
Utilities.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
UNDEFINE, variable
REQUIRED INPUTS:
variable: The variable to be deleted. Up to 10 variables may be specified as arguments.
SIDE EFFECTS:
The variable no longer exists.
EXAMPLE:
To delete the variable "info", type:
IDL> Undefine, info
IDL> var = ptr_new({a:ptr_New(5), b:findgen(11), c: {d:ptr_New(10), f:findgen(11)}})
IDL> Help, /Heap
Heap Variables:
# Pointer: 3
# Object : 0
LONG = 5
LONG = 10
STRUCT = -> Array[1]
IDL> Undefine, var
IDL> Help, /Heap
Heap Variables:
# Pointer: 0
# Object : 0
IDL> Help, var
VAR UNDEFINED =
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Written by David W. Fanning, 8 June 97, from an original program
given to me by Andrew Cool, DSTO, Adelaide, Australia.
Simplified program so you can pass it an undefined variable. :-) 17 May 2000. DWF
Simplified it even more by removing the unnecessary SIZE function. 28 June 2002. DWF.
Added capability to delete up to 10 variables at suggestion of Craig Markwardt. 10 Jan 2008. DWF.
If the variable is a pointer, object or structure reference the variable is recursively traversed
to free up all variables pointed to before the variable is itself destroyed. 10 June 2009. DWF.
(See undefine.pro)
NAME:
VCOLORBAR
FILENAME:
vcolorbar__define.pro
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this program is to create a vertical
colorbar object to be used in conjunction with other
IDL 5 graphics objects.
AUTHOR:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: davidf@dfanning.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.dfan